foreword - toyota · 2017. 7. 21. · tions. section 1−1 explains the characteristics of the...

’07 HIGHLANDER HV_U (L/O 0608)

i

2007 HIGHLANDER HV from July ’06 Prod. (OM48685U)

ForewordWelcome to the growing group of value−conscious people who drive Toyotas. We are proud of the advanced engineering andquality construction of each vehicle we build.This Owner’s Manual explains the operation of your new Toyota. Please read it thoroughly and have all the occupantsfollow the instructions carefully. Doing so will help you enjoy many years of safe and trouble−free motoring. Forimportant information about this manual and your Toyota, read the following pages carefully.When it comes to service, remember that your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle very well and is interested in your completesatisfaction. Your Toyota dealer will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.If there is not a Toyota dealer near you, please call the following number:U.S. OWNERS: � When traveling in the U.S. mainland or Canada:

Toyota Customer Experience Center Toll−free:1−800−331−4331� Hawaii:

Servco Automotive Customer Services Toll−free:1−888−272−5515CANADIAN OWNERS: � When traveling in Canada or the U.S. mainland:

Toyota Canada Customer Interaction Centre Toll−free:1−888−TOYOTA−8 or 1−888−869−6828Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of Toyota’s policy ofcontinual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you mayfind some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.Please access our websites for further information.� The U.S. mainland www.toyota.com� Hawaii www.toyotahawaii.com� Canada www.toyota.ca

© 2006 TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATIONAll rights reserved. This material may not be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, without the written permission of ToyotaMotor Corporation.


ii


Important information about this manual

Safety and vehicle damage warnings

Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle dam-age warnings. You must follow these warnings carefully toavoid possible injury or damage.

The types of warnings, what they look like, and how they areused in this manual are explained as follows:

CAUTION

This is a warning against anything which may causeinjury to people if the warning is ignored. You areinformed about what you must or must not do inorder to reduce the risk of injury to yourself andothers.

NOTICE

This is a warning against anything which may causedamage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warningis ignored. You are informed about what you must ormust not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk ofdamage to your vehicle and its equipment.

Safety symbol

When you see the safety symbolshown above, it means: “Do not...”;“Do not do this”; or “Do not let thishappen”.


iii


Important information about your Toyota

Hybrid system on your vehicle

Your vehicle is a hybrid vehicle. It has characteristics dif-ferent from other conventional vehicles. You must under-stand the characteristics of your vehicle very well and han-dle it carefully. Read this manual and follow the instruc-tions. Section 1−1 explains the characteristics of the hy-brid system.

Occupant restraint systems

Toyota encourages you and your family to take the time toread Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual carefully. Interms of helping you understand how you can receive themaximum benefit of the occupant restraint systems thisvehicle provides, Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual isthe most important Section for you and your family toread.

Section 1−3 describes the function and operation concern-ing seats, seat belts, SRS airbags and child restraint sys-tems of this vehicle and some potential hazards youshould be aware of. These systems work together alongwith the overall structure of this vehicle in order to provideoccupant restraint in the event of a crash. The effect ofeach system can be enhanced when it is used properlyand together with other systems. No single occupant re-straint system can, by itself, provide you or your familywith the equal level of restraint which these systems canprovide when used together. That is why it is important foryou and your family to understand the purpose and properuse of each of these systems and how they relate to eachother.


iv


The purpose of all occupant restraint systems is to helpreduce the possibility of death or serious injury in theevent of a collision. None of these systems, either individ-ually or together, can ensure that there is no injury in theevent of collision. However, the more you know aboutthese systems and how to use them properly, the greateryour chances become of surviving an accident withoutdeath or serious injury.

Seat belts provide the primary restraint to all occupants ofthe vehicle, and every occupant of the vehicle should wearseat belts properly at all times. Children should always besecured in child restraint systems that are appropriate fortheir age and size. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)airbags are, as their names imply, designed to work with,and be supplemental to, seat belts and are not substitutesfor them. SRS airbags can be very effective in reducingthe risk of head and chest injuries by preventing contact ofthe head and chest with interior portions of the vehicle.

In order to be effective, the SRS airbags must deploy withtremendous speed. The rapid deployment of the SRS air-bags makes the SRS airbags themselves potential sourcesof death or serious injury if an occupant is too close to anairbag, or if an object or some part of his or her body hasbeen placed between the occupant and the airbag at thetime of deployment. This is just one example of how theinstructions in Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual will helpensure proper use of the occupant restraint systems, andincrease the safety they can provide to you and your fami-ly in the event of an accident.

Toyota recommends you to read the provisions in Section1−3 carefully and refer to them as needed during your timeof ownership of this vehicle.


v


Event data recorder

Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control cer-tain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist indriving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance. Be-sides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is asystem to record data in a crash or a near car crashevent. This is called an Event Data Recorder (EDR).

The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In acrash or a near car crash event, this device may recordsome or all of the following information:

� Gasoline engine speed

� Whether the brake pedal was applied or not

� Vehicle speed

� To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed

� Position of the transmission selector lever

� Whether the driver and front passenger wore the seatbelts or not

� Driver’s seat position

� Front passenger’s occupant classification

� SRS airbag deployment data

� SRS airbag system diagnostic data

The Electronic Control Unit (ECU) of the electronicallycontrolled brake (ECB) may contain another EDR. Thereare a variety of driving situations which include activatingthe ECB under which the ECB EDR will record certaininformation. The ECB EDR may record some or all of thefollowing information:

� Behavior of the vehicle

� Steering wheel angle

� Vehicle speed

� To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed

� To what extent the brake pedal was applied

� To what extent the ECU controlled the condition ofthe 4 wheels

� Vehicle stability control diagnostic data


vi


The information above is intended to be used for thepurpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlikegeneral data recorders, the EDR does not record sounddata such as conversation between passengers.

Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to athird party except when:

� An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leas-ing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained

� Officially requested by the police or other authorities

� Used as a defense for Toyota in a law suit

� Ordered by the court

However, if necessary Toyota will:

� Use the data for research on Toyota vehicle safetyperformance

� Disclose the data to a third party for research pur-poses without disclosing details of the vehicle owner,and only when it is deemed necessary

� Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identifi-cation information to a non−Toyota organization forresearch purposes

New vehicle warranty

Your new vehicle is covered by the following Toyota limitedwarranties:

� New vehicle warranty

� Emission control systems warranty

� Others

For further information, please refer to the “Owner’sWarranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s ManualSupplement”.

Your responsibility formaintenance

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that thespecified maintenance is performed. Section 6 givesdetails of these maintenance requirements. Also includedin Section 6 is general maintenance. For scheduledmaintenance information, please refer to the “ScheduledMaintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.


vii


Important health and safetyinformation about your Toyota

CAUTION

� WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-ents, and a wide variety of automobile compo-nents contain or emit chemicals known to theState of California to cause cancer and birth de-fects and other reproductive harm. In addition,oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles aswell as waste produced by component wear con-tain or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm.

� Battery∗ posts, terminals and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds. Wash yourhands after handling. Used engine oil containschemicals that have caused cancer in laboratoryanimals. Always protect your skin by washing

thoroughly with soap and water.

∗: The 12 volt battery for the hybrid vehicle

Accessories, spare parts andmodification of your Toyota

A wide variety of non−genuine spare parts and accessoriesfor Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market.You should know that Toyota does not warrant these prod-ucts and is not responsible for their performance, repair, orreplacement, or for any damage they may cause to, oradverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non−genuineToyota products. Modification with non−genuine Toyotaproducts could affect its performance, safety or durability,and may even violate governmental regulations. In addi-tion, damage or performance problems resulting from themodification may not be covered under warranty.


viii


Spark ignition system of yourToyota

The spark ignition system in your Toyota meets all require-ments of the Canadian Interference−Causing EquipmentStandard.

Installation of a mobile two−wayradio system

As the installation of a mobile two−way radio system inyour vehicle could affect electronic systems such as Toyotahybrid system, cruise control system, electronically con-trolled brake system, vehicle dynamics integrated manage-ment, SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner sys-tem, be sure to check with your Toyota dealer forprecautionary measures or special instructions regardinginstallation.

High voltage parts and cables on the hybrid vehiclesemit approximately the same amount of electromag-netic waves as the conventional gasoline poweredvehicles or home electronic appliances despite oftheir electromagnetic shieldings.

Unwanted noise may occur in the reception of themobile two−way radio.


ix


Tires and loading on yourToyota

Underinflated or overinflated tire pressure and theexcess load may result in the deterioration ofsteering ability and braking ability, leading to anaccident. Check the tire inflation pressure periodi-cally and be sure to keep the load limits given inthis Owner’s Manual. For details about tire inflationpressure and load limits, see pages 390 and 317.

On−pavement and off−roaddriving tips

This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class. Utility ve-hicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than othertypes of vehicles. This vehicle will handle and maneuverdifferently from an ordinary passenger car. In addition, thisvehicle has a higher ground clearance and center of gravi-ty than that of an ordinary passenger car. This vehicle de-sign feature causes this type of vehicle to be more likelyto rollover. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly mayresult in loss of control, accidents or vehicle rollover caus-ing death or serious injury. Be sure to read “Utility vehicleprecautions” on page 298 in Section 2 and “Off−road driv-ing precautions” on page 326 in Section 3.


x


Leak detection pump

This pump performs fuel evaporation leakage check. Thischeck is done approximately five hours after the hybridsystem is turned off. So you may hear sound coming fromunderneath the luggage compartment for several minutes.It does not indicate a malfunction.

Hybrid battery

The hybrid battery has a limited service life. Call yourToyota dealer or a qualified service shop for informationabout recycling or disposal of the battery.

Scrapping of your Toyota

CAUTION

In the event that your vehicle must be disposed of,make sure to contact your Toyota dealer or a quali-fied service shop. If your vehicle is disposed ofwithout the hybrid battery having been removed,there is a danger of serious electric shock if highvoltage parts, cables and their connectors are tou-ched. The traction batteries must be disposed of byyour Toyota dealer or a qualified service shop. If thetraction batteries are not disposed of properly, theymay cause electric shock that can result a death orserious injury.

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in yourToyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle isscrapped with the airbags and pretensioners left as theyare, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure tohave the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt preten-sioner removed and disposed of by the qualified serviceshop or by your Toyota dealer before you dispose of yourvehicle.


xi


High voltage cautions

CAUTION

The vehicle has high voltage DC and AC systems aswell as a 12−volt system. DC and AC high voltageis very dangerous and can cause severe burns andelectric shock that may result in death or seriousinjury.

� Never touch, disassemble, remove or replace thehigh voltage parts, cables and their connectors.High voltage parts and cables are indicated in theillustration on page 6. Touching, disassembling, re-moving or replacing those parts and cables cancause severe burns or electric shock that may re-sult in death or serious injury.

� Never try to open the service plug access holelocated on the left−hand side of the rear seatbase. The service plug is used only when the ve-hicle is serviced and is subject to high voltage.Touching the service plug can cause severe burnsor electric shock that may result in death or seri-ous injury.

� The hybrid system uses high voltage up to 650 V.The system can be hot while and after starting. Becareful of both the high voltage and the high tem-perature. Obey the caution labels attached to thevehicle.

Caution label


xii


Road accident cautions

CAUTION

� Pull your vehicle off the road, put the transmis-sion in the “P” position, apply the parking brake,turn the hybrid system off and remove the key.

� In order to avoid death or serious injuries, do nottouch high voltage wiring, connectors and high

voltage parts (inverter unit, hybrid battery andetc.).

� If exposed electric wires are protruding inside oroutside of your vehicle, an electric shock may oc-cur. Never touch the electric wires.

� If fluid leaks or gets into some parts of the ve-hicle, never touch it because it may be strong al-kaline electrolyte from the hybrid battery. If it con-tacts your skin or eyes, wash it off immediatelywith a large amount of water or if possible, boricacid solution. Get immediate medical attention inorder to help avoid serious injury.

� If a fire occurs in the hybrid vehicle, leave thevehicle as soon as possible. Never use a fire ex-tinguisher that is not meant for use on electricfires. Using a small amount of water may be alsodangerous.

� If your vehicle needs to be towed, do it with thefront wheels raised (front wheel drive models) orall four wheels raised (all wheel drive models). Ifthe wheels with the traction motor are on theground when towing, the motor may continue togenerate electricity. This may cause the electricityleakage. Depending on the severity of the damage,electricity leakage may cause fire. See “If yourvehicle needs to be towed” on page 353 in Section4.


1


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSHybrid vehicle overviewToyota hybrid system 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Energy monitor 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Starting your hybrid vehicle 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Efficient use of your hybrid vehicle 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Precautions for the use of hybrid vehicle 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Road accident cautions 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel overview 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument cluster overview 17. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicator symbols on the instrument panel 18. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 1


2


Toyota hybrid system combines thepower of a gasoline engine and a trac-tion motor to minimize fuel consump-tion and emissions.

Depending on driving conditions, the ve-hicle runs optimally on a combination ofthe gasoline engine and traction motor.

Since the gasoline engine charges the hy-brid battery as needed, the battery doesnot have to be charged from an outsidesource like an electric vehicle.

Toyota hybrid system performs variouscontrols depending on the operatingcondition. The condition appears on themulti−information display and/or naviga-tion system screen (with navigationsystem) when the display and/or screenis in “Energy Monitor” mode. See “Mul-ti−information display” on page 152 inSection 1−6 and “Trip information” onpage 271 in Section 1−10 for the opera-tion of the display and screen.

These are representative examples ofenergy monitor displays. Depending onthe condition, the energy monitor dis-plays the graphics different from thoseshown below. Depending on conditions,the graphic does not reflect the actualmotion of the vehicle.

The multi−information display

The navigation system screen

∗: All wheel drive models only

� When the vehicle is powered by thetraction motor.

Toyota hybrid system Energy monitor


3





� When the vehicle is powered by boththe gasoline engine and the tractionmotor.




� When the vehicle is powered by thegasoline engine.




� When the vehicle is regenerating andcharging the hybrid battery.


4





� When there is no energy flow.Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

Level 8

StatusThe multi−information

display

Thenavigation

systemscreen

The starting procedure is the same asthat for conventional vehicles.

Insert the key into the ignition and turn itto the “START” position.

The “READY” light flashes and stays on.A beep sounds after a few seconds, andthe hybrid system will start. If the ambienttemperature is low, it may take time untilthe “READY” light comes on. For details,see “How to start the hybrid system” onpage 324 in Section 3.

The engine may not start even with the“READY” light on.

—Hybrid battery status Starting your hybrid vehicle


5


Drive your vehicle with smooth accel-eration and deceleration.

� While driving, energy is recoveredthrough the regenerative brake as thevehicle decelerates. However, for effi-cient use, do not accelerate or deceler-ate your vehicle more than necessary.

� Avoid abrupt acceleration and decelera-tion.

� The power of the hybrid battery can bechecked on the multi−information dis-play or the navigation system screen(with navigation system). See “—Hybridbattery status” on page 4 for details.Gradual or non−abrupt acceleration anddeceleration will make more effectivelyuse of the traction motor without hav-ing to use gasoline engine power.

When parking, be sure to put the trans-mission into the “P” position. Whiledriving, put the transmission into the“D” position.

� In the “N” position, the gasoline engineoperates but electricity cannot be gen-erated. The hybrid battery will be dis-charged requiring unnecessary enginepower to recharge.

� The hybrid system automatically re-charges the hybrid battery when theremaining battery power is reduced.However, the hybrid battery cannot berecharged if the transmission is in the“N” position.

For detailed information, see “How to savefuel and make your vehicle last longer” onpage 335 in Section 3.

INFORMATION

The gasoline engine starts and stopsautomatically. (It stops during a lowload driving, deceleration or when thevehicle is stopped.)

As long as the “READY” light remainson, you can start your vehicle usingthe electric motor even with the gaso-line engine stopped.

The gasoline engine may not stop au-tomatically in the following condi-tions:

� During gasoline engine warm−up

� During hybrid battery charging

� During low or high hybrid batterytemperature

Efficient use of your hybridvehicle


6


1. High voltage cables

2. Inverter unit

3. DC/DC converter

4. Hybrid battery

5. Service plug

6. Rear traction motor (all wheel drive models only)

7. Front traction motor

8. Air conditioning compressor

The hybrid system uses high voltage upto 650 V. High voltage components areindicated in the illustration above. Highvoltage cables are orange. The systemcan be hot while and after starting. Becareful of both the high voltage and thehigh temperature.

Precautions for the use of hybrid vehicle——High voltage components


7


Caution label

CAUTION

The vehicle has high voltage DC andAC systems as well as a 12−volt sys-tem. DC and AC high voltage is verydangerous and can cause severeburns and electric shock that may re-sult in death or serious injury.

� Never touch, disassemble, removeor replace the high voltage parts,cables and their connectors. Highvoltage parts and cables are indi-cated in the illustration above.Touching, disassembling, removingor replacing those parts and cablescan cause severe burns or electricshock that may result in death orserious injury.

� The hybrid system uses high volt-age and the system can be hotwhile and after starting. Be carefulof both the high voltage and thehigh temperature. Obey the cautionlabels attached to the vehicle.

� Never try to open the service plugaccess hole located on the left−hand side of the rear seat base.The service plug is used only whenthe vehicle is serviced and is sub-ject to high voltage. Touching theservice plug can cause severeburns or electric shock that mayresult in death or serious injury.


8


Be sure to put the transmission in the“P” position when parking.

In the “N” position, the hybrid batterydoes not recharge, even if the gasolineengine is operating. Leaving the transmis-sion in the “N” position for an extendedperiod of time may discharge the hybridbattery. The vehicle cannot run if the hy-brid battery is discharged.

When you leave your vehicle, apply theparking brake, put the transmission inthe “P” position, be sure to carry thekey with you and lock all the doors.

If you leave the ignition in “ACC” or “ON”,the 12 volt battery will be discharged andthe hybrid system may not start.

� Because the vehicle is powered byboth the gasoline engine and the trac-tion motor, you may hear a motorsound coming from the engine compart-ment. However, this does not indicateany trouble.

� When the hybrid system is started orstopped, you may hear a sound comingfrom the hybrid battery under the rearseats. However, this does not indicateany trouble.

� When the hybrid system is started orstopped, or while the vehicle is idling,you may hear a sound coming from thetransmission. However, this does notindicate any trouble.

� When accelerating rapidly, the enginenoise may rise. However, this does notindicate any trouble.

� Repeated acceleration consumes hybridbattery power, resulting in poor accel-eration. Battery power can be restoredby driving with the accelerator pedalslightly released.

� When applying brakes, you may heara sound coming from the motor genera-tor. However, this does not indicateany trouble.

� You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment when the driver’s door isopened or the brake pedal is de-pressed with the hybrid system turnedoff. However, this does not indicate anytrouble.

� When the gasoline engine is started orstopped with the hybrid system on, youmay feel a vibration. However, thisdoes not indicate any trouble.

� If the “READY” light is on, you canstart even when the gasoline engine isoff.

� When you put the transmission in the“B” position and take your foot off theaccelerator pedal, engine braking willbe applied. However, during high speeddriving you may feel that engine brak-ing is less effective than that of ordi-nary vehicle.

If the vehicle is parked for a long time,the hybrid battery will discharge gradually.To keep the hybrid battery in good condi-tion, drive the vehicle at least once everyseveral months for at least 30 minutes or10 miles. If the hybrid battery becomesfully discharged and the vehicle will notstart even with a jump start to the 12 voltbattery, contact your Toyota dealership.

High voltage parts and cables on thehybrid vehicles emit approximately thesame amount of electromagneticwaves as the conventional gasolinepowered vehicles or home electronicappliances despite of their electro-magnetic shieldings.

Unwanted noise may occur in the re-ception of the mobile two−way radio.

—The characteristics of thehybrid vehicle


9


CAUTION

� The driver should pay special atten-tion to pedestrians when the vehicleis powered only by the traction mo-tor. Because there is no enginenoise, the pedestrians may mis-judge the vehicle’s movement.

� When you leave your vehicle, besure to turn off the hybrid system.

� Be sure to put the transmission inthe “P” position because the ve-hicle can move when the “READY”light is on even if the engine isstopped. When the “READY” light ison, do not leave your vehicle in ashift position other than the “P”and “N” positions. The vehicle willcreep and start abruptly if the ac-celerator pedal is depressed bymistake. This may cause death orserious injury.



If you open the door with the hybridsystem turned on and the transmissionis not in the “P” position, a messageappears on the multi−information dis-play and navigation system screen (forvehicles with navigation system).

� When you leave your vehicle, or stopor park for a while, put the transmis-sion in the “P” position.

� Charging the hybrid battery while driv-ing is important. In the “N” position,the hybrid battery will not be charged.Do not leave the transmission in the“N” position. The motor generator oper-ates in the “P”, “R”, “D” and “B” posi-tions. When you drive, put the trans-mission in the “D” or “B” position anddepress the accelerator pedal. Whendriving in a traffic jam, operate thevehicle in the “D” position to preventthe hybrid battery from being dischar-ged.


10


Hybrid battery air vents

Air vents are located in the lower partof the rear seats to cool the hybridbattery. If the vents are covered, thebattery will overheat resulting in re-duced output performance of the hybridsystem.

You may hear a noise of the cooling fansfrom the air vents.

For vehicle repairs or maintenance, besure to consult your Toyota dealer.

If your vehicle is beyond repair, contactyour Toyota dealer for assistance. Donot attempt to dispose of your vehicleby yourself.

CAUTION

Your vehicle contains a sealed Nick-el−Metal hydride battery. If disposedof improperly, it is hazardous to theenvironment and there is a risk ofsevere burns and electrical shock thatmay result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

� Do not put foreign objects over theair vent. The hybrid battery may beoverheated and damaged.

� Do not load a large amount of wa-ter such as an aquarium into thevehicle. If water spills over the hy-brid battery, the battery may bedamaged.

� Do not wet the air vent. This mayadversely affect or damage the hy-brid battery.

� Clean the air vent regularly to pre-vent the hybrid battery from over-heating.


11


CAUTION

� Pull your vehicle off the road, putthe transmission in the “P” posi-tion, apply the parking brake, turnthe hybrid system off and removethe key.

� In order to avoid personal injuries,do not touch high voltage wiring,connectors or high voltage parts(inverter unit, hybrid battery andetc.).

� If exposed electric wires are pro-truding inside or outside of yourvehicle, an electric shock may oc-cur. Never touch the electric wires.

� If fluid leaks or gets into someparts of the vehicle, never touch itbecause it may be strong alkalineelectrolyte from the hybrid battery.If it contacts your skin or eyes,wash it off immediately with a largeamount of water or if possible, bo-ric acid solution. Get immediatemedical attention in order to helpavoid serious injury.

� If a fire occurs in the hybrid ve-hicle, leave the vehicle as soon aspossible. Never use a fire extin-guisher that is not meant for elec-tric fires. Using a small amount ofwater may be also dangerous.

� If your vehicle needs to be towed,do it with the front wheels raised(front wheel drive models) or allfour wheels raised (all models). Ifthe wheels with the traction motorare on the ground when towing, themotor may continue to generateelectricity. This may cause the elec-tricity leakage. Depending on theseverity of the damage, electricityleakage may cause fire. See “If yourvehicle needs to be towed” on page353 in Section 4.

The emergency shut off system blocksoff the high voltage current and stopsthe fuel pump to minimize the risk ofthe electric leakage and the fuel leak-age when a certain level of impact isdetected by the impact sensor. If thesystem activates, your vehicle will notrestart. To restart the hybrid system,contact a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

� Check to see if there are exposedhigh voltage parts and cables. Nev-er touch the parts and cables. See“—High voltage components” onpage 6 in this Section for the loca-tions of the high voltage parts andcables.

� Inspect the ground under the ve-hicle. If you find that liquid hasleaked onto the ground, the fuelsystem may have been damaged.Leave the vehicle as soon as pos-sible.

Road accident cautions— —Emergency shut off system


12


1. Side defroster outlets

2. Instrument cluster

3. Center vents

4. Electric moonroof switch and personallights

5. Garage door opener

6. Auxiliary boxes

7. Side vents

8. Power door lock switches

9. Power window switches

10. Glove box

11. Transmission selector lever

12. Ashtrays

13. A/V input adapter

14. Power outlet (115 VAC)

15. Cup holder

16. Container

17. Power outlet (12 VDC)

18. Audio remote control switches

19. Hood lock release lever

20. Fuel filler door switch

21. Parking brake pedal

22. Window lock switch

Instrument panel overview�Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system (view A)


13


1. Side defroster outlets

2. Instrument cluster

3. Center vents

4. Electric moonroof switch and personallights

5. Garage door opener

6. Auxiliary boxes

7. Side vents

8. Power door lock switches

9. Power window switches

10. Glove box

11. Transmission selector lever

12. Ashtrays

13. Cup holder

14. Container


16. Audio remote control switches

17. Hood lock release lever

18. Fuel filler door switch

19. Parking brake pedal

20. Window lock switch

�Vehicles without rear seat entertainment system (view A)


14


1. Headlight, turn signal and front foglight switches

2. Wiper and washer switches

3. Emergency flasher switch

4. Clock

5. Front passenger’s seat belt reminderlight

6. Rear window and outside rear viewmirror defogger and windshield wiperde−icer switch

7. Air conditioning controls

8. Audio system

9. Front passenger airbag on−off indicatorlights

10. Seat heater switches


12. Cruise control switch

13. Ignition switch

14. Tilt steering lock release lever

15. Power outlet (115 VAC) main switch

16. Rear heater main switch

17. Theft deterrent system/engineimmobilizer system indicator light

18. Power rear view mirror control switches

�Vehicles with manual air conditioning controls (view B)


15





4. Clock

5. Trip information button


7. Air conditioning controls and tripinformation display


9. Audio system





14. Ignition switch





19. Power rear view mirror control switches

�Vehicles with automatic air conditioning controls (view B without navigation system)


16





4. Clock∗


6. Navigation system including airconditioning controls∗


8. Audio system∗





13. Ignition switch





18. Power rear view mirror control switches∗: See the separate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

�Vehicles with automatic air conditioning controls (view B with navigation system)


17


1. Power meter

2. Service reminder indicators andindicator lights

3. Speedometer

4. Fuel gauge

5. Low fuel level warning light

6. Engine coolant temperature gauge

7. Multi−information mode button

8. Multi−information display

9. Instrument panel light control/trip meterreset knob

Instrument cluster overview


18


Brake system warning light∗1

Charging system warning light∗1

Malfunction indicator lamp∗1

SRS warning light∗1

Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Open door warning light∗1

Electric power steering system warning light∗1

or or

Master warning light∗1

Anti−lock brake system warning light∗1or

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light∗1

(redindicator)

Hybrid battery warning light∗1 Driving ready light

(yellowindicator)

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel


19


∗1: For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warningbuzzers” on page 144 in Section 1−6.

∗2: If this light flashes, see “Cruise control” on page 172 inSection 1−7.

Cruise control indicator light∗2

Slip indicator light

Turn signal indicator lights

Transmission indicator lights

Headlight high beam indicator light

Headlight indicator light

Tail light indicator light

“AIRBAG ON” indicator light

“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light


20



21


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSKeys and DoorsKeys 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine immobilizer system 25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wireless remote control 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Side doors 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power windows 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back door 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hood 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft deterrent system 40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel tank cap 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric moonroof 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 2


22


Your vehicle is supplied with two kindsof keys.

1. Master keys—These keys work in ev-ery lock.

2. Sub key—This key will not work in theglove box.

To protect items locked in the glove boxwhen using valet parking, leave the subkey with the attendant.

Since the side doors can be locked with-out a key, you should always carry aspare key in case you accidentally lockyour keys inside the vehicle.

KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate.Keep the plate in a safe place such asyour wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if youneed additional keys, duplicates can bemade by a Toyota dealer using the keynumber.

We recommend writing down the key num-ber and storing it in a safe place.

Your vehicle is supplied with two kindsof keys.

1. Master keys (black)—These keys workin every lock. Your Toyota dealer willneed one of them to make a new keywith a built−in transponder chip.

2. Sub key (gray)—This key will not workin the glove box.

Keys (without engineimmobilizer system)

Keys (with engine immobilizersystem)


23


A transponder chip for engine immobilizersystem has been placed in the head ofthe master and sub keys. These chips areneeded to enable the system to functioncorrectly, so be careful not to lose thesekeys. If you make your own duplicate key,you will not be able to cancel the immobi-lizer system or start the hybrid system.

To protect items locked in the glove boxwhen using valet parking, leave the subkey with the attendant.

Since the side doors can be locked with-out a key, you should always carry aspare key in case you accidentally lockyour keys inside the vehicle. NOTICE

When using a key containing a trans-ponder chip, observe the followingprecautions:

� When starting the hybrid system,do not use the key with a key ringresting on the key grip and do notpress the key ring against the keygrip. Otherwise the hybrid systemmay not start, or may stop soonafter it starts.

� When starting the hybrid system,do not use the key with other trans-ponder keys around (including keysof other vehicles) and do not pressother key plates against the keygrip. Otherwise the hybrid systemmay not start, or may stop soonafter it starts. If this happens, re-move the key once and then insertit again after removing other trans-ponder keys (including keys of oth-er vehicles) from the ring or whilegripping or covering them with yourhand to start the hybrid system.


24


� Do not bend the key grip.

� Do not cover the key grip with anymaterial that cuts off electromagnet-ic waves.

� Do not knock the key hard againstother objects.

� Do not leave the key exposed tohigh temperatures for a long period,such as on the dashboard and hoodunder direct sunlight.

� Do not put the key in water orwash it in an ultrasonic washer.

� Do not use the key with electromag-netic materials. KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate.Keep the plate in a safe place such asyour wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if youneed additional keys, duplicates can bemade by a Toyota dealer using the keynumber.

We recommend writing down the key num-ber and storing it in a safe place.


25


The engine immobilizer system is atheft prevention system. When you in-sert the key in the ignition switch, thetransponder chip in the key’s headtransmits an electronic code to the ve-hicle. The hybrid system will start onlywhen the electronic code in the chipcorresponds to the registered ID codefor the vehicle.

The system is automatically set when thekey is removed from the ignition switch.The indicator light will start flashing toshow the system is set.

In the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer.

� The indicator light stays on.

� The indicator light does not start flash-ing when the key is removed from theignition switch.

� The indicator light flashes inconsistent-ly.

Inserting the registered key in the ignitionswitch automatically cancels the immobiliz-er system, which enables the hybrid sys-tem to start. The indicator light will go off.

For your Toyota dealer to make you anew key with built−in transponder chip,your dealer will need your key numberand master key. However, there is a limitto the number of additional keys yourToyota dealer can make for you.

If you make your own duplicate key,you will not be able to cancel the im-mobilizer system or start the hybridsystem.

NOTICE

Do not modify, remove or disas-semble the engine immobilizer sys-tem. If any unauthorized changes ormodifications are made, proper opera-tion of the system cannot be guaran-teed.

Engine immobilizer system


26


For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

FCC ID: MOZRI−20BTYMADE IN JAPAN

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, includ-ing interference that may cause unde-sired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complies with RSS−210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation ofthe device.

1. “LOCK” switch

2. “UNLOCK” switch

3. “PANIC” switch

Wireless remote control—


27


The wireless remote control system isdesigned to lock or unlock all the sidedoors and back door, or activate the“PANIC” mode from a distance withinapproximately 1 m (3 ft.) of the vehicle.

When you operate any switch, push itslowly and securely.

The wireless remote control transmitter isan electronic component. Observe the fol-lowing instructions in order not to causedamage to the transmitter.

� Do not leave the transmitter in placeswhere the temperature becomes highsuch as on the dashboard.

� Do not disassemble it.

� Avoid knocking it hard against otherobjects or dropping it.

� Avoid putting it in water.

You can use up to 4 wireless remote con-trol transmitters for the same vehicle.Contact your Toyota dealer for detailedinformation.

If the wireless remote control transmitterdoes not actuate the side doors and backdoor or alarm, or operate from a normaldistance:

� Check for closeness to a radio trans-mitter such as a radio station or anairport which can interfere with normaloperation of the transmitter.

� The battery may have been consumed.Check the battery in the transmitter. Toreplace the battery, see “—Replacingtransmitter battery” on page 30.

If you lose your transmitter, contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible toavoid the possibility of theft, or an acci-dent. (See “If you lose your wireless re-mote control transmitter” on page 359 inSection 4.)

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, includ-ing interference that may cause unde-sired operation.

NOTICE:This equipment has been tested andfound to comply with the limits for aClass B digital device, pursuant to Part15 of the FCC Rules. These limits aredesigned to provide reasonable protec-tion against harmful interference in aresidential installation. This equipmentgenerates, uses and can radiate radiofrequency energy and, if not installedand used in accordance with the instruc-tions, may cause harmful interference toradio communications. However, there isno guarantee that interference will notoccur in a particular installation. If thisequipment does cause harmful interfer-ence to radio or television reception,which can be determined by turning theequipment off and on, the user is en-couraged to try to correct the interfer-ence by one or more of the followingmeasures:


28


� Reorient or relocate the receiving an-tenna.

� Increase the separation between theequipment and receiver.

� Connect the equipment into an outleton a circuit different from that towhich the receiver is connected.

� Consult the dealer or an experiencedradio/TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING:Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party respon-sible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equip-ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:

(1) this device may not cause interfer-ence, and (2) this device must acceptany interference, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation ofthe device.

Locking operation

Unlocking operation

To lock and unlock all the side doorsand back door, push the switches ofthe transmitter slowly and securely.

To lock: Push the “LOCK” switch. All theside doors and back door are locked si-multaneously. At this time, one beep willbe heard, and the turn signal lights flashonce.

Check to see that all the side doors andback door are securely locked.

If any of the side doors or back door isnot securely closed, locking cannot beperformed by the “LOCK” switch and abeep will sound continuously for 10 sec-onds. However, if the key is in the igni-tion, a beep will not sound.

To stop the beep, close all the side doorsand back door securely or push the“UNLOCK” switch.

The beep can be disabled. For details,contact your Toyota dealer.

To unlock: Push the “UNLOCK” switchonce to unlock the driver’s door alone.Pushing the switch twice within 3 secondsunlocks all the side doors and back doorsimultaneously. Each time the “UNLOCK”switch is pushed, two beeps will be heard,and the turn signal lights flash twice.

—Locking and unlockingdoors


29


This double switch operation to unlock allthe side doors and back door can bechanged to a single switch operation. Fordetails, contact your Toyota dealer.

When all the side doors and back doorare unlocked simultaneously with a wire-less remote control transmitter, the centerinterior light, personal lights and ignitionswitch light come on for about 15 secondsbefore fading out, even if the door is notopened. (For details, see “Interior lights”on page 135, “Personal lights” on page136 and “Ignition switch light” on page137 in Section 1−5.)

You have 30 seconds to open a door afterusing the wireless remote unlock feature.If a door is not opened by then, all theside doors and back door will be automati-cally locked again. At this time, one beepwill be heard, and the turn signal lightsflash once.

The timing for the automatic door lockfunction can be changed. For details, con-tact your Toyota dealer.

If the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” switch is keptpressed in, the locking or unlocking opera-tion is not repeated. Release the switchand then push again.

The wireless door locking or unlockingfunction can be erased. For details, con-tact your Toyota dealer.

You can switch the beep on and off. (Thebeep is on initially and after battery re-placement.)

To switch the beep on and off:

With the driver’s door opened—

1. Insert the ignition key and remove it.

2. Within 5 seconds, insert the ignitionkey again and turn it to the “ON” posi-tion.

3. After 10 seconds, push the same“LOCK”, “UNLOCK” or “PANIC” switchtwice within 10 seconds.Two beep sounds inform you that theprogram has been switched on or off.

If this procedure is not followed exactly,the beep will not operate as expected.

Check the beep on/off operation by push-ing the transmitter switch after you finishthis procedure. If the beep does not oper-ate as expected, repeat this procedurefrom step 1.

—Switching beep sound


30


Pushing the “PANIC” switch blows thehorn intermittently and flashes theheadlights and tail lights.

The “PANIC” switch is used to deter ve-hicle theft when you witness anyone at-tempting to break into or damage yourvehicle.

The alarm will last for one minute. To stopalarm midway, do the following:

� Push the “PANIC” switch once again.

� Unlock any of side door or back doorwith the key or wireless remote controltransmitter.

� Turn the ignition key from the “LOCK”to “ON” position.

The “PANIC” mode does not work whenthe ignition key is in the “ON” position.

The alarm function can be disabled. Fordetails, contact your Toyota dealer.

For replacement, use a CR2016 lithiumbattery or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken to pre-vent small children from swallowingthe removed transmitter battery orcomponents.

NOTICE

� When replacing the transmitter bat-tery, be careful not to lose the com-ponents.

� Replace only with the same orequivalent type recommended by aToyota dealer.

� Dispose of used batteries accordingto the local laws.

Replace the transmitter battery by follow-ing these procedures:

—Activating panic mode—Replacing transmitterbattery


31


1. Using a coin or equivalent, open thetransmitter case.

2. Remove the discharged transmitter bat-tery by ballpoint pen. Insert the tip ofballpoint pen at the guide groove andlift as shown in the above illustration.

NOTICE

Do not bend the terminals.

3. Put in a new transmitter battery withpositive (+) side up.

Close the transmitter case securely.

NOTICE

� Make sure the positive side andnegative side of the transmitter bat-tery are faced correctly.

� Do not replace the battery with wethands. Water may cause unexpectedrust.

� Do not touch or move any compo-nents inside the transmitter, or itmay interfere with proper operation.


32


� Be careful not to bend the electrodewhen inserting the transmitter bat-tery and that dust or oils do notadhere to the transmitter case.

� Close the transmitter case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that thetransmitter operates properly. If the trans-mitter still does not operate properly, con-tact your Toyota dealer.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY

Insert the key into the keyhole and turnit.

To lock: Turn the key forward.To unlock: Turn the key backward.

All the side doors and back door lock andunlock simultaneously with either frontdoor. In the driver’s door lock, turning thekey once will unlock the driver’s door andtwice in succession will unlock all the sidedoors and back door simultaneously.

This double key turning operation to un-lock all the side doors and back door canbe changed to a single key turning opera-tion. For details, contact your Toyota deal-er.

When all the side doors and back doorare unlocked simultaneously using a key,the center interior light, personal lightsand ignition switch light will come on andremain on for about 15 seconds beforefading out. (For further information, see“Interior lights” on page 135, “Personallights” on page 136 and “Ignition switchlight” on page 137 in Section 1−5.)

The driver’s window can be opened orclosed with the key operation in the driv-er’s door keyhole. (For details, see “Powerwindows” on page 35 in this Section.)

Side doors


33


LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITHINSIDE LOCK KNOB

Move the lock knob.

To lock: Push the knob forward.To unlock: Pull the knob backward.

Closing the side door with the lock knobin the lock position will also lock the sidedoor. Be careful not to lock your keys inthe vehicle.

The door cannot be locked when eitherfront door is open and the key is in theignition.

Driver’s side

Passenger’s side

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITHPOWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Push the switch.

To lock: Push the switch down on thefront side.To unlock: Push the switch down on therear side.

Operating the switch simultaneously locksor unlocks all the side doors and backdoor.

If you do either of the following, no sidedoor or back door can be unlocked withthe power door lock switch.

� Lock all the side doors and back doorwith the key or wireless remote controltransmitter when all the side doors andback door are closed.

� Open the driver’s door or front passen-ger’s door and move the inside lockknobs of both front doors to the lockposition, then close the front doors.


34


The power door lock switch can be resetin the following ways.

� Turn the ignition key to “ON”.

� Unlock all the side doors and backdoor with the key or wireless remotecontrol transmitter.

� Unlock the driver’s door or front pas-senger’s door with the inside lockknob, and then unlock all the doorsand back door with the power doorlock switch.

REAR DOOR CHILD−PROTECTORS

Move the lock lever to the “LOCK”position as shown on the label.

When the child−protector is locked, youcannot open the rear door by the insidedoor handle. We recommend using thisfeature whenever small children are in thevehicle.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the doorsare closed and locked, especiallywhen small children are in the ve-hicle. Along with the proper use ofseat belts, locking the doors helpsprevent the driver and passengersfrom being thrown out from the ve-hicle during an accident. It also helpsprevent the doors from being openedunintentionally.


35


The windows can be operated with theswitch on each side door.

The power windows work when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position.

Key off operation: If all the side doorsand back door are closed, they work for43 seconds even after the ignition switchis turned off. They stop working when theeither front door is opened.

OPERATING THE DRIVER’S WINDOW

Use the switch on the driver’s door.

Normal operation: The window moves aslong as you hold the switch.

To open: Lightly push down the switch.To close: Lightly pull up the switch.

Automatic operation: Push the switchcompletely down or pull it completely up,and then release it. The window will fullyopen or close. To stop the window part-way, lightly move the switch in the oppo-site direction and then release it.

Jam protection function: During automat-ic closing operation, the window stops andopens half way if something gets caughtbetween the window and window frame.

If the window receives a strong impact,this function may work even if nothing iscaught.

CAUTION

� Never try jamming any part of yourbody to activate the jam protectionfunction intentionally, as it could re-sult in a death or serious injury.

� The jam protection function maynot work if something gets caughtjust before the window is fullyclosed.

Power windows


36


Window lockswitch

OPERATING THE PASSENGERS’WINDOWS

Use the switch on each passenger’sdoor or the switches on the driver’sdoor that control each passenger’s win-dow.

The window moves as long as you holdthe switch.

To open: Push down the switch.To close: Pull up the switch.

If you push in the window lock switch onthe driver’s door, the passengers’ windowscannot be operated.


37


OPERATING THE DRIVER’S WINDOWFROM OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

The driver’s window can be operatedwith the key inserted in the driver’sdoor keyhole.

To open: Turn the key fully backward andhold it.

After the door is unlocked, the windowbegins to open. To stop the window part-way, release the key.

To close: Turn the key fully forward andhold it.

After the door is locked, the window be-gins to close. To stop the window partway,release the key.

This feature can be disabled. For details,contact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

To avoid death or serious personalinjury, you must do the following.

� Before you close the power win-dows, always make sure there isnobody around the power windows.You must also make sure theheads, hands and other parts of thebodies of all occupants are keptcompletely inside the vehicle. Ifsomeone’s neck, head or hands getcaught in a closing window, itcould result in death or serious in-jury. When anyone closes the powerwindows, make sure he or she op-erates the windows safely.

� When small children are in the ve-hicle, never let them use the powerwindow switches without supervi-sion. Use the window lock switch toprevent them from making unex-pected use of the switches.

� Be sure to remove the ignition keywhen you leave your vehicle.

� Never leave anyone (particularly asmall child) alone in your vehicle,especially with the ignition key stillinserted. Otherwise, he/she coulduse the power window switches andget trapped in a window. Unat-tended person (particularly a smallchild) can be involved in a seriousaccident.


38


LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY

Insert the key into the keyhole and turnit.

To lock: Turn the key clockwise.To unlock: Turn the key counterclockwise.

To open the back door, pull the lockrelease lever.

Operating the power door lock switch orwireless remote control transmitter simul-taneously locks or unlocks the back door.(See “—Locking and unlocking doors” onpage 28 and “Side doors” on page 32 inthis Section.)

When closing the back door, make sureit is fully closed.

See “—Stowage precautions” on page 318in Section 2 for precautions when loadingluggage.

When closing the back door, the insidestrap can be used to make the reacheasier.

To close the back door, lower it and pressdown on it. After closing the back door,try pulling it up to make sure it is secure-ly closed.


Back door


39


CAUTION

Keep the back door closed while driv-ing. This not only keeps the luggagefrom being thrown out but also pre-vents exhaust gases from enteringthe vehicle.

To open the hood:

1. Pull the hood lock release lever. Thehood will spring up slightly.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the hoodis closed and securely locked. Other-wise, the hood may open unexpected-ly while driving and an accident mayoccur.

2. In front of the vehicle, pull up theauxiliary catch lever and lift thehood.

Hood


40


3. Hold the hood open by inserting thesupport rod into the slot.

Before closing the hood, check to see thatyou have not forgotten any tools, rags,etc. and return the support rod to itsclip—this prevents rattles. Then lower thehood and make sure it locks into place.If necessary, press down gently on thefront edge to lock it.

CAUTION

After inserting the support rod intothe slot, make sure the rod supportsthe hood securely from falling downon to your head or body.

To deter vehicle theft, the system isdesigned to sound an alarm if any ofthe side doors, back door or hood isforcibly unlocked or the battery termi-nal is disconnected and then recon-nected when the system is set.

The alarm blows the horn intermittentlyand flashes the headlights, tail lights andturn signal lights, and turns on the interiorlight.

SETTING THE SYSTEM

1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK”position and remove it.

The indicator light will start flashing whenthe key is removed from the ignitionswitch. (See “Engine immobilizer system”on page 25 in this Section for details.)

2. Have all passengers get out of thevehicle.

3. Close and lock all the side doors, backdoor and hood.

The indicator light will remain on when allthe side doors, back door and hood areclosed and locked.

Theft deterrent system


41


The system will automatically be set after30 seconds. When the system is set, theindicator light will start flashing again.

4. After making sure the indicator lightstarts flashing, you may leave the ve-hicle.

Never leave anyone in the vehicle whenyou set the system, because unlockingfrom the inside will activate the system.

Canceling the system

The system will cancel within 30 secondsbefore the system is set automatically un-der any of the following conditions:

� Any of the side doors, back door orhood is opened.

� Any of the side doors or back door isunlocked.

� The key is inserted into the ignition.

� The battery terminal is reconnected.

If the tail lights come on for 2 seconds,the theft deterrent system has beenalarmed. Check to see if there is anyabnormality with your vehicle.

WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SET

Activating the system

The system will sound the alarm underthe following conditions:

� If any of the side doors and back dooris unlocked or opened without the keyor wireless remote control transmitter,or if the hood is forcibly opened.

� If the battery terminal is disconnectedand then reconnected.

� If the ignition is hot−wired.

The indicator light will come on when thesystem is activated.

If any of the side doors and back door isunlocked without the key or wireless re-mote control transmitter and the key isnot in the ignition switch, all the sidedoors and back door will be automaticallylocked again.

After about 1 minute, the alarm will auto-matically stop and the indicator light willstart flashing again.

Reactivating the alarm

Once set, the system automatically resetsthe alarm after the alarm stops.

The alarm will activate again under thesame circumstances described in“Activating the system”.

Stopping the alarm

The alarm will be stopped by the followingconditions:

� Turn the ignition key from the “LOCK”to “ON” position.

� Unlock any of the side doors or backdoor with the key or wireless remotecontrol transmitter.

If the 12 volt battery becomes dis-charged due to the vehicle being un-used for a long time, etc., when thebattery is recharged or replaced, the sys-tem will give the alarm. If this happens,immediately unlock any of the side doorsor back door with the key or the wirelessremote control transmitter, and the alarmwill stop.


42


TESTING THE SYSTEM

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the system as described above.The side doors and back door shouldbe locked with the key or wireless re-mote control transmitter. Be sure towait until the indicator light starts flash-ing.

3. Unlock any door from the inside. Thesystem should activate the alarm.

4. Stop the alarm as described above.

5. Repeat this operation for the otherdoors and hood. When testing thehood, also check that the system isactivated when the battery terminal isdisconnected and then reconnected.

If the system does not work properly,have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

This indicates that the fuel filler door ison the left side of your vehicle.

To refuel your vehicle, turn the hybridsystem off.

CAUTION

Do not smoke, cause sparks or allowopen flames in the area when refuel-ing. The fumes are flammable.

1. To open the fuel filler door, push theswitch.

Fuel tank cap


43


If the pressure in the fuel tank is high, amessage “PLEASE WAIT NOW OPENING”will appear on the multi−information dis-play. It may take up to 10 seconds if theinternal pressure is high. The segments inthe display increase to indicate the timeleft. The segments in the display decreaseto indicate the time left.

When the pressure lowers, a message“REFUEL READY” will appear and the fuelfiller door will open.

If the fuel filler door does not open, theopener may have a malfunction. For de-tails, see “—If the fuel filler door openeris not actuated” on page 44 in this Sec-tion.

CAUTION

When opening the cap, do not removethe cap quickly. In hot weather, fuelunder pressure could cause injury byspraying out of the filler neck if thecap is suddenly removed.

2. Turn the cap slowly counterclockwiseand remove it.

The removed cap can be stored on thebackside of the fuel filler door.

When reinstalling, turn the cap clockwiseuntil you hear a click.

If the cap is not tightened securely, themalfunction indicator lamp will come on.Make sure the cap is tightened securely.The indicator lamp will go off after drivingthe vehicle several times. If the indicatorlamp does not go off, contact your Toyotadealer as soon as possible.


44


If you leave the fuel filler door open andstart the hybrid system, a message“CLOSE FUEL LID” will appear. Make surethe fuel filler door is closed.

CAUTION

� Make sure the cap is installed se-curely to prevent fuel spillage inthe event of an accident.

� Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tankcap for replacement. It is designedto regulate fuel tank pressure.

NOTICE

Finish refueling within 30 minutes. Ifmore than 30 minutes passes, the in-ternal valve closes. In this condition,fuel may spill out if you continue torefuel the vehicle. About 5 secondsafter the valve is closed, a message“CLOSE FUEL LID” will appear on thedisplay. To refuel the vehicle again,tighten the fuel tank cap and closethe fuel filler door, and then push thefuel filler door opener switch again.

If the opener is not actuated, contactyour Toyota dealer to service the ve-hicle. If you must refuel your vehicle,you can open the fuel filler door manu-ally as instructed below.

The system to lower internal pressurein the fuel tank may not be functioningso you must turn the cap slowly withreleasing the pressure. In addition, fuelmay spill out during refueling. Fill thefuel tank carefully and slowly.

1. Open the left side auxiliary box inthe luggage compartment.

2. Pull the manual lock release tab.

The fuel filler door will open.

3. Turn the cap slowly counterclock-wise.

You may hear a slight swoosh whenyou remove the cap.

CAUTION

When opening the cap, do not removeit quickly. The fuel may spray out ofthe filler opening if the cap is sud-denly removed.

—If the fuel filler door openeris not actuated


45


Sliding operation

Tilting operation

To operate the moonroof, use theswitch between the personal lights.

The moonroof works when the ignitionswitch is in the “ON” position.

The sun shade can be opened or closedby hand.

Sliding operation—

To open: Push the switch toward the“SLIDE OPEN” side.

The roof will open and stop partway 45mm (1.8 in.) from the fully opened posi-tion. When you push the switch towardthe “SLIDE OPEN” side again, the moonroof will open fully. To stop the roof part-way, push the switch toward either the“SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP” side quicklywhile the roof is moving.

As driving with the moon roof opened fullywill cause wind throbs, we recommendyou to drive with the moon roof partway45 mm (1.8 in.) from the fully openedposition.

When you quickly push and release theswitch, the moonroof will open while theswitch is depressed and stop when re-leased.

The sun shade will be opened togetherwith the roof.

To close: Push the switch toward the“TILT UP” side.

The roof will fully close automatically. Tostop the roof partway, push the switchtoward either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILTUP” side quickly.

When you quickly push and release theswitch, the moonroof will close while theswitch is depressed and stop when re-leased.

Tilting operation—

To tilt up: Push the switch toward the“TILT UP” side.

The roof will fully tilt up automatically. Tostop the roof partway, push the switchtoward either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILTUP” side quickly.

When you quickly push and release theswitch, the moonroof will tilt up while theswitch is depressed and stop when re-leased.

To tilt down: Push the switch toward the“SLIDE OPEN” side.

The roof will fully tilt down automatically.To stop the roof partway, push the switchtoward either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILTUP” side quickly.

Electric moonroof


46


When you quickly push and release theswitch, the moonroof will tilt down whilethe switch is depressed and stop whenreleased.

Open moonroof reminder: If the moon-roof is left open when you turn the ignitionkey to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position andopen the driver’s door, a message“MOONROOF OPEN” appears on the mul-ti−information display and a warning tonesounds.

Key off operation: If all the side doorsand back door are closed, it works for 43seconds even after the ignition switch isturned off. It stops working when eitherfront door is opened.

Jam protection function:

� If something gets caught between themoonroof and frame during slide clos-ing operation, the moonroof stops andthen opens slightly.

� If something gets caught between themoonroof and frame during tilting downoperation, the moonroof stops and thentilts up fully.

If the moonroof receives a strong impact,this function may work even if nothing iscaught.

CAUTION

To avoid death or serious personalinjury, you must do the following.

� While the vehicle is moving, alwayskeep the heads, hands and otherparts of the bodies of all occupantsaway from the roof opening. Other-wise, they could be killed or seri-ously injured if the vehicle stopssuddenly or if the vehicle is in-volved in an accident.

� Before you close the moonroof, al-ways make sure there is nobodyaround the moonroof. You mustalso make sure nobody places hisor her head, hands and other partsof the body in the roof opening. Ifsomeone’s neck, head or hands getcaught in the closing roof, it couldresult in death or serious injury.When anyone closes the moonroof,first make sure it is safe to do so.

� Be sure to remove the ignition keywhen you leave your vehicle.


47


� Never leave anyone (particularly asmall child) alone in your vehicle,especially with the ignition key stillinserted. Otherwise, he/she coulduse the moonroof switch and gettrapped in the roof opening. Unat-tended person (particularly a smallchild) can be involved in a seriousaccident.

� Never sit on top of the vehiclearound the roof opening.

� Never try jamming any part of yourbody to activate the jam protectionfunction intentionally, as it could re-sult in a death or serious injury.

� The jam protection function maynot work if something gets caughtjust before the moonroof is fullyclosed.


48



49


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOccupant restraint systemsSeats 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front seats 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear seats 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flattening seatbacks 63. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat heaters 66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Head restraints 67. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Armrests 68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Seat belts 68. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRS airbags 80. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Child restraint 101. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 3


50


While the vehicle is being driven, all ve-hicle occupants should have the seatbackupright, sit well back in the seat and prop-erly wear the seat belts provided.

CAUTION

� Do not drive the vehicle unless theoccupants are properly seated. Donot allow any passengers to sit ontop of a folded−down seatback, orin the luggage compartment or car-go area. Persons not properlyseated and/or not properly re-strained by seat belts can be killedor severely injured in the event ofemergency braking or a collision.

� During driving, do not allow anypassengers to stand up or movearound between seats. Otherwise,death or severe injuries can occurin the event of emergency brakingor a collision.

Driver seat

CAUTION

The SRS driver airbag deploys withconsiderable force, and can causedeath or serious injury especially ifthe driver is very close to the airbag.The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (“NHTSA”) advises:

Since the risk zone for driver airbagis the first 50—75 mm (2—3 in.) ofinflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10in.) from your driver airbag providesyou with a clear margin of safety.This distance is measured from thecenter of the steering wheel to yourbreastbone. If you sit less than 250mm (10 in.) away now, you canchange your driving position in sever-al ways:

� Move your seat to the rear as faras you can while still reaching thepedals comfortably.

� Slightly recline the back of theseat. Although vehicle designs vary,many drivers can achieve the 250mm (10 in.) distance, even with thedriver seat all the way forward, sim-ply by reclining the back of theseat somewhat. If reclining the backof your seat makes it hard to seethe road, raise yourself by using afirm, non−slippery cushion, or raisethe seat if your vehicle has thatfeature.

� If your steering wheel is adjustable,tilt it downward. This points the air-bag toward your chest instead ofyour head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as rec-ommended by NHTSA above, whilestill maintaining control of the footpedals, steering wheel, and your viewof the instrument panel controls.

SeatsFront seats— —Front seat precautions


51


Front passenger seat

CAUTION

The SRS front passenger airbag alsodeploys with considerable force, andcan cause death or serious injury es-pecially if the front passenger is veryclose to the airbag. The front passen-ger seat should be as far from theairbag as possible with the seatbackadjusted, so the front passenger sitsupright.

Front seats (with SRS side airbags)

CAUTION

The SRS side airbags are installed inthe driver and front passenger seats.Observe the following precautions.

� Do not lean against the front doorwhen the vehicle is in use, sincethe side airbag inflates with consid-erable speed and force. Otherwise,you may be killed or seriously in-jured.

� Do not use seat accessories whichcover the area where the side air-bags inflate. Such accessories mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, causing death orserious injury.

� Do not modify or replace the seatsor upholstery of the seats with sideairbags. Such change may preventthe side airbag system from activat-ing correctly, disable the system orcause the side airbags to inflate ac-cidentally, resulting in death or seri-ous injury.

CAUTION

� Do not adjust the seat while thevehicle is moving as the seat mayunexpectedly move and cause thedriver to lose control of the vehicle.

� Be careful that the seat does nothit a passenger or luggage.

� After adjusting the seat position, re-lease the lever and try sliding theseat forward and backward to makesure it is locked in position.

� After adjusting the seatback, pushyour body back against the seat tomake sure the seat is locked inposition.

� Do not put objects under the seats.Otherwise, the objects may interferewith the seat−lock mechanism orunexpectedly push up the seat posi-tion adjusting lever and the seatmay suddenly move, causing thedriver to lose control of the vehicle.

—Seat adjustment precautions


52


� While adjusting the seat, do not putyour hands under the seat or nearthe moving parts. Otherwise, yourhands or fingers may be caught andinjured.

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER

Hold the center of the lever and pull itup. Then slide the seat to the desiredposition with slight body pressure andrelease the lever.

2. SEAT CUSHION ANGLE ADJUSTINGKNOB

To change the angle of the seat cush-ion on the front side, turn the knobeither way.

3. SEAT HEIGHT ADJUSTING LEVER

To change the height of the seat, pullup or push down the lever.

4. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGLEVER

Lean forward and pull the lever up.Then lean back to the desired angleand release the lever.

—Adjusting front seats(manual seat)


53


CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat belts pro-vide maximum protection in a frontalor rear collision when the driver andthe front passenger are sitting upstraight and well back in the seats. Ifyou are reclined, the lap belt mayslide past your hips and apply re-straint forces directly to the abdomenor your neck may contact the shoul-der belt. In the event of a frontalcollision, the more the seat is re-clined, the greater the risk of deathor serious injury.

1. SEAT POSITION, SEAT CUSHIONANGLE AND SEAT HEIGHTADJUSTING SWITCH

Move the adjusting switch in the de-sired direction.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat atthat position.

Do not place anything under the frontseats, as this might interfere with the seatmovement.

2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGSWITCH

Move the adjusting switch in the de-sired direction.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat-back at that position.

—Adjusting front seats (powerseat)


54


CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat belts pro-vide maximum protection in a frontalor rear collision when the driver andthe front passenger are sitting upstraight and well back in the seats. Ifyou are reclined, the lap belt mayslide past your hips and apply re-straint forces directly to the abdomenor your neck may contact the shoul-der belt. In the event of a frontalcollision, the more the seat is re-clined, the greater the risk of deathor serious injury.

3. SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORTADJUSTING SWITCH

Press either side of the switch.

The amount of lumbar support will changewhile the switch is pressed.

CAUTION

� Do not adjust the seat while thevehicle is moving.


� Be careful not to get your hands orfeet pinched in the seat.



� When returning the seatback to theupright position, observe the follow-ing precautions in order to preventpersonal injury in a collision orsudden stop:

Make sure the seatback is securelylocked by pushing forward and rear-ward on the top of the seatback.Failure to do so will prevent theseat belt from operating properly.

Make sure the seat belts are nottwisted or caught in the seatbackand are arranged in their properposition and are ready to use.

Folding down the rear seatbacks will en-large the luggage compartment. See“—Stowage precautions” on page 318 inSection 2 for precautions when loadingluggage.

Rear seats——Rear seat precautions


55


Vehicles with third seat Vehicles without third seat

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER

Hold the center of the lever and pull itup. Then slide the seat to the desiredposition with slight body pressure andrelease the lever.


Pull the lever up. Then lean back to thedesired angle and release the lever.

CAUTION



—Adjusting second seats


56


� Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat beltsprovide maximum protection in afrontal or rear collision when thepassengers are sitting up straightand well back in the seats. If youare reclined, the lap belt may slidepast your hips and apply restraintforces directly to the abdomen oryour neck may contact the shoulderbelt. In the event of a frontal colli-sion, the more the seat is reclined,the greater the risk of death or se-rious injury.



NOTICE

Do not fold the second seat seatbackforward with the luggage cover hooksattached.

For easy access to the third seat:

1. Lift the lever on the side of the seat-back and fold the seatback.

The seat will slide forward.

2. Move the seat to the front−most posi-tion.

After passengers are in, lift up the seat-back and return the seat until it locks.

CAUTION

After putting back the seat, try push-ing the seat forward and rearward tomake sure it is secured in place.

To fold down the second seat after it hasbeen moved to access the third seat,push the seatback up slightly and thenpull the seatback adjusting lever beforefolding the seatback down. (See “—Fold-ing down second seats” described belowfor instructions about folding down thesecond seat.)

—Moving second seat forthird seat access


57


Vehicles with third seat

Vehicles without third seat

BEFORE FOLDING DOWN SECONDSEATS

1. Stow the center seat belt buckle ofthe second seat as shown in the il-lustration.

NOTICE

The seat belt buckle must be stowedbefore you fold the second seat.

2. Make sure the outer seat beltspasses through the hangers whenfolding the second seat.

This prevents the shoulder belt from beingdamaged.

CAUTION

The seat belt must be removed fromthe hangers when they are in use.

NOTICE

The seat belt must be stowed beforeyou fold the seatback.

—Folding down second seats


58


FOLDING DOWN SECOND SEATS(vehicles without third seat)

Pull the seatback angle adjusting leverto unlock the seatback and fold theseatback down until it locks.

The seat position returns to the rear−mostposition when the seatback is foldeddown.

CAUTION

Be careful that the seat does not hita passenger or luggage.

NOTICE


Folding down the second seats will en-large the luggage compartment. See“—Stowage precautions” on page 318 inSection 2 for precautions when loadingluggage.

CAUTION

When returning the seatback to theupright position, observe the follow-ing precautions in order to preventdeath or serious injury in a collisionor sudden stop:

� Make sure the seatback is securelylocked by pushing forward and rear-ward on the top of the seatback.Failure to do so will prevent theseat belt from operating properly.

� Make sure the seat belts are nottwisted or caught in the seatbackand are arranged in their properposition and are ready to use.

FOLDING DOWN SECOND SEATS(vehicles with third seat)

Pull the seatback angle adjusting leverto unlock the seatback and fold theseatback down until it locks.

Right side seat: The seat remains in posi-tion when pushing the seat cushion back-wards while folding down the seatback.


59


CAUTION


� After folding down the right sideseat, try pushing the seat forwardand rearward to make sure it is se-cured in place.

NOTICE


Folding down the second seats will en-large the luggage compartment.

If there is space between the second seatand the folded third seat seatback, slidethe folded second seat to the rear−mostposition.

CAUTION

After sliding the seat, try pushing theseat forward and rearward to makesure it is secured in place.


CAUTION



� Make sure the seat belts are nottwisted or caught in the seatbackand are arranged in their properposition and are ready to use.


60


From front

From rear

1. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTINGSTRAP

Lean forward and pull the strap towardyou. Then lean back to the desiredangle and release the strap.


Pull down the lever, then adjust theseatback to the desired angle and re-lease the lever.

CAUTION



� Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat beltsprovide maximum protection in afrontal or rear collision when thepassengers are sitting up straightand well back in the seats. If youare reclined, the lap belt may slidepast your hips and apply restraintforces directly to the abdomen oryour neck may contact the shoulderbelt. In the event of a frontal colli-sion, the more the seat is reclined,the greater the risk of death or se-rious injury.


—Adjusting third seat


61


BEFORE FOLDING DOWN THIRD SEAT

Make sure that the seat is clear ofpeople and luggage.

1. Stow the third seat seat belt bucklesas shown in the illustration.

NOTICE

The seat belt buckles must be stowedbefore you fold the third seat.

2. To stow the seat belt, first insert tab1 into the slot and then insert tab 2into the slot. Make sure the tabs aresecurely locked in the slot.

NOTICE

The seat belt must be stowed beforeyou fold the seatback.

—Folding down third seat


62


From front

From rear

FOLDING DOWN THIRD SEAT

Lower the head restraints to the lowestposition. Pull the seatback angle adjust-ing strap toward you or pull down theseatback angle adjusting lever to un-lock the seatback and fold the seatbackdown until it locks.

CAUTION

Be careful that the seat does not hita passenger or luggage.

Folding down the third seat will enlargethe luggage compartment. See “—Stowageprecautions” on page 318 in Section 2 forprecautions when loading luggage.

RETURNING THIRD SEAT

Pull the seatback adjusting lever to un-lock the seatback and fold up the seat-back to its upright lock position.


63


CAUTION



� Make sure the seat belts are nottwisted or caught under the seatand are arranged in their properposition and are ready to use.

To flatten the seatbacks, do the follow-ing:

1. Hold the center of the lever and pullit up, sliding the second seat to therear−most position. Then pull theseat forward slightly until it locks.

2. Remove the head restraint. Hold thecenter of the lever and pull it up.Then slide the front seat further for-ward than the front−most lock posi-tion.

Flattening seatbacks (manual seat)


64


3. Pull the seatback angle adjusting le-ver up to unlock and push down theseatback.

When returning the seatback to the up-right position, be careful not to makeyourself hit by the seatback which willbound with considerable spring force.

After returning the seat to its originalposition, be certain to replace the headrestraint.

CAUTION

� Do not allow passengers to ride onthe flattened seat while driving; usethe seat in the normal position.

� After returning the seat to its origi-nal position, try pushing the seatand seatback forward and rearwardto make sure it is secured in place.Be certain to replace head restraint.

To flatten the seatbacks, do the follow-ing:

1. Hold the center of the lever and pullit up, sliding the second seat to therear−most position. Then pull theseat forward slightly until it locks.

Flattening seatbacks (power seat)


65


2. Remove the head restraint. Push theseat position adjusting switch for-ward to slide the front seat to thefront−most position.

3. Move the seatback angle adjustingswitch backward to flatten the seat-back.

After returning the seat to its originalposition, be certain to replace the headrestraint.

CAUTION

� Do not allow passengers to ride onthe flattened seat while driving; usethe seat in the normal position.

� After returning the seat to its origi-nal position, try pushing the seatand seatback forward and rearwardto make sure it is secured in place.Be certain to replace head restraint.


66


To turn on the seat heater, push theswitches (“L” switch for the left frontseat and “R” switch for the right frontseat). At this time, the indicator lightwill illuminate to indicate the seat heat-er is operating.

To turn off the seat heater, push theswitch once again.

The key must be in the “ON” position tooperate seat heaters.

CAUTION

Occupants must use caution when op-erating the seat heater because itmay make them feel too hot or causeburns at low temperatures (erythema,varicella). Use extra caution for;

� Babies, small children, elderly per-sons, sick persons or persons withphysical disabilities

� Persons who have sensitive skin

� Persons who are exhausted

� Persons who have taken alcohol ordrugs which induce sleep (sleepingdrug, cold remedy, etc.)

To prevent the seat overheating, donot use the seat heater with a blan-ket, cushion, or other insulating ob-jects which cover the seat.

NOTICE

� Do not put unevenly weighed ob-jects on the seat and do not sticksharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)into the seat.

� When cleaning the seats, do notuse organic substances (paint thin-ner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline,etc.). They may damage the heaterand seat surface.

� To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, turn the switch offwhen the hybrid system is off.

Seat heaters


67


Front seats

Second seats

Third seats

For your safety and comfort, adjust thehead restraint before driving.

To raise: Pull it up.To lower: Push it down while pressing thelock release button.

Front head restraints only—On some mod-els, you can also move the front headrestraint forward or backward. If such ad-justment is desired, pull or push the baseof the head restraint.

Second and third seat head restraints—When an occupant sits in the second orthird seat, always raise the head restraintto the lock position.

The head restraint is most effective whenit is close to your head. Therefore, usinga cushion on the seatback is not recom-mended.

CAUTION

� Adjust the center of the head re-straint so that it is closest to thetop of your ears.

� After adjusting the head restraint,make sure it is locked in position.

� Do not drive with the head re-straints removed.

Head restraints


68


Front seats

Second seat

To use the armrest, pull it down asshown in the illustrations.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the armrest,avoid putting heavy loads on it.

Toyota strongly urges that the driver andpassengers in the vehicle be properly re-strained at all times with the seat beltsprovided. Failure to do so could increasethe chance of injury and/or the severity ofinjury in accidents.

The seat belts provided for your vehicleare designed for people of adult size,large enough to properly wear them.

Child. Use a child restraint system ap-propriate for the child until the child be-comes large enough to properly wear thevehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint”on page 101 in this Section for details.

If a child is too large for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rearseat and must be restrained using thevehicle’s seat belt. According to accidentstatistics, the child is safer when properlyrestrained in the rear seat than in thefront seat.

If a child must sit in the front seat, theseat belts should be worn properly. If anaccident occurs and the seat belts are notworn properly, the force of the rapid infla-tion of the airbag may cause death orserious injury to the child.

ArmrestsSeat belts——Seat belt precautions


69


Do not allow any children to stand up orkneel on either rear or front seats. Anunrestrained child could suffer serious in-jury or death during emergency braking ora collision. Also, do not let the child siton your lap. Holding a child in your armsdoes not provide sufficient restraint.

Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends theuse of a seat belt. Ask your doctor forspecific recommendations. The lap beltshould be worn securely and as low aspossible over the hips and not on thewaist.

Injured person. Toyota recommends theuse of a seat belt. Depending on the inju-ry, first check with your doctor for specificrecommendations.

CAUTION

Persons should ride in their seatsproperly wearing their seat beltswhenever the vehicle is moving.Otherwise, they are much more likelyto suffer serious bodily injury ordeath in the event of sudden brakingor a collision.

When using the seat belts, observethe following:

� Use the belt for only one person ata time. Do not use a single belt fortwo or more people—even children.

� Avoid reclining the seatback anymore than needed. The seat beltsprovide maximum protection in afrontal or rear collision when thedriver and the front passenger aresitting up straight and well back inthe seats. If you are reclined, thelap belt may slide past your hipsand apply restraint forces directlyto the abdomen or your neck maycontact the shoulder belt. In theevent of a frontal collision, themore the seat is reclined, the great-er the risk of death or serious inju-ry.

� Be careful not to damage the beltwebbing or hardware. Take care thatthey do not get caught or pinchedin the seat or doors.

� Inspect the belt system periodically.Check for cuts, fraying, and looseparts. Damaged parts should be re-placed. Do not disassemble ormodify the system.

� Keep the belts clean and dry. Ifthey need cleaning, use a mild soapsolution or lukewarm water. Neveruse bleach, dye, or abrasive clean-ers, or allow them to come intocontact with the belts—they mayseverely weaken the belts. (See“Cleaning the interior” on page 365in Section 5.)

� Replace the belt assembly (includ-ing bolts) if it has been used in asevere impact. The entire assemblyshould be replaced even if damageis not obvious.


70


Tab

Buckle

Adjust the seat as needed and sit upstraight and well back in the seat. Tofasten your belt, pull it out of the re-tractor and insert the tab into thebuckle.

You will hear a click when the tab locksinto the buckle.

The seat belt length automatically adjuststo your size and the seat position.

The retractor will lock the belt during asudden stop or on impact. It also maylock if you lean forward too quickly. Aslow, easy motion will allow the belt toextend, and you can move around freely.

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is com-pletely extended and is then retractedeven slightly, the belt is locked in thatposition and cannot be extended. This fea-ture is used to hold the child restraintsystem securely. (For details, see “Childrestraint” on page 101 in this Section.) Tofree the belt again, fully retract the beltand then pull the belt out once more.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of theretractor, firmly pull the belt and releaseit. You will then be able to smoothly pullthe belt out of the retractor.

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the belt is not twisted.

� Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent youfrom properly latching the tab andbuckle.

� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer. Do not use the seatuntil the seat belt is fixed, becauseit cannot protect an adult occupantor your child from death or seriousinjury.

Take upslack

Too high

Keep as low onhips as possible

Adjust the position of the lap andshoulder belts.

Position the lap belt as low as possibleon your hips—not on your waist, then ad-just it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulderportion upward through the latch plate.

—Fastening front and rearseat belts


71


CAUTION

� Both high−positioned lap belts andloose−fitting belts could causedeath or serious injuries due tosliding under the lap belt during acollision or other unintended event.Keep the lap belt positioned as lowon hips as possible.

� Do not place the shoulder belt un-der your arm.

Seat belts with an adjustable shoulderanchor—

Adjust the shoulder anchor position toyour size.

To raise: Slide the anchor up.To lower: Push in the lock release buttonand slide the anchor down.

After adjustment make sure the anchor islocked in position.

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center ofyour shoulder. The belt should bekept away from your neck, but notfalling off your shoulder. Failure todo so could reduce the amount ofprotection in an accident and causedeath or serious injures in a colli-sion.


72


To release the belt, press the bucklerelease button and allow the belt toretract.

If the belt does not retract smoothly, pullit out and check for kinks or twists. Thenmake sure it remains untwisted as it re-tracts.

THIRD SEAT SEAT BELTS

The third seat seat belts are 3−point typerestraint with 2 buckles. Both seat beltbuckles must be correctly located and se-curely latched for proper operation.

Make sure buckle 1 is securely latchedfor ready use of the third seat seat belt.

Two buckles and tabs for third seatseat belt

The two tabs have different shape for itsend so that the belt is not buckled in thewrong place.

Buckle 1—Properly matches with con-cave end tabBuckle 2—Properly matches with roundend tab


73


CAUTION

Make sure the both buckles are cor-rectly located and securely latched.Failure to properly match the buckleand tab may cause severe injury incase of an accident or a collision.

To release the concave end tab, insert thekey into the hole on buckle 1 and allowthe belt to retract.

CAUTION

Do not use the third seat seat beltwith either buckle released. Fasteningonly the shoulder belt or lap belt maycause severe personal injury in caseof sudden braking or a collision.


74


Second seat (vehicles with third seat)

Second seat (vehicles without third seat) Third seats

The second and third seat seat beltbuckles can be stowed when not inuse.

Seat belt buckles must be stowed beforeyou fold the seatback. (See “—Foldingdown second seats” on page 57 and“—Folding down third seat” on page 61 inthis Section.)

—Stowing the second andthird seat seat belt buckles


75


To stow the third seat seat belt, firstinsert tab 1 into the slot and then in-sert tab 2 into the slot. Make sure thetabs are securely locked in the slot.

Seat belt must be stowed before you foldthe seatback. (See “—Folding down thirdseat” on page 61 in this Section.)

NOTICE

Stow the third seat seat belt whennot in use.

If your seat belts cannot be fastened se-curely because they are not long enough,a personalized seat belt extender is avail-able from your Toyota dealer free ofcharge.

Please contact your local Toyota dealer toorder the proper required length for theextender. Bring the heaviest coat you ex-pect to wear for proper measurement andselection of length. Additional ordering in-formation is available at your Toyota deal-er.

CAUTION

When using the seat belt extender,observe the following precautions.Failure to follow these instructionscould reduce the effectiveness of theseat belt restraint system in case ofan accident, increasing the chance ofdeath or serious injury.

� Remember that the extender pro-vided for you may not be safe whenused on a different vehicle, foranother person, or at a differentseating position than the one origi-nally intended.

� If the seat belt extender has beenconnected to the driver’s seat beltbuckle without wearing the seat beltwhen using the extender in thedriver’s seat, the SRS driver’s air-bag system will judge that the driv-er wears the seat belt even if notwearing it. In this case, the driver’sairbag may not activate correctly,causing death or serious injury inthe event of collision. Be sure towear the seat belt with the seat beltextender.

—Stowing the third seat seatbelt —Seat belt extender


76


� Make sure the “AIRBAG ON”indicator light is illuminated whenusing the seat belt extender for thefront passenger seat. If the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light isilluminated, disconnect the extendertongue from the seat belt buckle,then reconnect the seat belt.Reconnect the seat belt extenderafter making sure the “AIRBAG ON”indicator light is illuminated. If youuse the seat belt extender while the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light isilluminated, the front passengerairbag and side airbag on the frontpassenger side may not activatecorrectly, causing death or seriousinjury in the event of collision.

� Be sure to wear the seat belt with-out the seat belt extender if youcan fasten the seat belt without theextender.

� Do not use the seat belt extenderwhen installing a child restraintsystem on the front or rear passen-ger seat. If installing a child re-straint system with the seat beltextender connected to the seat belt,the seat belt will not securely holdthe child restraint system, whichcould cause death or serious injuryto the child or other passengers inthe event of collision.

To connect the extender to the seatbelt, insert the tab into the seat beltbuckle so that the “PRESS” signs onthe buckle release buttons of the ex-tender and the seat belt are both facingoutward as shown.

You will hear a click when the tab locksinto the buckle.

When releasing the seat belt, press onthe buckle release button on the extender,not on the seat belt. This helps preventdamage to the vehicle interior and extend-er itself.


77


As far as the seat belt extender on thefront passenger side is concerned, do notfail to disconnect the extender from theseat belt after the above operation in or-der to activate the front passenger airbagcorrectly when getting into the vehiclenext time.

When not in use, remove the extenderand store in the vehicle for future use.

CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the lap and shoulder portionsof the belt and the seat belt extend-er are not twisted.

� Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent youfrom properly latching the tab andbuckle.

� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, immediately contact yourToyota dealer. Do not use the seatuntil the seat belt is fixed, becauseit cannot protect an adult occupantor your child from death or seriousinjury.

The driver and front passenger seatbelt pretensioners are designed to beactivated in response to a severe fron-tal impact or a vehicle roll over.

When the sensor detects a severe frontalimpact or a vehicle roll over, the frontseat belts are quickly drawn back by theretractors so that the belts snugly restrainthe occupants.

The front passenger’s seat belt pretension-er will not activate if no passenger isdetected in the front passenger seat bythe front passenger occupant classificationsystem. However, the front passenger’sseat belt pretensioner may activate if lug-gage is put on the seat, or the seat beltis buckled up regardless of the presenceof an occupant in the seat. (As for thefront passenger occupant classificationsystem, see “—Front passenger occupantclassification system” on page 96 in thisSection.)

The seat belt pretensioners and SRS air-bags may not operate together in all colli-sions.

—Seat belt pretensioners


78


The seat belt pretensioner system con-sists mainly of the following componentsand their locations are shown in the il-lustration.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. SRS warning light

3. Front passenger occupant classificationsystem (ECU and sensors)

4. Seat belt pretensioner assemblies

5. Front passenger’s seat belt buckleswitch

6. Airbag sensor assembly

The seat belt pretensioners are controlledby the airbag sensor assembly. The airbagsensor assembly consists of a safing sen-sor and airbag sensor.

When the seat belt pretensioners are acti-vated, an operating noise may be heardand a small amount of non−toxic gas maybe released. This does not indicate thata fire is occurring. This gas is normallyharmless.

Once the seat belt pretensioners havebeen activated, the seat belt retractorsremain locked.

CAUTION

Do not modify, remove, strike or openthe seat belt pretensioner assemblies,airbag sensor or surrounding area orwiring. Failure to follow these instruc-tions may prevent the seat belt pre-tensioners from activating correctly,cause sudden operation of the systemor disable the system, which couldresult in death or serious injury. Con-sult your Toyota dealer about any re-pair and modification.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of theseat belt pretensioners in somecases.

� Installation of electronic devicessuch as a mobile two−way radio,cassette tape player or compactdisc player

� Repairs on or near the front seatbelt retractor assemblies

� Modification of the suspension sys-tem

� Modification of the front end struc-ture

� Attachment of a grille guard (bullbar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,winches or any other equipment tothe front end

� Repairs made on or near the frontfenders, front end structure or con-sole


79


This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the seat belt pretensioners areoperating properly.

This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat beltbuckle switch, front passenger occupantclassification system, “AIRBAG ON” indi-cator light, “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light,front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat-ors, interconnecting wiring and powersources. (For details, see “Service remind-er indicators and warning buzzers” onpage 144 in Section 1−6.)

If any of the following conditions occurs,this indicates a malfunction of the airbagsor seat belt pretensioners. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible.

� The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion or remains on for more than 6seconds or flashes.

� The light comes on or starts flashingwhile driving.

� If any seat belt does not retract orcannot be pulled out due to a malfunc-tion or activation of the relevant seatbelt pretensioner.

� The seat belt pretensioner assembly orsurrounding area has been damaged.

In the following cases, contact your Toyotadealer as soon as possible:

� The front of the vehicle (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe seat belt pretensioners to operate.

� Either seat belt pretensioner assemblyor surrounding area is scratched,cracked, or otherwise damaged.


80


The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) front airbags are designed to pro-vide further protection for the driverand front passenger in addition to theprimary safety protection provided bythe seat belts.

Your vehicle is equipped with “ADVANCEDAIRBAGS” designed based on US motorvehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). Theairbag system controls airbag deploymentpower for the driver and front passenger.The driver airbag system consists of thedriver seat’s position sensor etc. The frontpassenger’s airbag system consists of thefront passenger occupant classificationsensor etc.

In response to a severe frontal impact,the SRS front airbags work with the seatbelts to help reduce injury by inflating.The SRS front airbags help reduce injuriesmainly to the driver’s or front passenger’shead or chest caused by hitting the ve-hicle interior.

The SRS front passenger airbag will notactivate if there is no passenger sitting inthe front passenger seat. However, thefront passenger airbag may deploy if lug-gage is put in the seat, or the seat beltis buckled up, regardless of the presenceof an occupant in the seat. (As for thefront passenger occupant classificationsystem, see “—Front passenger occupantclassification system” on page 96 in thisSection.)

Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

� The SRS front airbag system is de-signed only as a supplement to theprimary protection of the driver andfront passenger seat belt systems.The driver and front passenger canbe killed or seriously injured by theinflating airbags if they do not wearthe available seat belts properly.During sudden braking just beforea collision, an unrestrained driveror front passenger can move for-ward into direct contact with orclose proximity to the airbag whichmay then deploy during the colli-sion. To ensure maximum protectionin an accident, the driver and allpassengers in the vehicle mustwear their seat belts properly. Wear-ing a seat belt properly during anaccident reduces the chances ofdeath or serious injury or beingthrown out of the vehicle. For in-structions and precautions concern-ing the seat belt system, see “Seatbelts” on page 68 in this Section.

SRS airbags——SRS driver airbag and frontpassenger airbag


81


� Improperly seated and/or restrainedinfants and children can be killedor seriously injured by the deploy-ing airbags. An infant or child whois too small to use a seat beltshould be properly secured using achild restraint system. Toyotastrongly recommends that all in-fants and children be placed in therear seat of the vehicle and proper-ly restrained. The rear seat is thesafest for infants and children. Forinstructions concerning the installa-tion of a child restraint system, see“Child restraint” on page 101 in thisSection.

The SRS front airbags are designed todeploy in severe (usually frontal) colli-sions where the magnitude and durationof the forward deceleration of the ve-hicle exceeds the designed thresholdlevel.

The SRS front airbags will deploy if theseverity of the impact is above the de-signed threshold level, comparable to anapproximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collisionwhen the vehicle has the impact straightinto a fixed barrier that does not move ordeform.

However, this threshold velocity will beconsiderably higher if the vehicle strikesan object, such as a parked vehicle orsign pole, which can move or deform onimpact, or if the vehicle is involved in anunderride collision (e.g. a collision inwhich the front of the vehicle “underrides”,or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).

It is possible that in some collisionswhere the forward deceleration of the ve-hicle is very close to the designed thresh-old level, the SRS front airbags and theseat belt pretensioners may not activatetogether.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

Collision from the rear

Collision from the side

Vehicle rollover

The SRS front airbags are not generallydesigned to inflate if the vehicle is in-volved in a side or rear collision, if itrolls over, or if it is involved in a low−speed frontal collision. But, whenever acollision of any type causes sufficientforward deceleration of the vehicle, de-ployment of the SRS front airbags mayoccur.


82


Hitting a curb,edge of pavementor hard surface

Falling into orjumping over adeep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS front airbags may also deployif a serious impact occurs to the under-side of your vehicle. Some examplesare shown in the illustration.

The SRS front airbag system consistsmainly of the following components, andtheir locations are shown in the illustra-tion.

1. Front airbag sensors


3. Airbag module for front passenger (airbag and inflator)

4. “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF” indi-cator lights



7. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

8. Driver’s seat position sensor


10. Airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator)

The airbag sensor assembly consists of asafing sensor and airbag sensor.

The front airbag sensors constantly moni-tor the forward deceleration of the vehicle.If an impact results in a forward decelera-tion beyond the designed threshold level,the system triggers the airbag inflators. Atthis time a chemical reaction in the infla-tors very quickly fills the airbags withnon−toxic gas to help restrain the forwardmotion of the occupants. The front airbagsthen quickly deflate, so that there is noobstruction of the driver’s vision should itbe necessary to continue driving.

When the airbags inflate, they produce aloud noise and release some smoke andresidue along with non−toxic gas. Thisdoes not indicate a fire. This smoke mayremain inside the vehicle for some time,and may cause some minor irritation tothe eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure towash off any residue as soon as possibleto prevent any potential skin irritation withsoap and water. If you can safely exitfrom the vehicle, you should do so imme-diately.


83


Deployment of the airbags happens in afraction of a second, so the airbags mustinflate with considerable force. While thesystem is designed to reduce serious inju-ries, primarily to the head and chest, itmay also cause other, less severe injuriesto the face, chest, arms and hands. Theseare usually in the nature of minor burnsor abrasions and swelling, but the force ofa deploying airbag can cause more seri-ous injuries, especially if an occupant’shands, arms, chest or head is in closeproximity to the airbag module at the timeof deployment. This is why it is importantfor the occupant to: avoid placing anyobject or part of the body between theoccupant and the airbag module; sitstraight and well back into the seat; wearthe available seat belt properly; and sit asfar as possible from the airbag module,while still maintaining control of the ve-hicle.

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheelhub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hotfor several minutes after deployment, sodo not touch! The airbags inflate onlyonce. The windshield may be damaged byabsorbing some of the force of the inflat-ing airbag.

CAUTION

The driver or front passenger who istoo close to the steering wheel ordashboard during airbag deploymentcan be killed or seriously injured.Toyota strongly recommends that:

� The driver sit as far back as pos-sible from the steering wheel whilestill maintaining control of the ve-hicle.

� The front passenger sit as far backas possible from the dashboard.

� All vehicle occupants be properlyrestrained using the available seatbelts.

For instructions and precautions con-cerning the seating position, see“—Front seat precautions” on page50 in this Section.

� Do not sit on the edge of the seator lean against the dashboard whenthe vehicle is in use, since thefront passenger airbag could inflatewith considerable speed and force.Anyone who is up against, or veryclose to, an airbag when it inflates,can be killed or seriously injured.Sit up straight and well back in theseat, and always use your seat beltproperly.


84


� Toyota strongly recommends that allinfants and children be placed inthe rear seat of the vehicle and beproperly restrained.

� Do not hold a child on your lap orin your arms. Use a child restraintsystem in the rear seat. For instruc-tions concerning the installation ofa child restraint system, see “Childrestraint” on page 101 in this Sec-tion.

� Do not put anything or any part ofyour body on or in front of thedashboard or steering wheel padthat houses the front airbag sys-tem. They might restrict inflation orcause death or serious injury asthey are projected rearward by theforce of the deploying airbags. Like-wise, the driver and front passengershould not hold objects in theirarms or on their knees.

� Do not modify or remove any wir-ing. Do not modify, remove, strikeor open any components such asthe steering wheel pad, steeringwheel, column cover, dashboardnear the front passenger airbag,front passenger airbag cover, frontpassenger airbag or airbag sensorassembly. Doing so may prevent thefront airbag system from activatingcorrectly, cause sudden activationof the system or disable the sys-tem, which could result in death orserious injury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious injury.Consult your Toyota dealer about anyrepair and modification.

If you wish to modify your vehicle fora person with a physical disability,consult your Toyota dealer. It maydangerously interfere with the SRSfront airbags operation.


85


NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of theSRS front airbag system in somecases.



� Modification of the front end struc-ture

� Attachment of a grille guard (bullbar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,winches or any other equipment tothe front end

� Repairs made on or near the frontfenders, front end structure, con-sole, steering column, steeringwheel or dashboard near the frontpassenger airbag

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the SRS front airbags are oper-ating properly.






86


If the light stays on, it indicates that theSRS driver and front passenger airbagsystem and/or front passenger occupantclassification system and “AIRBAG ON”and “AIRBAG OFF” indicator lights have aproblem. If the light flashes, the SRS sideairbag system and/or curtain shield airbagsystem have a problem.

The SRS warning light and “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light will come on if there is amalfunction in the front passenger occu-pant classification system.


� The SRS front airbags have been in-flated.

� The front of the vehicle (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe SRS front airbags to inflate.

� The pad section of the steering wheelor front passenger airbag cover(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,cracked, or otherwise damaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cablesbefore contacting your Toyota dealer.


87


The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem) side airbags and curtain shield air-bags are designed to provide furtherprotection for the driver, front passen-ger and second outside passengers inaddition to the primary safety protec-tion provided by the seat belts.

In response to a severe side impact, theSRS side airbags and curtain shield air-bags work with the seat belts to helpreduce injury by inflating. The SRS sideairbags help reduce injuries mainly to thedriver’s or front passenger’s chest and theSRS curtain shield airbags help reduceinjuries mainly to the driver’s, front pas-senger’s or second outside passenger’shead.

The SRS side airbag on the passengerseat will not activate if there is no pas-senger sitting in the front passenger seat.However, the side airbag on the passen-ger seat may deploy if luggage is put inthe seat, or the seat belt is buckled upregardless of the presence of the occu-pant in the seat. (As for the front passen-ger occupant classification system, see“—Front passenger occupant classificationsystem” on page 96 in this Section.)

The SRS curtain shield airbag on the pas-senger side are activated even with nopassenger in the front seat or second out-side seat.

Roll sensing function:In response to a vehicle rollover, the cur-tain shield airbags on both sides workwith the seat belts to help reduce injuryby inflating. The curtain shield airbagshelp reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s,front passenger’s or second outside pas-senger’s head and help prevent them frombeing thrown out of the vehicle.

The SRS curtain shield airbags may acti-vate even when the side airbags are notactivated.

Always wear your seat belt properly.

—SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags


88


CAUTION

� The SRS side airbag and curtainshield airbag system is designedonly as a supplement to the prima-ry protection of the driver, frontpassenger and second outside pas-senger seat belt systems. To ensuremaximum protection in an accident,the driver and all passengers in thevehicle must wear their seat beltsproperly. Wearing a seat belt prop-erly during an accident reduces thechances of death or serious injuryor being thrown out of the vehicle.For instructions and precautionsconcerning the seat belt system,see “Seat belts” on page 68 in thisSection.

� Do not allow anyone to lean his/herhead or any part of his/her bodyagainst the door or the area of theseat, front pillar, rear pillar or roofside rail from which the SRS sideairbag and curtain shield airbagdeploy even if he/she is a childseated in the child restraint system.It is dangerous if the SRS side air-bag and curtain shield airbag in-flate, and the impact of the deploy-ing airbag could cause death or se-rious injury to the occupant.

� Improperly seated and/or restrainedinfants and children can be killedor seriously injured by the deploy-ing airbags. An infant or child whois too small to use a seat beltshould be properly secured using achild restraint system. Toyotastrongly recommends that all in-fants and children be placed in therear seats of the vehicle and prop-erly restrained. The rear seats arethe safest for infants and children.For instructions concerning theinstallation of a child restraint sys-tem, see “Child restraint” on page101 in this Section.


89


The SRS side airbags may not activateif the vehicle is subjected to a collisionfrom the side at certain angles, or acollision to the side of the vehicle bodyother than the passenger compartmentas shown in the illustration.

The SRS side airbags are designed toinflate when the passenger compartmentarea suffers a severe impact from theside.


Collision from the rear

Collision from the front

Vehicle rollover

The SRS side airbags are not generallydesigned to inflate if the vehicle is in-volved in a front or rear collision, if itrolls over, or if it is involved in a low−speed side collision.

The SRS curtain shield airbags may notactivate if the vehicle is subjected to acollision from the side at certainangles, or a collision to the side of thevehicle body other than the passengercompartment as shown in the illustra-tion.

The SRS curtain shield airbags are de-signed to inflate when the passengercompartment area suffers a severe impactfrom the side or vehicle rollover.



90


The angle ofvehicle tip−upis marginal

Skidding vehiclehitting a curbstone

The SRS curtain shield airbags may in-flate if the angle of vehicle tip−up ismarginal or if the skidding vehicle’stires hit a curb stone laterally as shownin the illustration.

Collision fromthe front Collision from

the rear

Pitch end over end

The SRS curtain shield airbags are notgenerally designed to inflate if the ve-hicle is involved in a front or rear colli-sion, if it pitches end over end, or ifit is involved in a low−speed side colli-sion.

Hitting a curb,edge of pavementor hard surface

Falling into orjumping over adeep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS side and curtain shield airbagsmay deploy if a serious impact occursto the underside of your vehicle. Someexamples are shown in the illustration.


91


The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system consists mainly of the fol-lowing components, and their locations areshown in the illustration.


2. “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF” indi-cator lights

3. Curtain shield airbag modules(airbag and inflator)


5. Side airbag modules (airbag and inflator)

6. Curtain shield airbag sensors

7. Side and curtain shield airbag sensors



The SRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system is controlled by the airbagsensor assembly. The airbag sensor as-sembly consists of a safing sensor andairbag sensor.

In a severe side impact, the side andcurtain shield airbag sensor and/or thecurtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) theside airbag inflators and/or the curtainshield airbag inflators. At this time achemical reaction in the inflators quicklyfills the airbags with non−toxic gas to helprestrain the lateral motion of the occu-pants.

When the airbags inflate, they produce afairly loud noise and release some smokeand residue along with non−toxic gas. Thisdoes not indicate a fire. This smoke mayremain inside the vehicle for some time,and may cause some minor irritation tothe eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure towash off any residue as soon as possibleto prevent any potential skin irritation withsoap and water. If you can safely exitfrom the vehicle, you should do so imme-diately.

Deployment of the airbags happens in afraction of a second, so the airbags mustinflate with considerable force. While thesystem is designed to reduce serious inju-ries, it may also cause minor burns orabrasions and swelling.

Front seats as well as parts of the frontand rear pillars, and roof side rail may behot for several minutes, but the airbagsthemselves will not be hot. The airbagsare designed to inflate only once.

CAUTION

SRS side airbags and curtain shieldairbags inflate with considerableforce. To reduce the possibility ofdeath or serious injury when they in-flate, the driver, front passenger andsecond outside passengers must:

� Wear their seat belts properly.

� Remain properly seated with theirbacks upright and against the seatsat all times.


92


� Do not allow anyone to lean againstthe door when the vehicle is in use,since the side airbag and curtainshield airbag could inflate with con-siderable speed and force. Other-wise, he/she may be killed or seri-ously injured. Special care shouldbe taken especially when you havea small child in the vehicle.

� Sit up straight and well back in theseat, distributing your weight evenlyin the seat. Do not apply excessiveweight to the outer side of theseats with a side airbag, and to thefront pillar, rear pillar and roof siderail with a curtain shield airbag.

� Do not allow anyone to get his/herhead closer to the area where theside airbag and curtain shield air-bag inflate, since these airbagscould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, he/shemay be killed or seriously injured.Special care should be taken espe-cially when you have a small childin the vehicle.

� Do not allow anyone to kneel onthe passenger seat, facing the pas-senger’s side door, since the sideairbag and curtain shield airbagcould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, he/shemay be killed or seriously injured.Special care should be taken espe-cially when you have a small childin the vehicle.


93


� Do not allow anyone to get his/herhead or hands out of windowssince the curtain shield airbagscould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, he/shemay be killed or seriously injured.Special care should be taken espe-cially when you have a small childin the vehicle.

� Do not attach a cup holder or anyother device or object on or aroundthe door. When the side airbag in-flates, the cup holder or any otherdevice or object will be thrown withgreat force or the side airbag maynot activate correctly, resulting indeath or serious injury. Likewise,the driver and front passengershould not hold objects in theirarms or on their knees.

� Do not attach a microphone or anyother device or object around thearea where the curtain shield airbagactivates such as on the windshieldglass, side door glass, front andrear pillars, roof side rail and assistgrips. When the curtain shield air-bag inflates, the microphone or oth-er device or object will be thrownaway with great force or the curtainshield airbag may not activate cor-rectly, resulting in death or seriousinjury.


94


� Do not hook a hanger, heavy orsharp pointed objects on the coathook. If the curtain shield airbaginflates, those items will be thrownaway with great force or the curtainshield airbag may not activate cor-rectly, resulting in death or seriousinjury. When you hang clothes,hang them on the coat hook direct-ly.

� Do not use seat accessories whichcover the parts where the side air-bags inflate. Such accessories mayprevent the side airbags from acti-vating correctly, causing death orserious injury.

� Do not modify or replace the seatsor upholstery of the seats with sideairbags. Such changes may preventthe side airbag system from activat-ing correctly, disable the system orcause the side airbags to inflate ac-cidentally, resulting in death or seri-ous injury.

� Do not disassemble or repair thefront and rear pillars and roof siderail containing the curtain shieldairbags. Such changes may disablethe system or cause the curtainshield airbags to inflate accidental-ly, resulting in death or serious in-jury.

Failure to follow these instructionscan result in death or serious injury.Consult your Toyota dealer about anyrepair and modification.

If you wish to modify your vehicle fora person with a physical disability,consult your Toyota dealer. It maydangerously interfere with the SRSside airbags and curtain shield air-bags operation.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the followingchanges without consulting yourToyota dealer. Such changes caninterfere with proper operation of theSRS side airbag and curtain shieldairbag system in some cases.



� Modification of the side structure ofthe passenger compartment

� Repairs made on or near the con-sole or front seat


95


This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags are operating properly.








96



� Any of the SRS side airbags and cur-tain shield airbags have been inflated.

� The portion of the doors (shaded in theillustration) was involved in an accidentthat was not severe enough to causethe SRS side airbags and curtainshield airbags to inflate.

� The surface of the seats with the sideairbag (shaded in the illustration) isscratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-aged.

� The portion of the front pillars, rearpillars or roof side rail garnishes (pad-ding) containing the curtain shield air-bags inside (shaded in the illustration)is scratched, cracked, or otherwisedamaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cablesbefore contacting your Toyota dealer.

Your vehicle is equipped with a frontpassenger occupant classification sys-tem. This system detects the conditions1—4 in the table on page 99 and basedon these conditions activates or deacti-vates the following systems;

� Front passenger airbag

� Side airbag on the front passengerseat

� Front passenger’s seat belt pretension-er

The system monitors the weight andload on the front passenger seat, andthe seat belt buckle switch to determineconditions 1—4.

In order for the system to detect theconditions correctly, do not do any ofthe following.

� Apply a heavy load in the front passen-ger seat or equipment (e.g. seatbackpocket).

� Attach a commercial seatback table,etc. to the front passenger seat seat-back.

� Put weight on the front passenger seatby putting your hands or feet on theseatback from the rear passenger seat.

—Front passenger occupantclassification system


97


The “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF”indicator lights indicate the actuation ofthe front passenger airbag, side airbagon the front passenger seat and frontpassenger’s seat belt pretensioner.

The “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light will beilluminated when the ignition switch is inthe “ON” position with the condition 2 inthe table shown below.

If the front passenger occupant classifica-tion system determines that a person ofadult size sits in the front passenger seatbut the “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light isilluminated, one of the following is likelyto have occurred:

� A rear passenger lifts the front passen-ger seat cushion with their legs.

� Objects are placed under the front pas-senger seat.

� The front passenger seatback is incontact with the second seat.

To ensure the system correctly detects anadult sitting in the front passenger seat,make sure the above do not occur.

Make sure that the “AIRBAG ON” indicatorlight is illuminated when an adult isseated in the front passenger seat. If the“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light is illumina-ted, ask the passenger to sit up straight,well back in the seat, and with the seatbelt worn correctly. If the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light still remains illuminated, ei-ther ask the passenger to move to therear seat, or if that is not possible, movethe front passenger seat fully rearward.

The “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF”indicator lights will be illuminated ini-tially when the ignition key is turned tothe “ON” position. After about 4 sec-onds, they will go off. After that, thefront passenger occupant classificationsystem operates and judges which indi-cator light be illuminated.


98


The SRS warning light and “AIRBAGOFF” indicator light will come on ifthere is a malfunction in the front pas-senger occupant classification system.


99


Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

Condition detectedby the front

passenger occupantclassification system

Indicator/warning light Devices

“AIRBAG ON” and“AIRBAG OFF”indicator lights

SRS warninglight

Frontpassenger’s

seat beltreminder light

Frontpassenger

airbag

Side airbagon the frontpassenger

seat

Curtain shieldairbag in the

frontpassenger

side

Frontpassenger’s

seat beltpretensioner

1. Adult∗1 “AIRBAG ON” Off Flashing∗4 Activated

2. Child∗2 or childrestraint system∗3 “AIRBAG OFF” Off Flashing∗4 Deactivated

Activated

Activated

3. Unoccupied Not illuminated Off Off Deactivated Deactivated

4. There is amalfunction in thesystem

“AIRBAG OFF” On Off Deactivated Activated

∗1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system mayrecognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

∗2: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/heras an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.

∗3: Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward−facing child restraint system should only beinstalled on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (See “Child restraint” on page 101 in this Section as for installing thechild restraint system.)

∗4: In the event that the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.


100


CAUTION

To avoid potential death or seriousinjury when the front passenger occu-pant classification system does notdetect the conditions correctly, ob-serve the following.

� Do not recline the front passengerseat seatback so that it interfereswith a second seat as it may causethe “AIRBAG OFF” indicator lightbe illuminated. If the seatback inter-feres with the second seat, returnthe seatback to a position where itdoes not interfere with the secondseat.

Keep the front passenger seatbackas upright as possible when the ve-hicle is moving. Reclining the seat-back excessively may lessen the ef-fectiveness of the seat belt system.

� Make sure the “AIRBAG ON” indica-tor light is illuminated when usingthe seat belt extender for the frontpassenger seat. If the “AIRBAGOFF” indicator light is illuminated,disconnect the extender tonguefrom the seat belt buckle, then re-connect the seat belt. Reconnectthe seat belt extender after makingsure the “AIRBAG ON” indicatorlight is illuminated. If you use theseat belt extender while the “AIR-BAG OFF” indicator light is illumi-nated, the front passenger airbagand side airbag on the front pas-senger side may not activate cor-rectly, which could cause death orserious injury in the event of colli-sion.

� If an adult sits in the frontpassenger seat, the “AIRBAG ON”indicator light should be illumi-nated. If the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light is illuminated, askthe passenger to sit up straight,well back in the seat, feet on thefloor, and with the seat belt worncorrectly. If the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light still remains illumi-nated, either ask the passenger tomove to the rear seat, or if that isnot possible, move the frontpassenger seat fully rearward.

� Wear the seat belt properly.

� Make sure the front passenger’sseat belt tab has not been left in-serted into the buckle before some-one sits in the front passengerseat.

� Do not apply a heavy load to thefront passenger seat or equipment(e.g. seatback pocket).

� Do not put weight on the front pas-senger seat by putting your handsor feet on the front passenger seatseatback from the rear passengerseat.


101


� Do not let a rear passenger lift thefront passenger seat with their feetor press on the seatback with theirlegs.

� Do not put objects under the frontpassenger seat.

� Child restraint systems installed onthe second seat should not contactthe front seatbacks.

� When it is unavoidable to install theforward−facing child restraint sys-tem on the front passenger seat,install the child restraint system onthe front passenger seat in theproper order. (As for the installationorder, see “—Installation with seatbelt” on page 104 in this Section.)

� Do not remove the front seats.

� Do not kick the front passengerseat or subject it to severe impact.Otherwise, the SRS warning lightmay come on to indicate a malfunc-tion of the detection system. In thiscase, contact your Toyota dealer im-mediately.

The “AIRBAG ON” indicator light may beilluminated (the front passenger airbag andside airbag on the front passenger seatmay deploy) even if observing the abovecautions, when a child sits in, or a for-ward−facing child restraint system isinstalled on the front passenger seat. Re-fer to all the cautions in “SRS airbags” onpage 80 and “Child restraint” on page 101in this Section.

Toyota strongly urges the use of ap-propriate child restraint systems forchildren.

The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A.and Canada now require the use of achild restraint system.

Your vehicle conforms to SAEJ1819.

If a child is too large for a child restraintsystem, the child should sit in the rearseat and must be restrained using thevehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” onpage 68 in this Section for details.

CAUTION

� For effective protection in automo-bile accidents and sudden stops, achild must be properly restrained,using a seat belt or child restraintsystem depending on the age andsize of the child. Holding a child inyour arms is not a substitute for achild restraint system. In an acci-dent, the child can be crushedagainst the windshield, or betweenyou and the vehicle’s interior.

Child restraint——Child restraint precautions


102


� Toyota strongly urges use of aproper child restraint system whichconforms to the size of the child,installed on the rear seat. Accord-ing to accident statistics, the childis safer when properly restrained inthe rear seat than in the front seat.

� Never install a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat even if the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light is illuminated. In theevent of an accident, the force ofthe rapid inflation of the front pas-senger airbag can cause death orserious injury to the child if therear−facing child restraint system isinstalled on the front passengerseat.

� A forward−facing child restraint sys-tem should be allowed to beinstalled on the front passengerseat only when it is unavoidable.Always move the seat as far backas possible even if the “AIRBAGOFF” indicator light is illuminated,because the front passenger airbagcould inflate with considerablespeed and force. Otherwise, thechild may be killed or seriously in-jured.

� Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/herbody against the door or the areaof the seat, front or rear pillar orroof side rail from which the sideairbags or curtain shield airbagsdeploy even if the child is seated inthe child restraint system. It is dan-gerous if the side airbag and/orcurtain shield airbag inflate, and theimpact could cause death or seri-ous injury to the child.

� Do not use the seat belt extenderwhen installing a child restraintsystem on the front or rear passen-ger seat. If installing a child re-straint system with the seat beltextender connected to the seat belt,the seat belt will not securely holdthe child restraint system, whichcould cause death or serious injuryto the child or other passengers inthe event of collision.

� Make sure that you have compliedwith all installation instructions pro-vided by the child restraintmanufacturer and that the system isproperly secured. If it is not se-cured properly, it may cause deathor serious injury to the child in theevent of a sudden stop or accident.


103


A child restraint system for a smallchild or baby must itself be properlyrestrained on the seat with the lap por-tion of the lap/shoulder belt. You mustcarefully consult the manufacturer’s in-structions which accompany the childrestraint system.

To provide proper restraint, use a childrestraint system following the manufactur-er’s instructions about the appropriate ageand size of the child for the child restraintsystem.

Install the child restraint system correctlyfollowing the instructions provided by itsmanufacturer. General directions are alsoprovided under the following illustrations.

The child restraint system should beinstalled on the rear seat. According toaccident statistics, the child is safer whenproperly restrained in the rear seat thanin the front seat.

When not using the child restraint system,keep it secured with the seat belt or placeit somewhere other than the passengercompartment. This will prevent it from in-juring passengers in the event of a sud-den stop or accident.

Child restraint systems are classified intothe following 3 types depending on thechild’s age and size.

(A) Infant seat(B) Convertible seat(C) Booster seat

Install the child restraint system followingthe instructions provided by its manufac-turer.

Your vehicle has anchor brackets for se-curing the top strap of a child restraintsystem.

For instructions about how to use the an-chor bracket, see “—Using a top strap” onpage 115 in this Section.

The child restraint lower anchorages ap-proved for your vehicle may also be used.See “—Installation with child restraint low-er anchorages” on page 117 in this Sec-tion.

(A) Infant seat

(B) Convertible seat

—Child restraint system—Types of child restraintsystem


104


(C) Booster seat(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION

An infant seat must be used in rear−facing position only.

CAUTION

� Never install a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat even if the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light is illuminated. In theevent of an accident, the impact ofthe rapid inflation of the front pas-senger airbag could cause death orserious injury to the child if therear−facing child restraint system isinstalled on the front passengerseat.

—Installation with seat belt


105


� Do not install a child restraint sys-tem on the second (or third) seat ifit interferes with the lock mecha-nism of the front (or second) seats.Otherwise, the child or front (orsecond) seat occupant(s) may bekilled or seriously injured in caseof sudden braking or a collision.

� If the driver’s seat position doesnot allow sufficient space for safeinstallation, install the child re-straint system on the right secondseat.

Same angle Same position

� When installing a child restraintsystem in the second seat centerposition, adjust both seat cushionsto the same position and align bothseatbacks at the same angle. Other-wise, the child restraint system can-not be securely restrained and thismay cause death or serious injuriesin a collision.

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the infant seat following theinstructions provided by its manufactur-er and insert the tab into the buckletaking care not to twist the belt. Keepthe lap portion of the belt tight.


106


CAUTION

� After inserting the tab, make surethe tab and buckle are locked andthat the lap and shoulder portionsof the belt are not twisted.

� Do not insert coins, clips, etc. inthe buckle as this may prevent yourchild from properly latching the taband buckle.

� If the seat belt does not functionnormally, it cannot protect yourchild from death or serious injury.Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-ately. Do not install the childrestraint system on the seat untilthe seat belt is fixed.

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended.

To hold the infant seat securely, makesure the belt is in the lock mode beforeletting the belt retract.

3. While pressing the infant seat firmlyagainst the seat cushion and seatback,let the shoulder belt retract as far asit will go to hold the infant seat secure-ly.


107


CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-tem in different directions to be sureit is secure. Follow all the installationinstructions provided by its manufac-turer.

4. To remove the infant seat, press thebuckle release button and allow thebelt to retract completely. The belt willmove freely again and be ready towork for an adult or older child passen-ger.

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION

A convertible seat must be used in for-ward−facing or rear−facing position de-pending on the age and size of thechild. When installing, follow themanufacturer’s instructions about theapplicable age and size of the child aswell as directions for installing thechild restraint system.


108


Install the child restraint system on thefront passenger seat only when it is un-avoidable. Your vehicle is equipped with afront passenger occupant classificationsystem. In order to activate the occupantclassification system correctly, install theforward−facing child restraint system onthe front passenger seat in the followingorder:

1. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” posi-tion.

2. Move the front passenger seat to therearward position.

3. Put the child restraint system on thefront passenger seat without puttingyour weight on the front passengerseat.

4. Insert the seat belt tab into the seatbelt buckle.

5. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended. To hold the seat securely,make sure the belt is in the lock modebefore letting the belt retract.

6. While pressing the convertible seatfirmly against the seat cushion andseatback, let the shoulder belt retractas far as it will go to hold the convert-ible seat securely.

CAUTION


7. Put a child on the child restraint sys-tem and secure the child, complyingwith the instructions provided by thechild restraint system manufacturer.

The “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light shouldbe illuminated when the ignition key is“ON” and the child is in the child restraintsystem after following these procedures.The “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light indi-cates the SRS front passenger airbag andside airbag on the passenger side will notdeploy. If the “AIRBAG ON” indicator lightis illuminated, remove the child restraintsystem and reinstall it with the ignitionkey in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. Ifthe “AIRBAG ON” indicator light is illumi-nated when the ignition key is turned tothe “ON” position, then the SRS front pas-senger airbag and side airbag on the pas-senger side may deploy in an accident.Do not drive the vehicle in this condition.Remove the child restraint system andcontact your Toyota dealer.


109


CAUTION

� Never install a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat. A forward−facing child re-straint system should only beinstalled on the front passengerseat when unavoidable. If you mustinstall the child restraint system onthe front passenger seat, put theseat in its most rearward position,and install the forward−facing childrestraint system in the proper or-der. Otherwise, the front passengeroccupant classification system cannot detect the presence of the childrestraint system and the front pas-senger airbag and side airbag onthe front passenger seat coulddeploy, and the impact could causedeath or serious injury to the child.

� Never install a rear−facing child re-straint system on the front passen-ger seat even if the “AIRBAG OFF”indicator light is illuminated. In theevent of an accident, the impact ofthe rapid inflation of the front pas-senger airbag could cause death orserious injury to the child if therear−facing child restraint system isinstalled on the front passengerseat.

Move seatfully back



110



� Do not install a child restraint sys-tem on the second (or third) seat ifit interferes with the lock mecha-nism of the front (or second) seats.Otherwise, the child or front (orsecond) seat occupant(s) may bekilled or seriously injured in caseof sudden braking or a collision.

� If the driver’s seat position doesnot allow sufficient space for safeinstallation, install the child re-straint system on the right secondseat.

Same angle

Same position



111


1. Run the lap and shoulder belt throughor around the convertible seat followingthe instructions provided by itsmanufacturer and insert the tab intothe buckle taking care not to twist thebelt. Keep the lap portion of the belttight.

CAUTION




2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put itin the lock mode. When the belt isthen retracted even slightly, it cannotbe extended.

To hold the convertible seat securely,make sure the belt is in the lock modebefore letting the belt retract.


112


3. While pressing the convertible seatfirmly against the seat cushion andseatback, let the shoulder belt retractas far as it will go to hold the convert-ible seat securely.

CAUTION


4. To remove the convertible seat, pressthe buckle release button and allow thebelt to retract completely. The belt willmove freely again and be ready towork for an adult or older child passen-ger.


113


(C) BOOSTER SEAT INSTALLATION

A booster seat must be used in for-ward−facing position only.

Move seatfully back

CAUTION




114


Same angle

Same position


1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Runthe lap and shoulder belt through oraround the booster seat and across thechild following the instructions providedby its manufacturer and insert the tabinto the buckle taking care not to twistthe belt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is correctlyacross the child’s shoulder and that thelap belt is positioned as low as possibleon the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” onpage 68 in this Section for details.

CAUTION

� Always make sure the shoulder beltis positioned across the center ofchild’s shoulder. The belt should bekept away from child’s neck, butnot falling off child’s shoulder.Otherwise, the child may be killedor seriously injured in case of sud-den braking or a collision.

� Both high−positioned lap belts andloose−fitting belts could causedeath or serious injuries due tosliding under the lap belt during acollision or other unintended event.Keep the lap belt positioned as lowon a child’s hips as possible.

� For child’s safety, do not place theshoulder belt under child’s arm.




115



2. To remove the booster seat, press thebuckle release button and allow thebelt to retract.

Follow the procedure below for a childrestraint system that requires the useof a top strap.

—Using a top strap


116


Anchor brackets

Symbol

Use the anchor brackets behind the sec-ond seat seatbacks to secure the topstrap.

Anchor brackets are installed for eachseating position of the second seat.

This symbol indicates the locations ofuser ready anchor brackets.

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:

1. Remove the head restraint.

2. Open the anchor bracket cover withthe symbol as shown in the illustra-tion.


117


3. Fix the child restraint system withthe seat belt.

Latch the hook onto the anchorbracket and tighten the top strap.

For instructions to install the child re-straint system, see “Child restraint” onpage 101 in this Section.

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securelylatched, and check that the child re-straint system is secure by pushingand pulling it in different directions.Follow all the installation instructionsprovided by its manufacturer.

4. Replace the head restraint and lift itup to the uppermost lock position.

Be sure to close the cover when the an-chor bracket is not in use.

Lower anchorages for the child restraintsystems complying with the FMVSS225or CMVSS210.2 specifications areinstalled in the second seat.

The anchorages are installed in the seatcushion of both outside second seats.

Child restraint systems complying with theFMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specificationcan be fixed to these anchorages. In thiscase, it is not necessary to fix the childrestraint system with a seat belt on thevehicle.

—Installation with childrestraint lower anchorages


118


3rd lockposition

1st lockposition

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMINSTALLATION

1. Fold down the seatback and back tothe 1st lock position (most uprightposition) until it locks into place.Adjust the seatback to the 3rd lockposition.

Make sure the seatback is locked secure-ly.

Canada only

Type A

Canada only

Type B


119


2. Widen the gap between the seatcushion and seatback slightly andconfirm the position of the lower an-chorages near the button on theseatback.

3. Type A—Latch the hooks of lowerstraps onto the anchorages andtighten the lower straps.

Type B—Latch the buckles onto theanchorages.

For owners in Canada—The symbol ona child restraint system indicates the pres-ence of a lower connector system.

If your child restraint system has a topstrap, it should be anchored. (For theinstallation of the top strap, see “—Usinga top strap” on page 115 in this Section.)

For installation details, refer to the instruc-tion manual equipped with each product.

CAUTION

� When using the lower anchoragesfor the child restraint system, besure that there are no irregular ob-jects around the anchorages or thatthe seat belt is not caught.

� Push and pull the child restraintsystem in different directions to besure it is secure. Follow all theinstallation instructions provided byits manufacturer.

� When using the lower anchoragesfor the child restraint system, en-sure that the seat is moved to therear−most position, with the seat-back close to the child restraintsystem.

� After securing the child restraintsystem, never slide or recline theseat.

� Do not install a child restraint sys-tem on the second seat if it inter-feres with the lock mechanism ofthe front seats. Otherwise, the childor front seat occupant(s) may bekilled or seriously injured in caseof sudden braking or a collision.


120



121


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSSteering wheel and MirrorsTilt steering wheel 122. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outside rear view mirrors 122. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Anti−glare inside rear view mirror 124. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto anti−glare inside rear view mirror 125. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sun visors 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 4


122


To change the steering wheel angle,hold the steering wheel, push down thelock release lever, tilt the steeringwheel to the desired angle and returnthe lever to its original position.

CAUTION

� Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile the vehicle is moving. Doingso may cause the driver to mishan-dle the vehicle and an accident mayoccur resulting in death or seriousinjuries.

� After adjusting the steering wheel,try moving it up and down to makesure it is locked in position.

Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the side of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

Be careful when judging the size or dis-tance of any object seen in the outsiderear view mirror on the passenger’s sidebecause it is a convex mirror. Any objectseen in a convex mirror will look smallerand farther away than when seen in a flatmirror.

On some models, when you push the out-side rear view mirror defogger switch, theheater panels in the outside rear viewmirrors will quickly clear the mirror sur-face. (See “Rear window and outside rearview mirror defoggers and windshield wip-er de−icer” on page 139 in Section 1−5.)

Tilt steering wheel Outside rear view mirrors—


123


CAUTION

� Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle thevehicle and an accident may occurresulting in death or serious inju-ries.

� Since the mirror surfaces can gethot, do not touch them when thedefogger switch is on.

To adjust a mirror, use the switches.

1. Master switch—To select the mirror tobe adjustedPush the switch to “L” (left) or “R”(right).

2. Control switch—To move the mirrorPush the switch in the desired direc-tion.

Mirrors can be adjusted when the key isin the “ACC” or “ON” position.

NOTICE

If ice should jam the mirror, do notoperate the control or scrape the mir-ror face. Use a spray de−icer to freethe mirror.

—Power rear view mirrorcontrol


124


The rear view mirrors can be foldedbackward for parking in compact areas.

To fold the rear view mirror, push back-ward.

CAUTION

Do not drive with the mirrors foldedbackward. Both the driver and pas-senger side rear view mirrors mustbe extended and properly adjustedbefore driving.

Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the rear of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

To reduce glare from the headlights ofthe vehicle behind you during nightdriving, operate the lever on the loweredge of the mirror.

Daylight driving—Lever at position 1

The reflection in the mirror has greaterclarity at this position.

Night driving—Lever at position 2

Remember that by reducing glare you alsolose some rear view clarity.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle the ve-hicle and an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

—Folding rear view mirrorsAnti−glare inside rear viewmirror


125


Adjust the mirror so that you can justsee the rear of your vehicle in the mir-ror.

This mirror is equipped with auto anti−glare function. The function is designedto reduce glare from the headlights ofthe vehicle behind you during nightdriving.

When the ignition key is inserted andturned on, the inside rear view mirror al-ways turns on in the automatic functionmode.

The indicator illuminates to show you thatthe function is on.

In automatic function mode, if the mirrordetects light from the headlights of thevehicle behind you, the mirror surfacedarkens slightly to reduce the reflectedlight.

To turn off the automatic function, push

the “ ” switch for longer than 3 sec-

onds.

To turn on the automatic function again,

push the “ ” switch for longer than 3

seconds.

Adjust it before driving so that the rearview is in the best condition.

When the inside air temperature is low, itmay take a little longer for the mirror todarken in response to the detection ofheadlights.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while thevehicle is moving. Doing so maycause the driver to mishandle the ve-hicle and an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

To ensure correct functioning of anti−glare mirror sensors located on bothsides of the mirror, do not touch orcover the sensors with your finger ora piece of cloth, etc.

Auto anti−glare inside rearview mirror


126


To block out glare, move the sun visor.

To block out glare from the front—Swingdown the sun visor (position 1).

To block out glare from the side—Swingdown the sun visor, remove it from thehook and swing it to the lateral side (posi-tion 2).

If glare comes from obliquely behind you,extend the plate at the end of the visor(position 3).

CAUTION

Do not extend the plate at the end ofthe sun visor when the visor is in theposition 1. It can cover the anti−glareinside rear view mirror and obstructthe rear view.

Type A

Type B

Sun visors— —Vanity mirrors


127


To use the vanity mirrors, swing downthe main sun visor and slide the cover.

Type A only—The vanity light comes onwhen you slide the cover.


128



129


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSLights, Wipers and DefoggerHeadlights and turn signals 130. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency flashers 133. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Instrument panel light control 134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front fog lights 134. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interior lights 135. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Personal lights 136. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ignition switch light 137. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Windshield wipers and washer 137. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear window wiper and washer 138. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers and windshield

wiper de−icer 139. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 5


130


HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twistthe headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,side marker and instrument panel lights

Position 2—Headlights and all of theabove

The headlight indicator lights up in theinstrument cluster.

Position 3 (“AUTO”)—Headlights and/or allof the lights in position 1

They automatically turn on or off depend-ing on the darkness of the surroundings.

Manually twist the knob to the position 2to turn on the headlights if they are need-ed immediately when entering a dark tun-nel, parking structure, etc.

The automatic light control sensor is onthe top of the driver’s side instrumentpanel.

Do not place anything on the instrumentpanel, and/or do not affix anything on thewindshield to block this sensor.

Headlights and turn signals(with automatic light controlsystem)


131


The lights automatically turn off when thedriver’s door is opened with the ignitionkey in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. Toturn them on again, turn the key to the“ON” position or actuate the headlightswitch. If you are going to park for overone week, make sure the headlight switchis off.

NOTICE

To prevent the 12 volt battery frombeing discharged, do not leave thelights on for a long period when thehybrid system is off.

Daytime running light system(on some models)

The headlights turn on at reduced intensi-ty when the parking brake is released withthe hybrid system turned on, even withthe light switch in the “OFF” position.They will not go off until the ignitionswitch is turned off.

To turn on the other exterior lights andinstrument panel lights, twist the knob toposition 1.

Twist the knob to position 2 to turn theheadlights to full intensity for driving atnight.

High−Low beams—For high beams, turnthe headlights on and push the lever awayfrom you (position 1). Pull the lever to-ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light(blue light) on the instrument panel willtell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights(position 3)—Pull the lever all the wayback. The high beam headlights turn offwhen you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlightswith the knob turned to “OFF”.

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/turn signal lever up or down to position1.

The key must be in the “ON” position.

The lever automatically returns after youmake a turn, but you may have to returnit by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the leverup or down to the pressure point (position2) and hold it.

If the turn signal indicator lights (greenlights) on the instrument panel flash fasterthan normal, a front or rear turn signalbulb is burned out. See “Replacing lightbulbs” on page 404 in Section 7−3.


132


For the U.S.A.

For Canada

HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twistthe headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,side marker and instrument panel lights

For Canada—The tail light indicator lightsup in the instrument cluster.

Position 2—Headlights and all of theabove

For the U.S.A.—The headlight indicatorlights up in the instrument cluster.

The lights automatically turn off when thedriver’s door is opened with the ignitionturned off. To turn them on again, turn thekey to the “ON” position or actuate theheadlight switch. If you are going to parkfor over one week, make sure the head-light switch is off.

NOTICE

To prevent the 12 volt battery frombeing discharged, do not leave thelights on for a long period when thehybrid system is off.

Daytime running light system(on some models)

The headlights turn on at reduced intensi-ty when the parking brake is released withthe hybrid system turned on, even withthe light switch in the “OFF” position.They will not go off until the ignitionswitch is turned off.

To turn on the other exterior lights andinstrument panel lights, twist the knob toposition 1.

Twist the knob to position 2 to turn theheadlights to full intensity for driving atnight.

Headlights and turn signals(without automatic lightcontrol system)


133


High−Low beams—For high beams, turnthe headlights on and push the lever awayfrom you (position 1). Pull the lever to-ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light(blue light) on the instrument panel willtell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights(position 3)—Pull the lever all the wayback. The high beam headlights turn offwhen you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlightswith the knob turned to “OFF”.

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/turn signal lever up or down to position1.


The lever automatically returns after youmake a turn, but you may have to returnit by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the leverup or down to the pressure point (position2) and hold it.

If the turn signal indicator lights (greenlights) on the instrument panel flash fasterthan normal, a front or rear turn signalbulb is burned out. See “Replacing lightbulbs” on page 404 in Section 7−3.

To turn on the emergency flashers,push the switch.

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turnthem off, push the switch once again.

Turn on the emergency flashers to warnother drivers if your vehicle must bestopped where it might be a traffic hazard.

Always pull as far off the road as pos-sible.

The turn signal light switch will not workwhen the emergency flashers are operat-ing.

Emergency flashers


134


NOTICE

To prevent the 12 volt battery frombeing discharged, do not leave theswitch on longer than necessary whenthe hybrid system is off.

To adjust the brightness of the instru-ment panel lights, turn the knob.

With the knob turned fully clockwise, theintensity of the instrument panel lights willnot be reduced when the headlight switchis on.

To turn on the front fog lights, twistthe band of the headlight and turn sig-nal switch lever. They will come ononly when the headlights are on lowbeam.

Instrument panel light control Front fog lights


135


To turn on the interior light, slide theswitch.

The interior light switch has the followingpositions:

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

“OFF”—Turns the light off.

“DOOR”—

Center: Turns the light on when any of theside doors and back door are opened.

Rear: Turns the light on when the backdoor is opened.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM (center interior light)

When the switch is in the “DOOR” posi-tion and any of the side doors and backdoor is opened, the light will come on.After all the side doors and back door areclosed, the light remains on for about 15seconds before fading out.

However, in the following cases, the lightfades out immediately:

� All the side doors and back door areclosed when the ignition key is in“ACC” or “ON” position.

� The ignition key is turned to “ACC” or“ON” after all the side doors and backdoor are closed.

� All the side doors and back door arelocked when the light is still on.

When all the side doors and back doorare unlocked using either the key or thewireless remote control transmitter simul-taneously, the light will come on and re-main on for about 15 seconds before fad-ing out.

The following adjustments can be made inthis system. For details, contact yourToyota dealer.

� Cancelling the door key or wireless re-mote control transmitter linked opera-tion

� Changing the timing for the light turn-ing off

Interior lights


136


With moonroof

Without moonroof

The personal lights operate separatelywith each lens.

To turn on the light, push the lens on yourside. To turn the light off, push the lensonce again.

The center switch has the following posi-tions:

“DOOR”—Turns the lights on when any ofthe side doors or back door is opened.

“OFF”—The lights are off.

ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM

When the switch is in the “DOOR” posi-tion and any of the side doors and backdoor is opened, the light will come on.After all the side doors and back door areclosed, the light remains on for about 15seconds before fading out.

However, in the following cases, the lightfades out immediately:



� All the side doors and back door arelocked when the light is still on.





Personal lights


137


For easy access to the ignition switch,the ignition switch light comes on whenany of the side doors are opened.

The light remains on for some time afterall the side doors and back door areclosed.

However, in the following cases, the lightsgo off immediately.



� All the side doors and back door areclosed and locked when the light is stillon.





To turn on the windshield wipers, movethe lever to the desired setting.


Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Slow

Position 3 Fast

For a single sweep of the windshield,push the lever up and release it.

Ignition switch light Windshield wipers and washer


138


The “INT” band lets you adjust the wipingtime interval when the wiper lever is inthe intermittent position (position 1). Twistthe band upward to increase the time be-tween sweeps, and downward to decreaseit.

To squirt washer fluid, pull the levertoward you.

If the windshield wipers are off, they willoperate a couple of times after the washersquirts.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 403 inSection 7−3.

In freezing weather, warm the windshieldwith the defroster before using the washer.This will help prevent the washer fluidfrom freezing on your windshield, whichcan block your vision.

NOTICE

Do not operate the wipers if the wind-shield is dry. It may scratch theglass.

When waxing your vehicle, make sure thatthe washer nozzles do not becomeblocked. If a nozzle becomes blocked,contact your Toyota dealer to have thevehicle serviced.

NOTICE

If a nozzle becomes blocked, do nottry to clear it with a pin or otherobject. The nozzle will be damaged.

To turn on the rear window wiper, twistthe lever knob upward.


Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

Position 2 Normal

To squirt washer fluid on the rear window,twist the knob upward or downward as faras it will go (position 3 or 4). The knobautomatically returns from these positionsafter you release it.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,see “Adding washer fluid” on page 403 inSection 7−3.

Rear window wiper andwasher


139


NOTICE

Do not operate the rear wiper if therear window is dry. It may scratch theglass.

Without navigation system (type A)

Without navigation system (type B)

With navigation system

To defog or defrost the rear window,push the switch.


The thin heater wires on the inside of therear window will quickly clear the windowsurface. An indicator light will illuminate toindicate the defogger is operating.

Rear window and outside rearview mirror defoggers andwindshield wiper de−icer


140


On some models, the outside rear viewmirror defoggers and/or the windshieldwiper de−icer is also operating simulta-neously by this switch. Vehicles with theoutside rear view mirror defoggers, theheater panel in the outside rear view mir-rors will quickly clear the surfaces. Ve-hicles with the windshield wiper de−icer,the windshield wiper blades will be de−iced.

Push the switch once again to turn thedefoggers off.

The system will automatically shut off af-ter the defogger has operated about 15minutes.

CAUTION

Vehicles with outside rear view mirrordefoggers, since the mirror surfacescan get hot, do not touch them whenthe defogger switch is on.

Make sure you turn the defoggers offwhen the surfaces are clear or the wiperblades have de−iced. Leaving the defog-gers on for a long time could cause the12 volt battery to discharge, especiallyduring stop−and−go driving. The defoggersare not designed for drying rain water orfor melting snow.

If the outside rear view mirrors are heavi-ly coated with ice, use a spray de−icerbefore operating the switch.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the heater wires or connec-tors.


141


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSGauges, Meters and Service reminder indicatorsFuel gauge 142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine coolant temperature gauge 142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power meter 143. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers 144. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi−information display 152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 6


142


Low fuel levelwarning light

The gauge indicates the approximatequantity of fuel remaining in the tankwhen the ignition switch is on.

Nearly full—Needle at “F”Nearly empty—Needle at “E”

It is a good idea to keep the tank over1/4 full.

The needle moves when braking, acceler-ating or making turns. This is caused bythe movement of the fuel in the tank.

If the fuel level approaches “E” or the lowfuel level warning light comes on, fill thefuel tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-ment of fuel in the tank, the fuel gaugeneedle may fluctuate or the low fuel levelwarning light may come on earlier thanusual.

If the fuel tank is completely empty, themalfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fillthe fuel tank immediately.

The indicator lamp goes off after drivingseveral times. If the indicator lamp doesnot go off, contact your Toyota dealer assoon as possible.

The gauge indicates the engine coolanttemperature when the ignition switch ison. The engine operating temperaturewill vary with changes in weather andengine load.

If the needle moves into the red zone,your engine is too hot. If your vehicleoverheats, stop your vehicle and allow theengine to cool.

Your vehicle may overheat during severeoperating conditions, such as:

� Driving up a long hill on a hot day.

� Reducing speed or stopping after highspeed driving.

Fuel gaugeEngine coolant temperaturegauge


143


� Towing a trailer.

NOTICE

� Do not remove the thermostat inthe engine cooling system as thismay cause the engine to overheat.The thermostat is designed to con-trol the flow of coolant to keep thetemperature of the engine withinthe specified operating range.

� Do not continue driving with anoverheated engine. See “If your ve-hicle overheats” on page 341 inSection 4. The power meter indicates the instanta-

neous output from the hybrid system inapproximate kilowatts.

While the hybrid system is regeneratingenergy, the meter indicates negative.

Power meter


144


If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(a)

or

(red indicator)If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(yellow indicator)

Take vehicle to Toyota dealer. If red brake system warning light is also on, stopimmediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(b)(indicator and buzzer)

Fasten driver’s seat belt.

(c)(indicator and buzzer)

Fasten front passenger’s seat belt.

(d) Stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(e) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(f) or Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers


145


If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(g) Low fuel level warning light Fill up tank.

(h) orTake vehicle to Toyota dealer. If red brake system warning light is also on, stop immediately and contact Toyotadealer.

(i) Close all side doors and back door.

(j) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(k) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

(l) Read a warning message on multi−information display.

(m) Key reminder buzzer Remove key.


146


(a) Brake System Warning Lights

These lights come on in the followingcases when the ignition key is in the “ON”position.

RED WARNING LIGHT

� When the parking brake is applied...

This light comes on when the ignition isturned on, even after the parking brake isreleased. When the vehicle speed exceeds5 km/h (3 mph), a message “PARKBRAKE” appears on the multi−informationdisplay, the master warning light flashesand a warning tone sounds.

� When the brake fluid level is low...

CAUTION

It is dangerous to continue drivingnormally when the brake fluid level islow.

YELLOW WARNING LIGHT

� When the regenerative brake systemor electronically controlled brakesystem fails...

When the yellow warning light comes on,the regenerative brake system and/or elec-tronically controlled brake system is mal-functioning. Take your vehicle to yourToyota dealer.

RED AND YELLOW WARNING LIGHT

� When the hydraulic brake systemfails...

If the red and yellow warning lights comeon, it indicates a serious problem and youcan continue driving no longer.

Have your vehicle checked at yourToyota dealer in the following cases:

� The lights do not come on even if theparking brake is applied when the hy-brid system is on.

� The lights do not come on when theignition is turned on with the parkingbrake released.

A red or yellow warning light turning onbriefly during operation does not indicatea problem.

CAUTION

If any of the following conditions oc-curs, immediately stop your vehicle ata safe place and contact your Toyotadealer.

� The red warning light does not turnoff even after the parking brake isreleased with the hybrid systemturned on.

� The red warning light stays on.

In either case, this can indicate thatthe brakes may not work properly andyour stopping distance will becomelonger. Depress the brake pedal firmlyand bring the vehicle to an immediatestop.

� The red brake system warning lightremains on together with the “ABS”warning light and “CHECK VSCSYSTEM” warning message.

In this case, not only the anti−lockbrake system and vehicle stabilitycontrol system will fail but also thevehicle will become extremely unsta-ble during braking.


147


In the following case, drive directly tothe nearest Toyota dealer.

� The yellow warning light comes onwhile driving.

Any of the following conditions may oc-cur, but do not indicate the malfunc-tion:

� The red and yellow warning lights maystay on for about 60 seconds after thehybrid system is started. It is normalif it turns off after a while.

� Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the red and yellow warn-ing lights. It is normal if the light turnsoff after a few seconds.

� You may hear a small sound in theengine compartment after the hybridsystem is started or the brake pedal isdepressed repeatedly. This is a pumppulsating sound of the brake system,and it is not a malfunction.

� You may hear a motor sound in theengine compartment when the brakepedal is depressed with the hybrid sys-tem turned off.

� The brake pedal stroke may be shortwhen you turn the ignition key to the“START” position with the brake pedaldepressed.

(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Lightand Buzzer

The light and buzzer act as a reminder tobuckle up the driver’s seat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to the“ON” position, the buzzer sounds for about6 seconds and the reminder light flashesif the driver’s seat belt is not fastened.Unless the driver fastens the belt, thelight continues flashing.

If the vehicle speed rises above 15 km/h(9 mph) with the seat belt unfastened, thebuzzer will sound for about 10 seconds.Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened,the buzzer will sound in a different tonefor 20 more seconds. Even if the vehiclespeed drops below 15 km/h (9 mph), thebuzzer will continue to sound. To stop thebuzzer, fasten the seat belt.

(c) Front Passenger’s Seat BeltReminder Light and Buzzer

The light and buzzer act as a reminder tohave the front passenger buckle up theseat belt.

Once the ignition key is turned to the“ON” position, the reminder light flashes ifa passenger sits in the front passengerseat and does not fasten the seat belt.Unless the front passenger fastens thebelt, the light continues flashing.

If the vehicle speed rises above 15 km/h(9 mph) with the seat belt unfastened, thebuzzer will sound for about 10 seconds.Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened,the buzzer will sound in a different tonefor 20 more seconds. Even if the vehiclespeed drops below 15 km/h (9 mph), thebuzzer will continue to sound. To stopthe buzzer, fasten the seat belt.

If luggage or other load is placed on thefront passenger seat, depending on itsweight and how it is placed on the seat,built−in sensors in the seat cushion maydetect the pressure, causing the reminderlight to flash and buzzer to sound.


148


(d) Charging System Warning Light

When there are problems in the chargingsystem while the hybrid system is running,the warning light comes on.

NOTICE

When the charging system warninglight comes on while the hybrid sys-tem is running, malfunctions mayhave occurred. If the warning lightcomes on, immediately stop the ve-hicle in a safe place and contact yourToyota dealer.

(e) Hybrid Battery Warning Light

This light comes on in the followingcases:

a. The hybrid battery voltage drops be-cause the transmission is left in the“N” position.

If you put the transmission in the “P”position and the light goes off, the systemis working properly.

b. The hybrid battery is discharged.

If the hybrid battery is discharged and thewarning light comes on along with the“READY” light, stop your vehicle in a safeplace and contact your Toyota dealer.

(f) Malfunction Indicator Lamp

This lamp comes on when the ignitionkey is turned to the “ON” position andgoes off after the hybrid system starts.This means that the warning light sys-tem is operating properly.

If the lamp remains on, or the lampcomes on while driving, first check thefollowings.

� Empty fuel tank

If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immedi-ately.

� Loose fuel tank cap

If the fuel tank cap is loose, securelytighten it.

These cases are temporary malfunctions.The malfunction indicator lamp will go offafter taking several driving trips.

If the lamp does not go off even afterseveral trips, contact your Toyota dealeras soon as possible.

If the fuel tank is not empty or the fueltank cap is not loose...

� There is a problem somewhere in thehybrid system or warning light systemitself.

Contact your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to service the vehicle.

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance(I/M) programs

Your vehicle may not pass a stateemission inspection if the malfunctionindicator lamp remains on. Contact yourToyota dealer to check your vehicle’semission control system and OBD(On−Board Diagnostics) system beforetaking your vehicle for the inspection.

For details, see “Emissions Inspection andMaintenance (I/M) programs” on page 374in Section 6.

(g) Low Fuel Level Warning Light

This light comes on when the fuel levelin the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill upthe tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-ment of fuel in the tank, the low fuel levelwarning light may come on earlier thanusual.


149


(h) “ABS” Warning Light

This light comes on when the ignition keyis turned to the “ON” position. If the anti−lock brake system function is workingproperly, the light goes off when the“READY” light comes on. Thereafter, if thefunction malfunctions, the light comes onagain.

When the “ABS” warning light is on andthe yellow brake system warning light ison, the anti−lock brake system functionand the brake assist function may notoperate so that the wheel could lock upduring a sudden braking or braking onslippery road surfaces However, the brakesystem still operates conventionally.

If any of the following conditionsoccurs, this indicates a malfunctionsomewhere in the parts monitored bythe warning light system. Contact yourToyota dealer as soon as possible toservice the vehicle.

� The light does not come on when theignition key is turned to the “ON” posi-tion.

� The light remains on when the“READY” light is on.

� The light comes on while you are driv-ing.

A warning light turning on briefly duringoperation does not indicate a problem.

Either of the following conditions mayoccur, but does not indicate the mal-function:

� The light may stay on for about 60seconds after the hybrid system isstarted. It is normal if it turns off aftera while.

� Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the light. It is normal if itturns off after a few seconds.

CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains ontogether with the red brake systemwarning light, stop your vehicle im-mediately in a safe place and contactyour Toyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti−lockbrake system function and brake as-sist function will fail but also the ve-hicle will become extremely unstableduring braking.

(i) Open Door Warning Light

This light remains on until all the sidedoors and back door are completelyclosed.

Doors left open are shown on the multi−information display.


150


(j) Electric Power Steering SystemWarning Light

This light comes on when the powersteering control system fails.

CAUTION

If this light comes on, take your ve-hicle to the Toyota dealer as soon aspossible. In this case, you may feelthe heavy steering wheel maneuver-ing. Drive your vehicle while grippingthe steering wheel firmly.

(k) SRS Warning Light

This indicator comes on when the igni-tion key is turned to the “ON” position.It goes off after about 6 seconds. Thismeans the SRS airbags and seat beltpretensioners are operating properly.

This warning light system monitors theairbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat beltbuckle switch, front passenger occupantclassification system, “AIRBAG ON” indi-cator light, “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light,front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflat-ors, interconnecting wiring and powersources.






(l) Master Warning Light

If the master warning light comes on, amessage appears on the multi−informationdisplay. Depending on the conditions awarning tone may sound. (See “—Warningmessages” on page 155 in this Section forinstructions.)

(m) Key Reminder Buzzer

This buzzer acts as a reminder to removethe key when you open the driver’s doorwith the ignition key in the “ACC” or“LOCK” position.


151


CHECKING SERVICE REMINDERINDICATORS (except the low fuel levelwarning light and master warning light)

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Open one of the side doors or backdoor.The open door warning light shouldcome on.

3. Close the door.The open door warning light should gooff.

4. Turn the ignition key to “ON”, but donot start the hybrid system. All the service reminder indicators ex-cept the open door warning light shouldcome on. The SRS warning light goesoff after about 6 seconds.

5. Turn the ignition key to the “START”position briefly and firmly.

All of the service reminder indicators ex-cept the red brake system warning lightand driver’s seat belt reminder light go offwhen the “READY” light comes on.

The driver’s seat belt reminder light goesoff when the driver’s seat belt is fastened.The red brake system warning light goesoff when the parking brake is released.

There may be the case that the red andyellow brake system warning lights and“ABS” warning light stay on for about 60seconds. It is normal if they go out aftera while.

If any service reminder indicator or warn-ing buzzer does not function as describedabove, have it checked by your Toyotadealer as soon as possible.


152


The following modes are displayedwhen you push the mode button withthe ignition switch on. Each time youpush the button, the display togglesthrough these modes.

In case your vehicle has a system mal-function or if there is some informationto relate to inform, a warning messageappears on the display. See “—Warningmessages” on page 155 for details.

(a) Odometer and trip meter (enlargedcharacter)

(b) Energy monitor

(c) Outside temperature

(d) Average fuel consumption

(e) Current fuel consumption

The displayed values of the fuel consump-tion indicate general driving conditions.Accuracy varies with driving habits androad conditions.

When the ignition switch is on, the lastpreviously used mode is just before theignition switch is off will appear.

If the electrical power source has beendisconnected from the multi−informationdisplay, the display will automatically beset to the initial mode.

Multi−information display—


153


When the instrument panel lights areturned on, the brightness of the displaywill be reduced.

You can adjust the brightness of the dis-play. To adjust the brightness, see “Instru-ment panel light control” on page 134.

CAUTION

Be sure to adjust the display onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

(a) Odometer and two trip meters

The odometer and two trip meters ap-pear on the display.

See “—Odometer and two trip meters” onpage 154 for details.

(b) Energy monitor

The operating condition of the hybridsystem appears on the display.

See “Energy monitor” on page 2 for de-tails.

(c) Outside temperature (“OUTSIDE TEMP”)

Outside temperature appears on thedisplay.

The displayed temperature ranges from−30�C (−22�F) up to 50�C (122�F). If thetemperature does not appear on the dis-play or it shows “−−”, take your vehicle toyour Toyota dealer.

(d) Average fuel consumption (“AVERAGE”)

Average fuel consumption is calculatedand displayed based on total drivingdistance and total fuel consumptionwith the hybrid system turned on.

The calculation is reset by pushing andholding the mode button for about 1 sec-ond when the average fuel consumption isdisplayed.

At this time, the average fuel consumptionon the trip information is also reset. See“Trip information” on page 270 or 271.

(e) Current fuel consumption(“CURRENT”)

The current fuel consumption is calcu-lated and displayed based on distanceand fuel consumption for 2 seconds.

Note that an accurate figure may not beshown in some cases.


154


These meters appear on the multi−infor-mation display.

1. Odometer—Shows the total distancethe vehicle has been driven.

2. Two trip meters—Show two differentdistances independently driven sincethe last time each trip meter was setto zero.

You can use one trip meter to calculatethe fuel economy and the other tomeasure the distance on each trip. Alltrip meter data is cancelled if the elec-trical power source is disconnected.

3. Trip meter reset knob—Resets the twotrip meters to zero, and also changethe meter display.

Every time you push lightly on the tripmeter reset knob, the display togglesas shown in the illustration.

To reset the trip meter A to zero, dis-play the meter A reading, then pushand hold the knob until the meter isset to zero. The same process can beapplied for resetting the trip meter B.

—Odometer and two trip meters

Standardcharacter

Enlargedcharacter


155


Message Status Action

(a)

Driver’s door is open. Close the door.

Front passenger’s door is open. Close the door.

Right rear door is open. Close the door.

Left rear door is open. Close the door.

Back door is open. Close the door.

(b) Parking brake is not released. Release the parking brake.

(c) Oil change is nearly due. Check engine oil.

(d) Oil change is due. Change engine oil.

—Warning messages


156



(e) Washer fluid level is low. Add washer fluid.

(f)Malfunction of VSC function of the vehicledynamics integrated management isdetected.

Take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer.

(g) Engine oil pressure is low. Stop your vehicle and call a Toyota dealer.

(h) Coolant temperature is too high. Stop and check.

(i) Hybrid system malfunction is detected. Stop your vehicle and call a Toyota dealer.

(j) All wheel drive system malfunction isdetected.

Stop your vehicle and call a Toyota dealer.

(k) Moonroof is open. Close the moonroof.

(l)Driver’s door is opened when transmissionis out of the “P” position with the hybridsystem on.

Shift the transmission to the “P” position.


157



(m) Transmission is out of the “P” positionwhen starting the hybrid system.

Shift the transmission to the “P” position when startingthe hybrid system.

(n) Fuel door is left open. Close the fuel door.


158


(a)

These messages are to remind the driv-er if any of the doors are open.

If any of the doors are open with theignition on, any one of the messages ap-pears and the open door warning lightcomes on. The message specifies thedoor that is open. When the vehicle speedexceeds 5 km/h (3 mph), the masterwarning light flashes and a warning tonesounds.

If any one of the messages appears,stop the vehicle and close the door se-curely.

(b)

This message is to remind the driverthat the parking brake is not released.

When the vehicle speed exceeds 5 km/h(3 mph), the message appears, the masterwarning light flashes and a warning tonesounds.

If the message appears, stop the ve-hicle and release the parking brake.

(c) (U.S.A. only)

This message is to remind the driver tochange the engine oil. The message isa prior notice.

If the driving range after the previous oilchange reaches 7200 km (4500 miles), themessage appears for 15 seconds with themaster warning light and warning tonewhen the ignition is on.

If the message appears, we recommendthat you change the engine oil at theearliest opportunity depending on thedriving and road conditions.

The system must be reset after the en-gine oil change. See following “Resettingthe system” of (d) “MAINT REQD” for theprocedure to reset the system.

(d) (U.S.A. only)

This message is to remind the driver tochange the engine oil.

If the driving range after the previous oilchange reaches to 8000 km (5000 miles),the message appears with the masterwarning light and warning tone when theignition is on. The message stays on withthe ignition on.

If the message appears, change the en-gine oil as soon as possible.

The system must be reset after the en-gine oil change. See “Resetting the sys-tem” below for the procedure to reset thesystem.


159


Resetting the system

The system must be reset after the en-gine oil replacement. Reset the systemby the following procedure.

1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK”position with the odometer readingshown.

For details, see “—Odometer and two tripmeters” on page 154 in this Section.

2. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” posi-tion while holding down the trip meterreset knob. A message “MAINT REQDRESET MODE” will appear on the dis-play.

3. Hold down the knob at least 5 sec-onds. A message “COMPLETE” will ap-pear and a beep will sound.

(e)

This message is to remind the driverthat the washer fluid level is low.

If the washer fluid level is low, the mes-sage appears with the master warninglight and warning tone when the ignitionis on.

If the message appears, fill the washertank as soon as possible. For instruc-tions, see “Adding washer fluid” onpage 403 in Section 7−3.

(f)

This message is to warn the driver thatthe vehicle stability control (VSC) func-tion of the vehicle dynamics integratedmanagement (VDIM) is malfunctioning.

If a malfunction is detected, the messageappears with the master warning light andwarning tone when the ignition is on.

If the message appears, the functionsof VDIM listed below may not work pro-perly. Have the vehicle checked by aToyota dealer as soon as possible.However, as conventional braking oper-ates when applied, there is no problemto continue your driving.

� Traction control function

� Vehicle stability control function

(g)

This message is to warn the driver thatthe engine oil pressure is too low.

If the engine oil pressure is too low, themessage appears with the master warninglight and warning tone when the ignitionis on.

If the message appears, turn the hybridsystem off as soon as possible andcontact a Toyota dealer.

(h)

This message is to warn the driver thatthe hybrid system is almost overheat-ing.

If the coolant temperature is too high, themessage appears with the master warninglight and warning tone when the ignitionis on.


160


If the message appears, stop the ve-hicle as soon as possible and checkthe engine compartment. For detailedinstructions, see “If your vehicle over-heats” on page 341.

Your vehicle may overheat during severeoperating conditions, such as:

� Driving up a long hill on a hot day.

� Reducing speed or stopping after highspeed driving.

NOTICE

� Do not remove the thermostat inthe cooling system as this maycause the hybrid system to over-heat. The thermostat is designed tocontrol the flow of coolant to keepthe temperature of the engine with-in the specified operating range.

� Continued driving with the messagedisplayed could result in the over-heating of the hybrid system.

(i)

This message is to warn the driver thatthe hybrid system is malfunctioning.

If a malfunction of the hybrid system isdetected, the message appears with themaster warning light and warning tonewhen the ignition is on.

If the message appears, stop the ve-hicle as soon as possible and contacta Toyota dealer.

(j)

(All wheel drive models only)

This message is to warn the driver thatthe all wheel drive system is malfunc-tioning.

If a malfunction of all wheel drive systemis detected, the message appears with themaster warning light and warning tonewhen the ignition is on.

If the message appears, have the ve-hicle checked by a Toyota dealer assoon as possible.

(k)

This message is to remind the driverthat the moonroof is open.

If the moonroof is open with the ignitionoff, the message appears with the masterwarning light and warning tone when thedriver opens the door.

If the message appears, close themoonroof.

(l)

This message is to warn the driver thatthe transmission is not in the “P” posi-tion when leaving the vehicle.

If the transmission is not in the “P” posi-tion with the ignition on, the message ap-pears with the master warning light andwarning tone when the driver’s door isopened.

If the message appears, put the trans-mission in the “P” position.


161


(m)

This message is to remind the driverthat the transmission is not in the “P”position when starting the vehicle.

If the transmission is not in the “P” posi-tion, the message appears with the masterwarning light and warning tone when youturn the ignition to “START”.

If the message appears, put the trans-mission in the “P” position and turnthe ignition to “START” again. For thehybrid system starting procedure, see“How to start the hybrid system” onpage 324 in Section 3.

(n)

This message is to remind the driverthat the fuel filler door is open.

The message appears with the masterwarning light and warning tone in the fol-lowing cases.

1. When you start the vehicle with thefuel door left open after refueling.

2. When you leave the fuel door open formore than 30 minutes during refueling.

In case 1, stop the vehicle and closethe fuel lid. In case 2, the internal valvein the fuel tank is closed. You mustremove the fuel nozzle, tighten the fueltank cap and close the fuel door. Ifrefueling is not completed you muststart refueling from the beginning.

CAUTION

Do not continue to refuel in case 2.Fuel may spray out of the fuel open-ing if you refuel the vehicle.


162



163


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSIgnition switch, Transmission and Parking brakeIgnition switch 164. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission 165. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle dynamics integrated management 167. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parking brake 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cruise control 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 7


164


“START”—Starting position of hybridsystem (“READY” indicator on). The keywill return to the “ON” position whenreleased.

For starting tips, see page 323 in Section3.

“ON”—Hybrid system on and all acces-sories on.

This is the normal driving position.

“ACC”—Accessories such as the radioare operational, but the hybrid systemis off.

If you leave the key in the “ACC” or“LOCK” position and open the driver’sdoor, a buzzer will remind you to removethe key.

“LOCK”—Hybrid system is off and thesteering wheel is locked. The key canbe removed at this position only.

You must push in the key to turn it from“ACC” to the “LOCK” position. The selec-tor lever must be in the “P” position be-fore pushing in the key.

Vehicles with engine immobilizer sys-tem—Once you remove the key, the en-gine immobilizer system is automaticallyset. (See “Engine immobilizer system” onpage 25 in Section 1−2.)

When starting the hybrid system, the keymay seem stuck at the “LOCK” position.To free it, first be sure the key is pushedall the way in, and then rock the steeringwheel slightly while turning the key.

Approximately five hours after the hybridsystem is turned off, you may hear soundcoming from underneath the luggagecompartment for several minutes. This isnormal operation and does not indicate amalfunction. (See “Leak detection pump”on page x.)

It is not a malfunction if the needles onall meters and gauges move slightly whenthe ignition key is turned to the “ACC”,“ON” or “START” position.

NOTICE

Do not leave the key in the “ON”position if the hybrid system is off.The 12 volt battery will discharge.

Ignition switch


165


Your transmission has a shift lock systemto minimize the possibility of incorrect op-eration. This means you can only shift outof “P” position when the brake pedal isdepressed (with the ignition switch in “ON”position and the lock release button de-pressed).

(a) Selector lever

The shift position is also displayed on theinstrument cluster.

P: Parking, hybrid system starting and keyremoval

R: Reverse

N: Neutral

D: Normal driving

B: Engine braking

Transmission

Lock release buttonTo prevent misshifting

With the brake pedal depressed,shift while holding the lockrelease button in. (The ignitionswitch must be in “ON” position.)

Shift while holding the lockrelease button in.

Shift normally.

Selector lever


166


(b) Normal driving

1. Start the hybrid system as instructed in“How to start the hybrid system” onpage 324 in Section 3. The transmis-sion must be in “P”.

2. With your foot holding down the brakepedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelera-tor pedal while shifting.

3. Release the parking brake and brakepedal. Depress the accelerator pedalslowly for smooth starting.

(c) Using engine braking

To use engine braking intentionally, down-shift the transmission to “B” position andtake your foot off the accelerator pedal.

During high speed driving you may feelthat engine braking is less effective thanthat of ordinary vehicle.

Do not continue normal driving with thetransmission in “B” for a long time.This may cause decreased fuel econo-my.

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on aslippery surface. Abrupt shiftingcould cause the vehicle to spin orskid.

(d) Backing up

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal held down withyour foot, shift the selector lever to the“R” position.

NOTICE

Never shift into reverse while the ve-hicle is moving.

(e) Parking

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal pressed down,fully depress the parking brake pedalto apply the parking brake securely.

3. With the brake pedal pressed down,shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-tion.

When turning the hybrid system off, putthe transmission in the “P” position.

CAUTION

Never attempt to move the selectorlever into “P” position under any cir-cumstances while the vehicle is mov-ing. Serious mechanical damage andloss of vehicle control may result.

(f) Good driving practice

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brakepedal while stopped with the hybridsystem on. This prevents the vehiclefrom creeping.


167


NOTICE

Always use the brake pedal or theparking brake to hold the vehicle onan upgrade. Do not attempt to holdthe vehicle using the accelerator ped-al, as this can cause the transmissionto overheat.

(g) If you cannot shift the selector le-ver out of “P” position

If you cannot shift the selector lever fromthe “P” position even though the brakepedal is depressed, use the shift lockoverride button. For instructions, see “Ifyou cannot shift transmission selector le-ver” on page 358 in Section 4.

Vehicle dynamics integrated manage-ment (VDIM) is designed to control ve-hicle motion continuously using all pos-sible functions to stabilize the motion.

It is important to keep the tires in goodcondition for the system to properlycontrol vehicle motion. Refer to the in-formation for tires on pages 390through 398 in Section 7−2.

The system has the functions listed below.Each function becomes operational whenthe vehicle speed exceeds the speeds asshown below.

� Brake assist function7 km/h (4 mph)

� Anti−lock brake system function7 km/h (4 mph)

� Traction control function0 km/h (0 mph)

� Vehicle stability control function15 km/h (9 mph)

CAUTION

� Do not rely excessively on theVDIM. Even if the system is operat-ing, you must always drive carefullyand attentively. Reckless driving willresult in an unexpected accident. Ifthe slip indicator flashes, specialcare should be taken.

� Only use tires of specified size. Thesize, manufacturer, brand and treadpattern for all 4 tires should be thesame. If you use any tires otherthan specified, or different types orsizes, the VDIM may not functioncorrectly. When replacing the tiresor wheels, contact your Toyota deal-er.

� Do not modify the suspensions. Ifyou modify the suspensions, theVDIM may not function correctly.

� In situations where the road surfaceis covered with ice or snow, snowtires or tire chains should be used.

Vehicle dynamics integratedmanagement


168


Slip indicator light

When the ignition is turned on, the slipindicator light comes on. It will go offwhen the “READY” light comes on. If theslip indicator light does not come on whenthe ignition is turned on, contact yourToyota dealer.

While the VDIM is using its various func-tions to stabilize vehicle motion, the slipindicator in the instrument cluster flashesand the buzzer sounds. Drive carefullywhen you are in situations where the indi-cator flashes. You may feel some vibra-tions from the underbody and you mayfeel some resistance when turning thesteering wheel when the VDIM is using itsvarious functions.

“ABS” warning light (type A)

“ABS” warning light (type B)


169


“ABS” warning light

When the ignition key is turned to the“ON” position, the “ABS” warning lightcomes on. It will go off when the“READY” light comes on. If the “ABS”warning light does not come on whenthe ignition is turned on, contact yourToyota dealer.

If the “ABS” warning light remains onafter the ignition is turned on or if itcomes on while driving, the anti−lockbrake system function may not operateproperly. Although the brake system op-erates without the function, drive care-fully and have your vehicle checked bya Toyota dealer as soon as possible.For details, see “Service reminder indi-cators and warning buzzers” on page144 in Section 1−6.

Warning message “CHECK VSC SYSTEM”

If “CHECK VSC SYSTEM” appears onthe multi−information display, the trac-tion control and vehicle stability controlfunctions may not operate properly. Al-though the brake system operates nor-mally without these functions, drivecarefully and have your vehicle checkedby a Toyota dealer as soon as possible.For details, see “—Warning messages”on page 155 in Section 1−6.

BRAKE ASSIST FUNCTION

The brake assist function is designed toassist with emergency braking. When thedriver suddenly depresses the brake ped-al, the device treats it as emergency brak-ing and adds braking force.

If you slam the brakes on or apply thebrakes more firmly, more powerful brakingwill be applied. At this time, you may heara sound in the engine compartment andfeel the vibrations of the brake pedal. Thisdoes not indicate a malfunction.

CAUTION

The brake assist function is not de-signed to shorten braking distance.Always drive at a moderate speed andmaintain a safe distance from the ve-hicle in front of you. Depending onroad conditions, braking distance maybe longer than that of a vehicle with-out the brake assist device. If tirechains are used, braking distancemay become longer.


170


ANTI−LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM FUNCTION

The anti−lock brake system function is de-signed to help prevent lock−up of thewheels during sudden braking or whenbraking on slippery road conditions. Thisassists in providing directional stabilityand steering performance of the vehicleunder these circumstances.

Effective way to press the ABS brakepedal: When the anti−lock brake systemfunction is in action, you may feel thebrake pedal pulsating and hear a noise.In this situation, to let the anti−lockbrake system work for you, just hold thebrake pedal down more firmly. Do notpump the brake in a panic stop. Thiswill result in reduced braking perfor-mance.

Depressing the brake pedal on slipperyroad conditions such as on a manholecover, a steel plate at a construction site,joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy daytends to activate the anti−lock brake sys-tem function.

You may hear a click or motor sound inthe engine compartment for a few secondsjust after the vehicle begins to move. Thismeans that the anti−lock brake systemfunction is in the self−check mode, anddoes not indicate a malfunction.

When the anti−lock brake system func-tion is activated, the following condi-tion may occur. This does not indicatea malfunction of the function:

You may hear the anti−lock brake systemfunction operating and feel the brake ped-al pulsating and the vibrations of the ve-hicle body and steering wheel. You mayalso hear the motor sound in the enginecompartment even after the vehicle isstopped.

CAUTION

The anti−lock brake system functionis not designed to shorten brakingdistance. Always drive at a moderatespeed and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front of you. De-pending on road conditions, brakingdistance may be longer than that ofa vehicle without the anti−lock brakesystem. If tire chains are used, brak-ing distance may become longer.


171


Compared with vehicles without ananti−lock brake device, your vehiclemay require a longer stopping dis-tance in the following cases:

� Driving on rough, gravel or snow−covered roads.

� Driving with tire chains installed.

� Driving over the steps such as thejoints on the road.

� Driving on roads where the roadsurface is pitted or has other differ-ences in surface height.

If tire grip performance exceeds itscapability, or if hydroplaning occursduring high speed driving in the rain,the anti−lock brake system does notprovide vehicle control.

TRACTION CONTROL FUNCTION

The traction control function is designed tohelp prevent skid of the drive wheels dur-ing sudden acceleration on slippery roadsurfaces.

You may feel vibration or noise in yourvehicle, caused by operation of thebrakes.

CAUTION

Under certain slippery road condi-tions, full traction of the vehicle andpower against drive wheels cannot bemaintained, even though the tractioncontrol system is in operation. Do notdrive the vehicle under any speed ormaneuvering conditions which maycause the vehicle to lose tractioncontrol. In situations where the roadsurface is covered with ice or snow,your vehicle should be fitted withsnow tires or tire chains. Alwaysdrive at a moderate speed.

VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROLFUNCTION

The vehicle stability control function is de-signed to help prevent skid of the wheelswhile cornering on slippery road surfacesor when turning the steering wheel abrupt-ly.

The system controls the driving and brak-ing forces on each tire and also controlsthe power steering assistance to help thedriver to recover vehicle stability.

CAUTION

Depending on the road conditions,the vehicle stability control functionmay not be able to stabilize your ve-hicle. Always drive at a moderatespeed.


172


Type A

Type B

When parking, firmly apply the parkingbrake to avoid inadvertent creeping.

To set: Fully depress the parking brakepedal. For better holding power, first de-press the brake pedal and hold it whilesetting the parking brake.To release: Depress the parking brakepedal once again.

To remind you that the parking brake isset, the parking brake reminder light (redbrake system warning light) in the instru-ment panel remains on until you releasethe parking brake.

A warning message “PARK BRAKE” ap-pears on the multi−information display anda warning tone sounds to remind you torelease the parking brake when the ve-hicle speed rises above 5 km/h (3 mph)with the parking brake is applied.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure the parkingbrake is fully released and the park-ing brake reminder light is off.

The cruise control is designed to main-tain a set cruising speed without requir-ing the driver to operate the accelera-tor. Cruising speed can be set to anyspeed above 40 km/h (25 mph).

Within the limits of the vehicle capabili-ties, cruising speed can be maintained upor down grades. However, changes in ve-hicle speed may occur on steeper grades.

CAUTION

� To help maintain maximum controlof your vehicle, do not use thecruise control when driving inheavy or varying traffic, or on slip-pery (rainy, icy or snow−covered) orwinding roads.

� Avoid vehicle speed increases whendriving downhill. If the vehiclespeed is too fast in relation to thecruise control set speed, cancel thecruise control then downshift thetransmission to use engine brakingto slow down.

Parking brake Cruise control


173


TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

To turn the cruise control on, press the“ON−OFF” button. The “CRUISE” indicatorlight on the instrument panel will come onto indicate that the cruise control is opera-tional. Pressing the “ON−OFF” buttonagain turns the system off.

When the system is turned off, cruisingspeed must be reset when the cruise con-trol is turned on again.

CAUTION

To avoid accidentally engaging thecruise control, turn the system offwhen it is not in use. Make sure the“CRUISE” indicator light is off.

SETTING THE CRUISING SPEED

The transmission must be in “D” beforeyou set the cruising speed.

Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-tion and release it. This sets the vehicleat that speed. If the speed is not satisfac-tory, tap the lever up for a faster speed,or tap it down for a slower speed. Eachtap changes the set speed by 1.6 km/h(1.0 mph). You can now take your foot offthe accelerator pedal.


174


If you need acceleration—for example,when passing—depress the acceleratorpedal enough for the vehicle to exceedthe set speed. When you release it, thevehicle will return to the speed set priorto the acceleration.

CANCELLING THE CRUISE CONTROL

The cruise control may be temporarilycancelled by the driver or by the systemitself under certain circumstances. Tempo-rary cancellation allows the set cruisingspeed to remain in memory.

The cruise control can be temporarily can-celled by doing the following:

� Pulling the lever in the “CANCEL” di-rection and releasing it

� Depressing the brake pedal

Under certain circumstances, the cruisecontrol is temporarily cancelled:

� When vehicle speed falls below 40km/h (25 mph)

� When vehicle stability control is acti-vated

When vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10mph) below the set speed, the cruise con-trol is cancelled and the set speed iserased from memory.

The “CRUISE” indicator light remains onto indicate that the system is still in op-eration.

To turn the cruise control off, press the“ON−OFF” button. Make sure the“CRUISE” indicator light is off.

If the cruise control automatically cancelsout other than for the above cases, haveyour vehicle checked by your Toyota deal-er at the earliest opportunity.

RESUMING THE CRUISE CONTROL

If the cruise control is temporarily can-celled, the cruising speed can be resumedby pushing the lever up in the “+ RES”direction.

Vehicle speed must be above 40 km/h (25mph).

RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED

Push the lever up in the “+ RES” directionand hold it. Release the lever when thedesired speed is attained. While the leveris held up, the vehicle will gradually gainspeed.

However, a faster way to reset is to ac-celerate the vehicle and then push thelever down in the “− SET” direction.

RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED

Push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-tion and hold it. Release the lever whenthe desired speed is attained. While thelever is held down, the vehicle speed willgradually decrease.

However, a faster way to reset is to de-press the brake pedal and then push thelever down in the “− SET” direction.

CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING

If the “CRUISE” indicator light flasheswhen using the cruise control, press the“ON−OFF” button to turn the system offand then press it again to turn it on.

If any of the following conditions then oc-curs, there is some trouble in the cruisecontrol system.

� The indicator light does not come on.

� The indicator light flashes again.

� The indicator light goes out after itcomes on.

If this is the case, contact your Toyotadealer and have your vehicle inspected.


175


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSAudio systemReference 176. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using your audio system 176. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio remote controls 191. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear seat entertainment system 194. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Audio/video system operating hints 244. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

For vehicle equipped with Navigation system, please refer to theseparate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

SECTION 1− 8


176


Type 1: AM·FM radio/cassette player/com-pact disc player (with compact discchanger controller)

Type 2: AM·FM radio/cassette player/com-pact disc player with changer

This section describes some of the basicfeatures on Toyota audio systems. Someinformation may not pertain to your sys-tem.

Your audio system works when the ignitionkey is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

CAUTION

For vehicles sold in U.S.A. andCanada:

� Part 15 of the FCC Rules

FCC Warning:Any unauthorized changes or modi-fications to this equipment will voidthe user’s authority to operate thisdevice.

� Laser products

Do not take this unit apart or at-tempt to make any changes your-self. This is an intricate unit thatuses a laser pickup to retrieve in-formation from the surface of com-pact discs. The laser is carefullyshielded so that its rays remain in-side the cabinet. Therefore, nevertry to disassemble the player or al-ter any of its parts since you maybe exposed to laser rays and dan-gerous voltages.

This product utilizes a laser. Use ofcontrols or adjustments or perfor-mance of procedures other thanthose specified herein may result inhazardous radiation exposure.

ReferenceUsing your audio system——Some basics


177


TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off.

Push “AM”, “FM”, “TAPE”, “DISC” or“LOAD” to turn on that function withoutpushing “PWR·VOL”. To turn on the cas-sette or compact disc player, a cassetteor compact disc must be loaded in theplayer.

You can turn on each player by insertinga cassette tape or compact disc.

You can turn off each player by ejectingthe cassette tape or compact disc. If theaudio system was previously off, then theentire audio system will be turned offwhen you eject the cassette tape or com-pact disc. If another function was pre-viously playing, it will come on again.

SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS

Push “AM”, “FM”, “TAPE”, “DISC” or“LOAD” if the system is already on butyou want to switch from one function toanother.

TONE AND BALANCE

For details about your system’s tone andbalance controls, see the description ofyour own system.

Tone

How good an audio program sounds toyou is largely determined by the mix ofthe treble, midrange and bass levels. Infact, different kinds of music and vocalprograms usually sound better with differ-ent mixes of treble, midrange and bass.

Balance

A good balance of the left and right stereochannels and of the front and rear soundlevels is also important.

Keep in mind that if you are listening toa stereo recording or broadcast, changingthe right/left balance will increase the vol-ume of one group of sounds while de-creasing the volume of another.

YOUR RADIO ANTENNA

Your vehicle has the on−glass antennaprinted on the inside of the rear quarterwindow.

NOTICE

Putting a film (especially a conductiveor metallic film) on the rear quarterwindow will noticeably reduce thesensitivity of the radio.

YOUR CASSETTE PLAYER

When you insert a cassette, the exposedtape should face to the right.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the cassette player. Do notinsert anything other than cassettetapes into the slot.


178


YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER (type 1)

When you insert a disc, gently push it inwith the label side up. The player will playfrom track 1 through to the end of thedisc. Then it will play from track 1 again.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the compact disc player. Donot insert anything other than com-pact discs into the slot.

8 cm (3 in.) compact disc singles

Your compact disc player does not needan adaptor to play compact disc singles.Compact disc singles are about 8 cm (3in.) in diameter−smaller than standarddiscs.

After you eject a compact disc single, donot insert a standard 12 cm (4.7 in.) discuntil “DISC” disappears from the display.

NOTICE

Do not use an adaptor for compactdisc singles—it could cause trackingerrors or interfere with the ejection ofcompact discs.

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER WITHCHANGER (type 2)

When you insert a disc, push the “LOAD”button and gently push the disc in withthe label side up. This compact disc play-er can store up to six discs. The playerwill play from track 1 through to the endof the disc. Then it will play from track1 of the next disc.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm(4.7 in.) discs only.

NOTICE

� Do not stack up two discs for in-sertion, or it will cause damage tothe compact disc changer. Insertonly one compact disc into slot ata time.

� Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the compact disc player. Donot insert anything except a com-pact disc into the slot.


179


Details of specific buttons, controls andfeatures are described in the alphabeticallist that follows.

—Controls and features�Type 1


180


1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset andtune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune inthe desired station. (See “TUNE” or“SEEK”.) Push and hold down the buttonuntil you hear a beep—this will set thestation to the button. The preset buttonnumber will appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the buttonfor the station you want. The preset but-ton number and station frequency will ap-pear on the display.

This radio can store one AM and two FMstations for each button. (The display willshow “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when youpush “AM” or “FM” button.)

(Eject button)

Push the cassette tape eject button toeject a cassette. Push the compact disceject button to eject a compact disc.

(Program)

Push “ ” (preset button 4) to selectthe other side of a cassette tape. Thedisplay indicates which side is currently

selected (“ ” indicates the top side, “ ”indicates the bottom side).

Auto−reverse feature: After the cassetteplayer reaches the end of a tape side, itautomatically reverses and begins to playthe other side. This is true whether thecassette was playing or fast forwarding.

(Reverse/Fast−forward button)

Cassette player

Push “ ” (preset button 6) to fast−for-ward a cassette tape. “FF” will appear on

the display. Push “ ” (preset button 5)to rewind a tape. “REW” will appear onthe display.

To stop the tape while it is fast−forward-

ing, push “ ” or “TAPE” button. To stop

the tape while it is rewinding, push “ ”or “TAPE” button.

If a tape rewinds completely, the cassetteplayer will stop and then play that sameside. If a tape fast−forwards completely,the cassette will play the other side of thetape using the auto−reverse feature.

Compact disc player

Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or

“ ” (preset button 5) to fast forward orreverse within a compact disc. When yourelease the button, the compact disc play-er will resume playing.

AM

Push the “AM” button to turn on the radioand select the AM band. “AM” will appearon the display.

AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound bal-ance adjustment function)

Each time you push the “AUDIOCONTROL” knob, the mode changes. Toadjust the tone and balance, turn theknob.

BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from −5 to 5.

MID (on some models): Adjusts mid−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from −5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe front and rear speakers. The displayranges from F7 to R7.


181


BAL: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe right and left speakers. The displayranges from L7 to R7.

DISC (Compact disc)

Push the “DISC” button to play a compactdisc.

When the audio system is set into com-pact disc operation, the display shows thetrack, or track and disc number currentlybeing played.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment sys-tem—

The “DISC” button may also be used tooperate a DVD player when a disc isloaded in the DVD player. Pressing the“DISC” button changes between the CDplayer and DVD player. When the DVDplayer is in operation, “AUX” appears onthe display.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-tem will display following error messages.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unitmay be too hot. Allow the player to cooldown.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-aged or inserted incorrectly (up−sidedown). Clean the disc and re−insert it.

“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer ofseparate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

“ERROR 3”: There is a problem insidethe system. Eject the disc or magazine.Set the disc or magazine again.

“ERROR 4”: Over−current. Ask yourToyota dealer to inspect.

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changerlid of separate unit is open. Close thecompact disc changer lid.

If the malfunction still exists, take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer.

� DISC �

With compact disc changer only—

Use these buttons to select the disc youwant to listen to.

Push “�” (preset button 3) or “�” (presetbutton 4) until the number of the disc youwant to listen appears on the display.

Dolby� B NR∗

If you are listening to a tape that wasrecorded with Dolby� B Noise Reduction,push “ ” (preset button 3). “ ” willappear on the display. Push the buttonagain to turn off Dolby� B NR.

The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noiseby about 10 dB. For best sound reproduc-tion, play your tapes with this button onor off according to the mode used to re-cord the tape.∗: Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and thedouble D symbol are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

FM

Push the “FM” button to turn on the radioand select the FM band. “FM1” or “FM2”will appear on the display. This systemallows you to set twelve FM stations, twofor each of the preset button.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust thevolume.


182


RAND (Random)

There are two random features—you caneither listen to the tracks on one compactdisc in random order, or listen to thetracks on all the compact discs in themagazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in randomorder: Quickly push and release “RAND” (presetbutton 1). “ ” will appear on thedisplay and the player will perform thetracks on the disc you are listening to inrandom order. To turn off the random fea-ture, push this button again.


To play all the tracks in the magazine inrandom order:Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display and the player willperform all the tracks on all the discs inthe magazine in random order. To turn offthe random feature, push this buttonagain.

RPT (Repeat)

Cassette player

Push “RPT” (preset button 2) while thetrack is playing. “ ” will appear onthe display. When the track ends, it willautomatically rewind and replay. To turnoff the repeat feature, push this buttonagain.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blankspace between tracks in order for the re-peat feature to work correctly.

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—you caneither replay a disc track or a whole com-pact disc.

Repeating a track:Quickly push and release “RPT” (presetbutton 2) while the track is playing.“ ” will appear on the display. Whenthe track ends, it will automatically replay.To turn off the repeat feature, push thisbutton again.


Repeating a disc:Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display. The player will repeatall the tracks on the disc you are listeningto. When the disc ends, the player willautomatically go back to the first track onthe disc and replay. To turn off the repeatfeature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies ona band or scan only the preset stationsfor that band.

To scan the preset stations: Push and hold the “SCAN” button untilyou hear a beep. The radio will tune inthe next preset station up the band, staythere for 5 seconds, and then move to thenext preset station. To stop scanning,push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies: Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. The radio will find the next station upthe station band, stay there for 5 seconds,and then scan again to the next station.To stop scanning, push this button again.


183


Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the tracks on a specific disc orscan the first tracks of all the discs in themagazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. “SCAN” will appear on the displayand the player will scan all the tracks onthe disc you are listening to. To stopscanning, push this button again. If theplayer has scanned all the tracks on thedisc, it will stop scanning.


Scanning the first tracks of all the discsin the magazine:Push the “SCAN” button until you hear abeep. “ ·SCAN” will appear on the dis-play and the player will scan the firsttrack of the next disc. To stop scanning,push this button again. If the player hasscanned all the discs, it will stop scan-ning.

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds andplays the next station up or down thestation band.

To seek the next station, quickly push andrelease “�” or “�” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button. Do this again to find thestation after that.

Cassette player

Use this button to skip up or down tolocate a song or recording.

You can select up to nine recordings (in-cluding current one).

A blank space of at least 3 seconds isconsidered to be a start of a recording.

When the beginning of a tape is reached,the player automatically resumes play.

When the end of the tape is reached, theplayer automatically reverses sides andresumes normal play.

In addition, the feature may not work wellwith some spoken word, live, or classicalrecordings.

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to adifferent track.

Push “�” or “�” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button until the number of thetrack you want to listen to appears on thedisplay. If you want to return to the begin-ning of the current track, quickly push thedown side of the button one time.


While the DVD player is in operation, thechapter or track can be changed by push-ing the “�” or “�” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereoreception when a stereo broadcast is re-ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If thesignal becomes weak, the radio reducesthe amount of channel separation to prev-ent the weak signal from creating noise.If the signal becomes extremely weak, theradio switches from stereo to mono recep-tion.

TAPE

Push the “TAPE” button to play a cassettetape.


184


TEXT

This button is used to change the displayfor the compact disc that contains textdata.

To change the display, quickly push andrelease the “TEXT” button while the com-pact disc is playing. The display changesin the order from the elapsed time to disctitle to track title, then back to theelapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compactdisc that does not contain text data isplaying, “NO TITLE” will appear on thedisplay.

If the entire disc or track title does notappear on the display, push and hold thebutton until you hear a beep. The rest ofthe title will appear.

TUNE (Tuning)

Turn the “TUNE” knob clockwise to stepup the frequency. Turn the knob counter-clockwise to step down the frequency.


185


Details of specific buttons, controls andfeatures are described in the alphabeticallist that follows.

�Type 2


186


1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset andtune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune inthe desired station. (See “TUNE” or“SEEK”.) Push and hold down the buttonuntil you hear a beep—this will set thestation to the button. The preset buttonnumber will appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the buttonfor the station you want. The preset but-ton number and station frequency will ap-pear on the display.

This radio can store one AM and two FMfor each button. (The display will show“AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you push“AM” or “FM” button.)

(Eject button)

Cassette player

This button is used to eject a cassette.

Compact disc player

This button is used to eject one or allcompact discs.

To eject the current compact disc, pushand release the compact disc eject button.

To eject a specific disc, push “�” (presetbutton 3) or “�” (preset button 4) until thenumber of the disc you want to eject isdisplayed. Push and release the eject but-ton.

To eject all discs at a time, press andhold the eject button until you hear abeep. The last compact disc played beforepushing the button will be ejected first. Ifthe ejected disc is not removed for a longtime, the eject function will be cancelled.

(Program)

Push “ ” (preset button 4) to selectthe other side of a cassette tape. Thedisplay indicates which side is currently

selected (“ ” indicates the top side, “ ”

indicates the bottom side).


(Reverse/Fast−forward button)

Cassette player

Push “ ” (preset button 6) to fast−for-ward a cassette tape. “FF” will appear on

the display. Push “ ” (preset button 5)to rewind a tape. “REW” will appear onthe display.

To stop the tape while it is fast−forward-

ing, push “ ” or “TAPE” button. To stopthe tape while it is rewinding, push “ ”or “TAPE” button.

If a tape rewinds completely, the cassetteplayer will stop and then play that sameside. If a tape fast−forwards completely,the cassette will play the other side of thetape using the auto−reverse feature.

Compact disc player

Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or

“ ” (preset button 5) to fast forward orreverse within a compact disc. When yourelease the button, the compact disc play-er will resume playing.

AM

Push the “AM” button to turn on the radioand select the AM band. “AM” will appearon the display.


187


AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound bal-ance adjustment function)

Each time you push the “AUDIOCONTROL” knob, the mode changes. Toadjust the tone and balance, turn theknob.

BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from −5 to 5.

MID: Adjusts mid−pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from −5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The dis-play ranges from −5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe front and rear speakers. The displayranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance betweenthe right and left speakers. The displayranges from L7 to R7.

DISC (Compact disc)

Push the “DISC” button to play a compactdisc.

When the audio system is set into com-pact disc operation, the display shows thetrack, or track and disc number currentlybeing played.


The “DISC” button may also be used tooperate a DVD player when a disc isloaded in the DVD player. Pressing the“DISC” button changes between the CDplayer and DVD player. When the DVDplayer is in operation, “AUX” appears onthe display.

Error messages


“WAIT”: The compact disc player unitmay be too hot. Allow the player to cooldown.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-aged or inserted incorrectly (up−sidedown). Clean the disc and re−insert it.

“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer ofseparate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

“ERROR 3”: There is a problem insidethe system. Eject the disc or magazine.Set the disc or magazine again.

“ERROR 4”: Over−current. Ask yourToyota dealer to inspect.

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changerlid of separate unit is open. Close thecompact disc changer lid.


� DISC �

Use these buttons to select a disc youwant to listen to.

Push “�” (preset button 3) or “�” (presetbutton 4) until the number of the disc youwant to listen to appears on the display.

Dolby� B NR∗

If you are listening to a tape that wasrecorded with Dolby� B Noise Reduction,push “ ” (preset button 3). “ ” willappear on the display. Push the buttonagain to turn off Dolby� B NR.

The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noiseby about 10 dB. For best sound reproduc-tion, play your tapes with this button onor off according to the mode used to re-cord the tape.∗: Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and thedouble D symbol are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

FM

Push the “FM” button to turn on the radioand select the FM band. “FM1” or “FM2”will appear on the display. This systemallows you to set twelve FM, two for eachof the preset button.


188


LOAD

This button is used to load the compactdiscs in the compact disc player. Thisplayer can store up to six discs.

To load one compact disc only, quicklypush and release the button, then inserta compact disc. After the disc is loaded,the shutter of the slot will close.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutterwill close after 15 seconds.

To load multiple compact discs, push andhold the button (until you hear a beepwhen the audio system is on), then insertthe first compact disc. After the disc isloaded, the shutter of the slot will close.After a few seconds, the shutter will auto-matically open again so the next disc canbe inserted. The same process can beapplied for loading the rest of the discs.If the player is full of discs, “DISC FULL”will appear on the display.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutterwill close after 15 seconds.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio systemon and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust thevolume.

RAND (Random)

There are two random features—you caneither listen to the tracks on one compactdisc in random order, or listen to thetracks on all the compact discs in themagazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in randomorder: Quickly push and release “RAND” (presetbutton 1). “ ” will appear on thedisplay and the player will perform thetracks on the disc you are listening to inrandom order. To turn off the random fea-ture, push this button again.

To play all the tracks in the magazine inrandom order:Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display and the player willperform all the tracks on all the discs inthe magazine in random order. To turn offthe random feature, push this buttonagain.

RDS (Radio Data System) display

The radio will automatically switch to theRDS mode to receive an RDS stationwhile tuned to FM broadcasts. “RDS” willappear on the display.

RPT (Repeat)

Cassette player

Push “RPT” (preset button 2) while thetrack is playing. “ ” will appear onthe display. When the track ends, it willautomatically rewind and replay. To turnoff the repeat feature, push this buttonagain.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blankspace between tracks in order for the re-peat feature to work correctly.

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—you caneither replay a disc track or a whole com-pact disc.

Repeating a track:Quickly push and release “RPT” (presetbutton 2) while the track is playing.“ ” will appear on the display. Whenthe track ends, it will automatically replay.To turn off the repeat feature, push thisbutton again.


189


Repeating a disc:Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-pear on the display. The player will repeatall the tracks on the disc you are listeningto. When the disc ends, the player willautomatically go back to the first track onthe disc and replay. To turn off the repeatfeature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies ona band or scan only the preset stationsfor that band.

To scan the preset stations: Push and hold the “SCAN” button untilyou hear a beep. The radio will tune inthe next preset station up the band, staythere for 5 seconds, and then move to thenext preset station. To stop scanning,push this button again.

To scan all the frequencies: Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. The radio will find the next station upthe station band, stay there for 5 seconds,and then scan again to the next station.To stop scanning, push this button again.

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-ther scan the tracks on a specific disc orscan the first tracks of all the discs in themagazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:Quickly push and release the “SCAN” but-ton. “SCAN” will appear on the displayand the player will scan all the tracks onthe disc you are listening to. To stopscanning, push this button again. If theplayer has scanned all the tracks on thedisc, it will stop scanning.

Scanning the first tracks of all the discsin the magazine:Push the “SCAN” button until you hear abeep. “ ·SCAN” will appear on the dis-play and the player will scan the firsttrack of the next disc. To stop scanning,push this button again. If the player hasscanned all the discs, it will stop scan-ning.

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds andplays the next station up or down thestation band.

To seek the next station, quickly push andrelease “�” or “�” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button. Do this again to find thestation after that.

Cassette player



A blank space of at least 3 seconds isconsidered to be a start of a recording.

When the beginning of a tape is reached,the player automatically resumes play.


In addition, the feature may not work wellwith some spoken word, live, or classicalrecordings.


190


Compact disc player


Push “�” or “�” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button until the number of thetrack you want to listen to appears on thedisplay. If you want to return to the begin-ning of the current track, quickly push thedown side of the button one time.


While the DVD player is in operation, thechapter or track can be changed by push-ing the “�” or “�” side of the “SEEK/TRACK” button.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereoreception when a stereo broadcast is re-ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If thesignal becomes weak, the radio reducesthe amount of channel separation to prev-ent the weak signal from creating noise.If the signal becomes extremely weak, theradio switches from stereo to mono recep-tion.

TAPE

Push the “TAPE” button to play a cassettetape.

TEXT

Radio

This button is operational only in RDSmode.

When an RDS station transmits a textmessage, “MSG” will appear on the dis-played.

To display the text message, first pushthe “TEXT” button to change the radiostation display. Then push the “TEXT” but-ton once more to display, and the mes-sage will appear on the display.

If the entire the message is not displayed,“ ” will appear on the display. To displaythe rest of the message, push and holdthe “TEXT” button until you hear a beep.

After the entire message has been dis-played, the message will disappear.

The message display will be canceled ifany button that affects the display ispushed.

If no messages are received, “NOMESSAGE” will appear on the display, andthe display returns to the previous mode.

The message display will be canceled ifyou activate any function that affects thedisplay.

Compact disc player

This button is used to change the displayfor the compact disc that contains textdata.

To change the display, quickly push andrelease the “TEXT” button while the com-pact disc is playing. The display changesin the order from the elapsed time to disctitle to track title, then back to theelapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compactdisc that does not contain text data isplaying, “NO TITLE” will appear on thedisplay.

If the entire disc or track title does notappear on the display, push and hold thebutton until you hear a beep. The rest ofthe title will appear.

TRAF (Traffic)

This button turns the traffic announcement(TA) feature on and off. This button isoperational only in FM mode.

By pushing the “TRAF” button, “TRAFSEEK” will flash on the display and theradio will seek a traffic program station.

After the traffic announcement program isover, the display returns to the previousmode.


191


If no traffic program station is found, “NOTRAFINFO” appears on the display, andthe display returns to the previous modeand a beep sounds.

To cancel the traffic announcement, pushthis button again.

TUNE (Tuning)

Turn the “TUNE” knob clockwise to stepup the frequency. Turn the knob counter-clockwise to step down the frequency.

TYPE (Program Types)

When you push “�” or “�” of the “TYPE”button while receiving an RDS station, thecurrent program type will appear on thedisplay. If the system is receiving a sta-tion that is not RDS, “NO PTY” will ap-pear.

Repeat this operation within 6 seconds todisplay the program types in the followingorder:

� ROCK

� EASY LIS (Easy listening)

� CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz)

� R&B (Rhythm and Blues)

� INFORM (Information)

� RELIGION

� MISC (Miscellaneous)

� ALERT (Emergency message)

To seek or scan for the same type ofprogram, push the “SEEK/TRACK” or“SCAN” button while the program type isdisplayed.

If no program is found, “NOTHING” willappear on the display. The previous pro-gram information will resume.

When the system is left untouched for 6seconds, the program type display willchange to the frequency display.

Some parts of the audio system can beadjusted using the switches on the steer-ing wheel.

Details of the specific switches, controls,and features are described below.

1. “+ −” switch

2. “��” switch

3. “MODE” switch

Audio remote controls(steering switches)


192


1. “+ −” switch

Push “+” to increase the volume. The vol-ume continues to increase while theswitch is being pushed.

Push “−” to decrease the volume. Thevolume continues to decrease while theswitch is being pushed.

2. “��” switch

Radio

This switch has the following features—

To select a preset station:Quickly push and release the “�” or “�”side of the switch. Do this again to selectthe next preset station.

To seek a station:Push and hold the “�” or “�” side of theswitch until you hear a beep. Do thisagain to find the next station. If you pushthe switch on either side during the seekmode, seeking will be cancelled.

To step up or down the frequency, pushand hold the switch even after you heara beep. When you release from theswitch, the radio will begin seeking up ordown for a station. Do this again to findthe next station.

Cassette player

This switch has the following features—

To skip to a different track in either direc-tion:Quickly push and release the “�” or “�”side of the switch. “FF 1” or “REW 1” willappear on the display.

Next, push either side of the track switchuntil the track you want to listen to is set.If you push the switch ten times, the skipfunction will turn off. (You can skip up tonine tracks at a time.)

When counting the number of the tracksyou want to rewind, remember to countthe current track as well. For example, ifyou want to rewind to a song that is twotracks before the song you are listeningto, push the “�” side of the switch threetimes.

If you push the track switch further thanyou wanted to, push the other side of theswitch. The track number will be in-creased or reduced.

The track number you select is not validif it is higher than the number of thetracks remaining on the current side ofthe cassette.

� When the tape reaches to the begin-ning, the player will automatically startplaying that side.

� After the tape reaches to the end, theplayer will automatically reverse andstart playing the other side.

There must be at least 3 seconds of blankspace between tracks for the track switchto work correctly. In addition, the featuremay not work well with some spoken, live,or classical recordings.

To fast forward or reverse:Push and hold the “�” side of the switchto fast forward a cassette tape. “FF” willappear on the display. Push and hold the“�” side of the switch to rewind a tape.“REW” will appear on the display.

To stop the tape while it is fast forward-ing, push the “�” side of the switch. Tostop the tape while it is rewinding, pushthe “�” side of the switch.

If a tape rewinds completely, the cassetteplayer will stop and then play that sameside. If a tape fast forwards completely,the cassette will play the other side of thetape using the auto−reverse feature.


193


Compact disc player

Use this switch to skip up or down to adifferent track in either direction.

Quickly push and release the “�” or “�”side of the switch until the track you wantto listen to is set. If you want to returnto the beginning of the current track, pushthe “�” side of the switch once, quickly.


Push and hold the “�” or “�” side of theswitch until the disc you want to listen tois set.


While the DVD player is in operation, thechapter or track can be changed by push-ing the “�” or “�” side of the switch.

3. “MODE” switch

Push “MODE” switch to select an audiomode. Each push changes the mode se-quentially if the desired mode is ready touse. The DVD player will be selectable ifa rear seat entertainment system isinstalled in your vehicle.

To turn the audio system on, push the“MODE” switch.

To turn the audio system off, push andhold the “MODE” switch until the systemturns off.


194


The rear seat entertainment system con-sists of the following components.

1. Headphone volume control dials

2. Headphone jacks

3. DVD player

4. Rear seat entertainment system display

5. Rear seat entertainment systemcontroller

6. Input terminal adapter

7. Power outlet (See “Power outlet” onpage 281 in Section 1−10.)

8. Power outlet main switch

9. Front audio system

Rear seat entertainment system—


195


The rear seat entertainment system is de-signed for the rear passengers to enjoyaudio and DVD video separately from thefront audio system.

The rear seat entertainment system canbe operated when the ignition key is inthe “ACC” or “ON” position.

The rear passengers can enjoy all modes(AM and FM radio, cassette tape player,compact disc player with changer andDVD player) on the rear seat entertain-ment system only if a cassette tape anda compact disc are loaded in the frontaudio system.

The rear seat entertainment system canplay DVD video, audio CD, video CD, CDtext, dts−CD or DVD audio only when adisc is loaded in the DVD player.

You can enjoy videos and sound whenyour personal audio system is connectedto the input terminal adapter on the rearconsole box. For details, refer to themanufacturer’s instructions.

You can enjoy the rear seat entertainmentsystem with commercial headphone. See“—Headphone jacks” on page 243 in thisSection for details.

You can also enjoy the rear seat enter-tainment system with a wireless head-phone. The wireless headphone can beused within rear seat. If the signal be-comes weak, the headphone will mute.For details, refer to the manufacturer’sinstructions.

With some wireless headphone generallyavailable in the market, it may be difficultto catch sound properly. Toyota recom-mends the use of Toyota genuine wirelessheadphone.

You can purchase a wireless headphoneat a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

� Do not operate a motor vehiclewhile using headphones. Doing somay cause an accident, resulting ininjury.

� Conversational speech on someDVDs is recorded at a low volumeto emphasize the impact of soundeffects. If you adjust the volumeassuming that the conversationsrepresent the maximum volume lev-el that the DVD will play, you maybe startled by louder sound effectsor when you change to a differentaudio source. Be sure to adjust thevolume with this in mind.

Make sure the volume is not in-creased, before you turn on theheadphone.


196


To open the display, push the lock releasebutton.

Push down the display until it is locked.

NOTICE

The screen should be cleaned with adry soft cloth. If the screen is pushedby hand or wiped with a hard cloth,the surface of the screen may bescratched.

To close, push up the display until youhear a click.

The illumination of the screen is automati-cally turned off when the display isclosed. However, the rear seat entertain-ment system is not turned off.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or sudden stopwhile driving, close the display whenit is not in use.

—Display


197


NOTICE

� Benzene or alkaline solutions maydamage the coated surface of thescreen.

� To prevent the 12 volt battery frombeing discharged, do not turn onthe rear seat entertainment systemlonger than necessary when the hy-brid system is off.

The rear seat entertainment system canbe operated with the rear seat entertain-ment system controller and buttons on theDVD player unit. The system cannot beoperated by touching the switches on thescreen directly.

CAUTION

Do not disassemble or modify thecontroller. It may cause an accident,fire or electric shock.

NOTICE

Keep the controller away from directsunlight, high heat and high humidity.These conditions could cause thecase to deform or the battery to ex-plode or leak.

BEFORE USING THE CONTROLLER (for new vehicle owners)

A battery is already set in the control-ler with an insulating sheet, which pre-vents the battery from being dis-charged. Before using the controller,remove the insulating sheet accordingto the following procedure.

—Rear seat entertainmentsystem controller


198


1. Remove the cover of the controlleras shown.

2. Remove the insulating sheet.


199


USING THE CONTROLLER

To use the rear seat entertainment sys-tem controller, direct the signal outputportion of the controller to the signalreception portion of the rear seat enter-tainment system display.

The controller does not operate properlywhen the signal reception portion of thedisplay is exposed to direct sunlight.Block the display from direct sunlight.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stopwhile driving, stow the controller inthe console box or front seatbackpocket when it is not in use.

NOTICE

Observe the followings, otherwise thecontroller may be damaged.

� Do not drop or strongly knock thecontroller against hard objects.

� Do not sit on or place heavy ob-jects on the controller.

� Do not leave the controller exposedto high temperatures (such as onthe instrument panel) for a longtime.


200


LOCATING THE CONTROLLER

If you lose sight of the controller, pushand hold the “CURSOR (REMOTE)” buttonon the DVD player unit until you hear abeep. A buzzer sounds from the controllerto let you know where it is.

To stop the buzzer, push any button of thecontroller.

If the controller is located close to some-thing that blocks the signal, such as somekind of metal, the controller may not re-ceive the signal and the buzzer may notsound.

FCC InformationCaution: Any changes or modifica-tions in construction of this devicewhich are not expressly approved bythe party responsible for compliancecould void the user’s authority to op-erate the equipment.

FCC Label InformationThis device complies with part 15 ofthe FCC Rules. Operation is subjectto the following two conditions: (1)This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference received, In-cluding interference that may causeundesired operation.


201


1. “DVD” button

This button turns on the DVD mode.

2. “SOURCE” button

This button turns on the rear seat en-tertainment system and selects themode.

3. “OFF” button

This button turns off the rear seat en-tertainment system.

4. Joystick

This joystick selects a control switch,mode switch on the screen or themenu for the disc.

5. “ENT” button

This button inputs the selected switchor the selected menu for the disc.

6. “DISC/CH/PROG” button

This button skips directly to a desiredpreset station, disc, track or chapter.

7. “��” button

This button fast forwards a screenwhen the DVD player is operated.

8. “RETURN” button

This button skips to the predeterminedscene for the disc when the DVD play-er is operated.

—Control buttons�Controller


202


9. “MENU” button

This button indicates the menu screenfor DVD video when the DVD player isoperated.

10. “AUDIO” button

This button indicates the changing au-dio screen when the DVD player isoperated.

11. “SUB TITLE” button

This button indicates the changing sub-title screen when the DVD player isoperated.

12. “DISPLAY” button

This button adjusts the color, tone,contrast and brightness of the screen.

13. “SET UP” button

This button indicates the initial set upscreen when the DVD player is oper-ated.

14. “ANGLE” button

This button selects the angle of thescreen when the DVD player is oper-ated.

15. “SEARCH” button

This button indicates the title searchscreen when the DVD player is oper-ated.

16. “TOP MENU” button

This button indicates the title selectionscreen for DVD video when the DVDplayer is operated.

17. “ ” button

This button pauses a screen when theDVD player is operated.

18. “��” button

This button reverses a screen whenthe DVD player is operated.

19. “�” button

This button plays a screen when theDVD player is operated.

20. “TUNE/TRACK” button

This button seeks a radio station orselects track/chapter.

21. “CURSOR” button

This button indicates the controlswitches on the screen when the DVDplayer is operated.

22. “VIDEO” button

This button causes the display to usethe video signal from an external videodevice.


203


1. “ ” button

This button ejects a disc.

2. “SOURCE” button

This button turns on the rear seat en-tertainment system and selects themode.


This button seeks a radio station orselects track/chapter.


This button skips directly to a desiredpreset station, disc, track or chapter.

5. “CURSOR (REMOTE)” button

This button indicates the controlswitches on the screen when the DVDplayer is operated. This button alsocan be used when you lose sight ofthe controller.

6. Joystick

This joystick selects a control switch,mode switch on the screen or themenu for the disc.

�Buttons on the DVD player unit


204


7. “ENT” button

This button inputs the selected switchor the selected menu for the disc.

8. “DISC” indicator light

This light indicates that the disc isloaded.

Controller

DVD player unit

To turn on the system, push the“SOURCE” button.

The screen indicates which mode can beselected. Push the “DVD” or “VIDEO” but-ton when the connected DVD player oryour personal audio machine is on. Therear seat entertainment system will beturned on.

The rear seat entertainment system canselect all the modes.

When a cassette tape, a compact disc, aDVD video disc, an audio CD, a videoCD, a CD text, a dts−CD or a DVD audiodisc is not loaded on the front audio sys-tem or the DVD player, only the radiomode can be selected on the rear seatentertainment system.

—Turning the rear seatentertainment system on andoff


205


To turn off the system, push the “OFF”button.

When the front audio system is turned off,the rear audio system and the DVD playerwill be turned off simultaneously.

All the modes of the front audio systemcan be operated on the rear seat enter-tainment system.

When the same mode is selected on thefront and rear audio systems simulta-neously, the system can be operated onthe front audio system.

If the radio mode is selected on the frontand rear audio systems at the same time,AM and FM modes cannot be changed onthe rear seat audio system.

Controller

DVD player unit

—Front audio systemoperation


206


SELECTING THE MODE

Use the joystick to select the mode. Pushthe “ENT” button to enter the mode.

The mode display which is selected bythe joystick is colored blue. When the“ENT” button is pushed, the mode displaychanges to green. If the mode display isgray, it cannot be selected.

The “Speaker sound” on the mode displayis selected on the front audio system.

Radio

Cassette tape player and compact discplayer


207


When you select a mode, the screen indi-cates which is selected.

Radio

AM mode:

When you select the AM mode, “AM” willappear on the screen.

FM mode:

When you select the FM mode, “FM1” or“FM2” will appear on the screen.

Tape mode

“TAPE” appears on the screen while thismode is selected.

Compact disc mode

“CD” appears on the screen while thismode is selected.

The screen shows the track, or track anddisc number currently being played.

Controller

DVD player unit

OPERATING FRONT AUDIO SYSTEM

To operate the front audio system, usethe following switches.


Radio

You can scan only the preset stations forthe band of the front audio system. (Forinstructions, see “—Controls and features”on page 179 in this Section.)

To scan the preset stations:Push the “ ” or “ ” side of the “DISC/CH/PROG” button. The radio will tune inthe next preset station up or down theband. The station frequency will appear onthe screen.


208


Cassette tape player

Push the “ ” or “ ” side of the “DISC/CH/PROG” button to select the other sideof a cassette tape. The screen indicateswhich side is currently selected. (“ ” indi-cates the top side, “ ” indicates the bot-tom side.)


Compact disc player with changer

Use these buttons to select a disc youwant to listen to.

Push the “ ” or “ ” side of the “DISC/CH/PROG” button until the number of thedisc you want to listen appears on thedisplay.


Radio

Push the “ ” or “ ” side of the “TUNE/TRACK” button to tune or seek.

Tuning:

Quickly push and release the “ ” or “ ”side of the “TUNE/TRACK” button. Eachtime you push the button, the radio willstep up or down to another frequency. Ifyou push and hold the button, and theradio will go into the seek mode.

Seeking:

Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” side of the“TUNE/TRACK” button. The radio will seekup or down for a station of the nearestfrequency and will stop on reception. Eachtime you push the button, the stations willbe searched one after another.

Cassette tape player

To fast forward a cassette tape, push andhold the “ ” side of the “TUNE/TRACK”button until “FF” appears on the screen.Push and hold the “ ” side of the “TUNE/TRACK” button until “REW” appears onthe screen to rewind a tape.



Push the “ ” or “ ” side of the “TUNE/TRACK” button. “FF 1” or “REW 1” willappear on the screen.

Next, push either side of the track buttonuntil the number on the screen reachesthe number of tracks you want to skip. Ifyou push the button 10 times, the skipfeature will be turned off.

For the skip feature to work correctly ablank space of at least 3 seconds is con-sidered to be a start of a recording.

When a beginning of a tape is reached,the player automatically resumes play.


In addition, the feature may not work wellwith some spoken, live, or classical re-cordings.


209


Compact disc player


Push the “ ” or “ ” side of the “TUNE/TRACK” button until the number of thetrack you want to listen to appears on thescreen. If you want to return to the begin-ning of the current track, quickly push the“ ” side of the “TUNE/TRACK” button onetime.

Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” side of the“TUNE/TRACK” button to fast forward orreverse within a compact disc. When yourelease the button, the compact disc play-er will resume playing.

REPLACING CONTROLLER BATTERY

For replacement, use 3 AA batteries.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken to pre-vent small children from swallowingthe removed battery or components.

NOTICE

� When replacing the battery, be care-ful not to lose the components.

� Replace only with the same orequivalent type of battery recom-mended by a Toyota dealer.

� Dispose of used batteries accordingto local laws.

Replace the battery according to the fol-lowing procedure:

1. Remove the cover of the controller asshown.


210


2. Remove the discharged batteries andput in the new batteries as shown.Install the cover.

NOTICE

� Be sure that the positive side andnegative side of the controller bat-tery should be faced correctly.

� Do not replace the battery with wethands. Water may cause rust.

� Do not touch or move any compo-nents inside of the controller, or itmay interfere with proper operation.

� Be careful not to bend the electrodeof the controller battery insertion.

� Close the battery case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that thecontroller operates properly. If the control-ler still does not operate properly, contactyour Toyota dealer.

The DVD player can play audio CDs,DVD video discs, CD texts, dts−CDsand video CDs.

For appropriate discs for this player, see“Audio/video system operating hints” onpage 244 in this Section.

The DVD player works when the ignitionkey is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

To turn on the DVD player, a disc mustbe loaded in the player.

To turn off the player, eject the disc.

Error messages


If “DISC CHECK” appears on thescreen: It indicates that the disc is dirty,damaged or it was inserted upside down.Clean the disc or insert it correctly.

If “REGION CODE ERROR” appears onthe screen: It indicates that the DVD re-gion code is not set properly.

If “DVD ERROR” appears on thescreen: There is a problem inside theplayer. Eject the disc. Set the disc again.


—DVD player


211


INSERTING THE DISC

Insert the compact disc into the slotwith the label side up.

“DISC” indicator light turns on while thedisc is loaded.

If the label faces down, the disc cannotbe played. In this case, “DISC CHECK”and disc number appear on the screen.

If a disc which is not playable is inserted,“DISC CHECK” will also appear on thescreen. For appropriate discs for this play-er, see “Audio/video system operatinghints” on page 244 in this Section.

The player will play the track or chapter,and it will play from the beginning of thetrack or chapter again after it reaches theend.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil anypart of the DVD player. Do not insertanything other than a disc into theslot.

8 cm (3 in.) compact disc singles

Your compact disc player does not needan adaptor to play compact disc singles.Compact disc singles are about 8 cm (3in.) in diameter−smaller than standarddiscs.

NOTICE

Do not use an adaptor for compactdisc singles—it could cause trackingerrors or interfere with the ejection ofcompact discs.

EJECTING THE DISC

Push the “ ” button.


212


To select the DVD mode, push the“DVD” button on the controller.

You can also select the DVD mode on themode selection screen mentioned above.

The “DVD Hint!” screen appears whenthe DVD mode is first selected afteryou turn the ignition key to the “ACC”or “ON” position.

Push the “OK” switch when you read themessage.

—Selecting the DVD mode


213


The DVD player can be operated with thecontroller buttons directly.

1. “DVD” button

2. “RETURN” button

3. “MENU” button

4. “AUDIO” button

5. “SUB TITLE” button

6. “ANGLE” button

7. “SET UP” button

8. “SEARCH” button

9. “TOP MENU” button

10. “ ”, “�”, “��” and “��” buttons

Controller

DVD player unit

The player can also be operated with theswitches on the screen.

To operate the switches on the screen,select the switch by the joystick and pushthe “ENT” button. You cannot select theswitches on the screen by touching themdirectly.

When the switch is selected by the joys-tick, the outline of the switch changes toblue. Push the “ENT” button, and theswitch will be highlighted in green.

—DVD player operationswitches


214


Controller

DVD player unit

TURNING THE OPERATION SWITCHESON AND OFF

To turn on the operation switches, pushthe “CURSOR” button on the controller.

Page 1 (DVD video operation switch)

Page 2 (DVD video operation switch)


215


Page 1 (DVD audio operation switch)

Page 2 (DVD audio operation switch)

Page 1 (video CD)

Page 2 (video CD)

There are operation switches on the“Page1” and “Page2” screens.

To change the screen, push the “Page1”or “Page2” switch on the screen.


216


If “ ” appears on the screen whenyou select a switch, it indicates thatthe switch cannot work.

On the screen

Controller

DVD player unit


217


To turn off the switches on the screen,push the “CURSOR” button on the control-ler once again or push the “Hide Buttons”on the screen.

NOTE: The playback condition of someDVD video discs may be determined bythe DVD video software producer. ThisDVD player plays discs as the softwareproducer intended. Therefore, somefunctions may not work properly. Besure to read the instruction manual forthe DVD video disc separately provided.For detailed information about DVD vid-eo discs, see “—DVD video disc infor-mation” on page 241 in this Section.

Precautions for DVD video discs

When recording on a DVD video, DVDaudio, video CD or audio tracks may notrecord in some cases while the menu isdisplayed. As audio will not play in thiscase, verify that the video tracks are play-ing and then activate playback.

The title/chapter number and playbacktime display may not appear while playingback certain DVD video discs.

CAUTION

Conversational speech on some DVDsis recorded at a low volume to em-phasize the impact of sound effects.If you adjust the volume assumingthat the conversations represent themaximum volume level available forthe DVD, you may be startled bylouder sound effects or when youchange to a different audio source.Loud sounds may have a significantimpact on the human body or pose adriving hazard. Keep this in mindwhen you adjust the volume.

—DVD player operation (DVD video/DVD audio)


218


DVD video

DVD audio

TURNING THE MENU SCREEN FOR THEDISC ON OR OFF

DVD video—

To turn on the menu screen for the disc,push the “Top Menu” or the “Menu” switchon the screen. You can also turn on themenu screen by pushing the “MENU” or“TOP MENU” switch on the controller.

DVD audio—

To turn on the menu screen for the disc,push the “Top Menu” switch on thescreen. You can also turn on the menuscreen by pushing the “TOP MENU”switch on the controller.

For the operation of the menu screen, seethe separate manual for the DVD disc.

To turn on the selecting switch, push the“ ” switch.


219


To select the menu for the disc, push the“ ”, “ ”, “ ” or “ ” switches on thescreen. Push the “Enter” switch to selectthe menu for the disc.

You can also select the menu for the discby the joystick and the “ENT” button onthe controller when the control switchesare not indicated on the screen.

Push the “Move Buttons” on the screen,and the switches (“ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”,“Enter” and “Move Buttons” switches) willmove up and down.

To turn off the switch, push the “OFF”switch on the screen. To turn on theswitch again, push the “ON” switch on thescreen.

To return to the previous screen, push the“Back” switch on the screen.

DVD video

DVD audio


220


OPERATING THE “ ”, “�”, “��” AND“��” SWITCHES/BUTTONS

“ ” switch/button: Push this switch/buttonto pause the disc.

“�” switch/button: Push this switch/buttonto cancel the pause and return to normalplaying.

“��” and “��” switches/buttons: Pushand hold the “��” or “��” switch/buttonto fast forward or reverse. When you re-lease the switch/button, the DVD playerwill resume playing.

DVD video only—

Push the “��” or “��” switch/buttonwhile pausing, the DVD video plays theslow−motion video replay or the slow−mo-tion video replay in reverse.

DVD video

DVD audio

SKIPPING TO THE PREDETERMINEDSCREEN

To skip to the predetermined screen, pushthe “Return” switch. The DVD player startsplaying from the beginning of the predeter-mined screen. You can also display thescreen by pushing the “RETURN” buttonon the controller.

For further details of the predeterminedscreen, see the separate manual for theDVD disc.


221


DVD video

DVD audio

SELECTING THE TITLE/GROUP

To display the searching title (DVD video)or group (DVD audio) screen, push the“Search” switch on the screen. You canalso display the screen by pushing the“SEARCH” button on the controller.

DVD video

DVD audio


222


DVD video—

Select the title number by using the “−”,“+” and “+10” switches and push the“Enter” switch to enter the number. Theplayer starts playing disc for that titlenumber. The selected title number willappear on the screen.

Push the “Back” switch to return to themenu screen.

DVD audio—

Enter the group number by using the “−”and “+” switches. The selected groupnumber will appear on the screen. Pushthe “Enter” switch. The player starts play-ing the disc from the entered group num-ber.

Push the “Back” switch to return to theprevious screen.

SELECTING THE BONUS GROUP

DVD audio only—

Enter the bonus group number on thesearching group screen and push the“Enter” switch. The “Enter Key Code”screen will appear. To enter the number ofthe group you want to play, push thegroup number. If you enter the wrongnumber, push the “Clear” switch to deletethe number.

Push the “Enter” switch on the screen.The player starts playing the disc from theselected bonus group number.

CHANGING THE STILL PICTURE

DVD audio only—

Push the “Still Prev.” or “Still Next” switchon the screen to forward or reverse thestill pictures.


223


DVD video

DVD audio

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

Push the “Sub Title” switch on the screen,and then the changing subtitle languagescreen will appear. You can also displaythe screen by pushing the “SUB TITLE”button on the controller.

Each time you push the “Sub Title” switch,another language stored on the disc isselected.

To turn off the subtitles, push the “Hide”switch.


The selected subtitle language will appearon the screen.


224


CHANGING AUDIO LANGUAGE (DVDvideo only)

Push the “Audio” switch on the screenand then the changing audio languagescreen will appear. You can also displaythe screen by pushing the “AUDIO” buttonon the controller.

Each time you push the “Audio” switch,another language stored on the disc isselected.

The selected audio language will appearon the screen.



225


CHANGING AUDIO FORMAT (DVD audioonly)

Push the “Audio” switch on the screen orthe “AUDIO” button on the controller andthe changing audio format screen will ap-pear.

Each time you push the “Audio” switch,another audio format stored on the disc isselected.



226


DVD video

DVD audio

CHANGING ANGLE SCREEN

Push the “Angle” switch on the screen,and then the changing angle screen willappear. You can also display the screenby pushing the “ANGLE” button on thecontroller.

The angle can be selected for discs thatare multi−angle compatible when the“ ” mark appears on the screen. Eachtime you push the “Angle” switch, theangle changes. The angle number whichyou can select will appear on the screen.



227


DVD video

DVD audio

CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING

Push the “Set Up” switch on the screen,and then the initial setting screen will ap-pear. You can also display the screen bypushing the “SET UP” button on the con-troller. You can change the initial setting.

After the setting is done, the player playsfrom the beginning of the chapter or thetrack.

Setup Menu 1 screen

Setup Menu 2 screen


228


There are initial setting switches on the“Setup Menu 1” and “Setup Menu 2”screens.

To change the screen, push the “Page1”or “Page2” switch on the screen.

After you change the initial setting, pushthe “Enter” switch. The initial settingswitch will be turned off and return to thepicture previously.

When the “Default” switch on “Setup Menu2” is pushed, all menus are initialized.

CHANGING THE AUDIO LANGUAGE

Push the “Audio Language” switch on the“Setup Menu 1” and the “Select AudioLanguage” screen appears.

Select the language you want to hear onthe screen.

To return to the “Setup Menu 1” screen,push the “Back” switch.

If you cannot find a language you want tohear, push the “Others” switch. The “EnterAudio Lang. Code” screen will appear.

To enter the code of the language youwant to hear, push the number of thelanguage code. For details about the lan-guage codes, see the language code list.If you enter a wrong number, push the“Clear” switch to delete the number.

If numbers which are not on the list areentered and the “Enter” switch is pushed,the “Incorrect Code” screen will appear.Push the language code you want to hearagain.

To return to the “Select Audio Language”screen, push the “Back” switch.


229


CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

To display the “Select Subtitle Lang.”,push the “Subtitle Language” switch onthe “Setup Menu 1” screen.

Select the language you want to read onthe screen.


If you cannot find a language you want toread, push the “Others” switch. The “EnterSubtitle Lang. Code” screen will appear.

To enter the code of the language youwant to read, push the number of thelanguage code. For details about the lan-guage codes, see the language code list.If you enter a wrong number, push the“Clear” switch to delete the number.

Push the “Enter” switch on the screen. Ifnumbers which are not on the list areentered and the “Enter” switch is pushed,the “Incorrect Code” screen will appear.Push the language code you want to readagain.

To return to the “Select Subtitle Lang.”screen, push the “Back” switch on thescreen.

CHANGING THE DVD LANGUAGE

To display the “Select DVD Language”screen, push the “DVD Language” switchon the “Setup Menu 1” screen.

Select the language you want to read onthe screen.


If you cannot find a language you want toread, push the “Others” switch. The “EnterDVD Language Code” screen will appear.


230


To enter the code of the language youwant to read, push the number of thelanguage code. For details about the lan-guage codes, see the language code list.If you enter a wrong number, push the“Clear” switch to delete the number.

Push the “Enter” switch on the screen. Ifnumbers which are not on the list areentered and the “Enter” switch is pushed,the “Incorrect Code” screen will appear.Push the language code you want to readagain.

To return to the “Select DVD Language”screen, push the “Back” switch on thescreen.

TURNING THE ANGLE MARK ON OROFF

The angle mark can be turned on fordiscs that are multi−angle compatible.

Each time you push the “Angle Mark”switch on the screen, the angle markturns on or off alternately.

SETTING LEVEL OF VIEWERRESTRICTIONS

You can restrict the play back screen bysetting the viewer restrictions. You canprevent the restriction with a password.Some discs do not supply a restriction.

To set the level of viewer restriction, pushthe “Parental Lock” switch on the “SetupMenu 1” screen. The “Enter PersonalCode” screen will appear.


231


Push the number for the password andthe “Enter” switch. The “Select RestrictionLevel” screen will appear.

If you enter a wrong number, push the“Clear” switch to delete the number.

You cannot change the setting without in-putting the password. When you forget orchange the password, push the “Clear”switch ten times to initialize the password.


Push a parental level (1—8). The smallerthe level number, the stricter the age limit.Push the “Back” switch to return to the“Setup Menu 1” screen.

SETTING THE DISPLAY MODE

Each time you push the “Display Mode”switch on the “Setup Menu 2” screen, thedisplay mode is changed from wide modeto auto mode.


232


LANGUAGE CODE LIST

Code Language

1001 Japanese

0514 English

0618 French

0405 German

0920 Italian

0519 Spanish

2608 Chinese

1412 Dutch

1620 Portuguese

1922 Swedish

1821 Russian

1115 Korean

0512 Greek

0101 Afar

0102 Abkhazian

0106 Afrikaans

0113 Amharic

0118 Arabic

0119 Assamese

0125 Aymara

0126 Azerbaijani

0201 Bashkir

0205 Byelorussian

0207 Bulgarian

0208 Bihari

0209 Bislama

0214 Bengali

0215 Tibetan

0218 Breton

0301 Catalan

0315 Corsican

0319 Czech

0325 Welsh

0401 Danish

0426 Bhutani

0515 Esperanto

0520 Estonian

0521 Basque

0601 Persian

0609 Finnish

0610 Fiji

0615 Faroese

0625 Frisian

0701 Irish

0704 Scots−Gaelic

0712 Galician

0714 Guarani

0721 Gujarati

0801 Hausa

0809 Hindi

0818 Croatian

0821 Hungarian

0825 Armenian

0901 Interlingua

0905 Interlingue

0911 Inupiak

0914 Indonesian

0919 Icelandic

0923 Hebrew

1009 Yiddish

1023 Javanese


233


1101 Georgian

1111 Kazakh

1112 Greenlandic

1113 Cambodian

1114 Kannada

1119 Kashmiri

1121 Kurdish

1125 Kirghiz

1201 Latin

1214 Lingala

1215 Laothian

1220 Lithuanian

1222 Latvian

1307 Malagasy

1309 Maori

1311 Macedonian

1312 Malayalam

1314 Mongolian

1315 Moldavian

1318 Marathi

1319 Malay

1320 Maltese

1325 Burmese

1401 Nauru

1405 Nepali

1415 Norwegian

1503 Occitan

1513 (Afan) Oromo

1518 Oriya

1601 Punjabi

1612 Polish

1619 Pashto, Pushto

1721 Quechua

1813 Rhaeto−Romance

1814 Kirundi

1815 Romanian

1823 Kinyarwanda

1901 Sanskrit

1904 Sindhi

1907 Sangho

1908 Serbo−Croatian

1909 Sinhalese

1911 Slovak

1912 Slovenian

1913 Samoan

1914 Shona

1915 Somali

1917 Albanian

1918 Serbian

1919 Siswati

1920 Sesotho

1921 Sundanese

1923 Swahili

2001 Tamil

2005 Telugu

2007 Tajik

2008 Thai

2009 Tigrinya

2011 Turkmen

2012 Tagalog

2014 Setswana

2015 Tonga

2018 Turkish


234


2019 Tsonga

2020 Tatar

2023 Twi

2111 Ukrainian

2118 Urdu

2126 Uzbek

2209 Vietnamese

2215 Volapük

2315 Wolof

2408 Xhosa

2515 Yoruba

2621 Zulu

SELECTING THE CHAPTER/TRACK

To select the chapter/track, push the “ ”or “ ” side of the (TUNE/TRACK) buttonon the controller until the number of thechapter/track you want to select appearson the screen.

DVD video

DVD audio


235


USING THE CONTROL SCREEN

When playing a disc, push the “DVD” but-ton on the controller. The control screenwill appear on the screen.

Details of the specific switches, controlsand features are described below.

1. “PICTURE” switch

Push the “PICTURE” switch to turn offthe control screen and return to thepicture previously displayed.

2. “RPT” switch (DVD audio only)

Push the “RPT” switch while the trackis playing. When the track ends, it willautomatically replay. To turn off the re-peat feature, push this switch again.

3. “RAND” switch (DVD audio only)

Push the “RAND” switch. The playerwill play the tracks on the disc in ran-dom order. To turn off the random fea-ture, push this switch again.

4. “SCAN” switch (DVD audio only)

Push the “SCAN” switch. The playerwill scan all the tracks on the disc youare listening to. To stop scanning, pushthis switch again. If the player hasscanned all the tracks on the disc, itwill stop scanning.

5. “ ” and “ ” switches

Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” switchto fast forward or reverse a disc. Whenyou release the switch, the DVD playerwill resume playing.

SELECTING THE DISC MENU NUMBER(video CD only)

Push the “Sel. Number” switch and thenthe disc menu number search screen willappear. You can also display the screenby pushing the “SEARCH” switch on thecontroller.

—DVD player operation (videoCD/audio CD/CD text)


236


Enter the disc menu number by using the“−”, “+” and “+10” switches and push the“Enter” switch. The player starts playingthe disc from the entered disc menu num-ber. The entered disc menu number willappear on the screen.

Push the “Back” switch to return to themenu screen.

Move up and down the switches by push-ing the “Move Buttons” on the screen.

OPERATING THE “ ”, “�”, “��” AND“��” SWITCHES

“ ” switch: Push this switch to pause thedisc.

“�” switch: Push this switch to cancel thepause and return to normal playing.

“��” and “��” switches: Push and holdthe “��” or “��” switch to fast forwardor reverse. When you release the switch,the DVD player will resume playing.

Video CD only—

Push the “��” switch/button while paus-ing, the video CD plays the slow−motionvideo replay.

TURNING ON THE DISC MENU (videoCD only)

Push the “Return” switch to turn on themenu screen for the disc. You can alsoturn on the menu screen by pushing the“RETURN” button on the controller.

For the operation of the menu screen, seethe manual for the video CD.


237


CHANGING MENU PAGE OR TRACK(video CD only)

Push the “Prev. Page” or “Next Page”switch while the disc menu is displayed.The next or previous page will appear onthe screen.

Push the “Prev. Page” or “Next Page”switch while the player is playing video.The next or previous track will besearched and played.

CHANGING A MULTIPLEXTRANSMISSION (video CD only)

Push the “Main/Sub” switch to change amultiplex transmission. The mode changesfrom Main/Sub to Main to Sub and backto Main/Sub by pushing the “Main/Sub”switch.

CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING (videoCD only)

Push the “Set Up” switch on the screenand then the initial setting screen will ap-pear. You can also display the screen bypushing the “SET UP” button on the con-troller. You can change the initial setting.(See “CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING”on page 227 in this Section for details.)

After the setting is done, the player playsfrom the beginning of the chapter or thetrack.


238


Video CD

Audio CD

CD Text

USING THE CONTROL SCREEN

When playing a disc, push the “DVD” but-ton on the controller. The control screenwill appear on the screen.

CD text only—

The disc title and track title will appear onthe screen when pushing the “DVD” but-ton.

Details of the specific switches, controlsand features are described below.

1. “PICTURE” switch (video CD only)

Push the “PICTURE” switch to turn offthe control screen and return to thepicture previously displayed.

2. “RPT” switch (audio CD and CD text)

Push the “RPT” switch while the trackis playing. When the track ends, it willautomatically replay. To turn off the re-peat feature, push this switch again.


239


3. “RAND” switch (audio CD and CD text)

Push the “RAND” switch. The playerwill play the tracks on the disc in ran-dom order. To turn off the random fea-ture, push this switch again.

4. “SCAN” switch (audio CD and CD text)

Push the “SCAN” switch. The playerwill scan all the tracks on the disc. Tostop scanning, push this switch again.When the player has scanned all thetracks on the disc, it will stop scan-ning.

5. “ ” and “ ” switches

Push the “ ” or “ ” switch to fastforward or reverse the disc. When youpush the switch again, the DVD playerwill resume playing.

You can adjust the color, contrast, toneand brightness of the screen.

Push the “DISPLAY” switch on the control-ler and then the “Display” screen will ap-pear.

The screen may turn purple to deflect thesunlight. This is not a malfunction.

Each time you push the “+” or “−” switch,you can adjust the color, contrast, toneand brightness of the screen.

+ or“GREEN”

− or “RED”

COLORStrengthens the greencolor

Strengthens the redcolor

CONTRASTStrengthens thecontrast

Weakensthecontrast

TONE Strengthens the tone

Weakensthe tone

BRIGHT-NESS

Brightens Darkens

—Screen adjustment


240


After adjusting the screen, push the “OK”switch to return to the previous screen.

The audio machine connected to the inputterminal adapter can be played in thevideo mode.

To select the video mode, push the“VIDEO” button on the controller. You canalso select the video mode on the modeselection screen mentioned above.

—Selecting the video mode


241


DVD PLAYER AND DVD VIDEO DISCS

This DVD player conforms to NTSC col-or TV formats. DVD video discs con-forming to other formats such as PALor SECAM cannot be used.

Region codes: Some DVD video discshave a region code indicating where youcan use. If the DVD video disc is notlabeled “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it inthis DVD player. If you attempt to play aninappropriate DVD video disc in this play-er, “REGION CODE ERROR” appears onthe screen. Even if the DVD video discdoes not have a region code, in somecases you cannot use it.

Marks shown on DVD video discs:

Indicates NTSC formatof color TV.

Indicates the numberof audio tracks.

Indicates the numberof language subtitles.

Indicates the numberof angles.

Indicates the screento be selected. Wide screen: 16:9Standard: 4:3

Indicates regions inwhich this video disccan be played.ALL: all countriesNumber: region code

DVD VIDEO DISC GLOSSARY

DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Discthat holds video. DVD video discs haveadopted “MPEG2”, one of the world stan-dards of digital compression technologies.The picture data is compressed by 1/40on average and stored. Variable rate en-coded technology in which the volume ofdata assigned to the picture is changeddepending on the picture format has alsobeen adopted. Audio data is stored usingPCM and Dolby digital, which enableshigher quality of sound. Furthermore, mul-ti−angle and multi−language features willalso help you enjoy the more advancedtechnology of DVD video.

Viewer restrictions: This feature limitswhat can be viewed in conformity with thelevel of restrictions of the country. Thelevel of restrictions varies depending onthe DVD video disc. Some DVD videodiscs cannot be played at all, or violentscenes are skipped or replaced with otherscenes.

Level 1: DVD video discs for children canbe played.

Level 2—7: DVD video discs for childrenand G−rated movies can be played.

—DVD video disc information


242


Level 8: All types of DVD video discs canbe played.

Multi−angle feature: You can enjoy thesame scene at different angles.

Multi−language feature: You can selectthe language of the subtitles and audio.

Region codes: Region codes are providedon DVD players and DVD discs. If theDVD video disc does not have the sameregion code as the DVD player, you can-not play the disc on the DVD player. Forregion codes, see page 241.

Audio: This DVD player can play linerPCM, Dolby digital, dts and MPEG audioformat DVD. Other decoded type cannotbe played.

Title and chapter: Video and audio pro-grams stored on DVD video discs are di-vided in parts by title and chapter.

Title: The largest unit of the video andaudio programs stored on DVD videodiscs. Usually, one piece of a movie, onealbum, or one audio program is assignedas a title.

Chapter: A unit smaller than a title. A titlecomprises plural chapters.

Manufactured under license from DolbyLaboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, andthe double−D symbol are trademarks ofDolby Laboratories. Confidential unpub-lished works.�1992−1997 Dolby Laboratories. Allrights reserved.

This product incorporates copyrightprotection technology that is protectedby method claims of certain U.S. pat-ents and other intellectual propertyrights owned by Macrovision Corpora-tion and other rights owners. Use ofthis copyright protection technologymust be authorized by Macrovision Cor-poration, and is intended for home andother limited viewing uses only unlessotherwise authorized by MacrovisionCorporation. Reverse engineering ordisassembly is prohibited.

“dts” is a trademark of Digital TheaterSystems, Inc.

The rear entertainment system plays vid-eos and sound when an audio−videoequipment is connected to the A/V inputadapter. For details, refer to the manufac-turer’s instructions.

—A/V input adapter


243


To use the adapter, open the cover.

The A/V input adapter is composed of 3input adapters.

“VIDEO”: Image input adapter“MONO/L”: Audio input adapter (mono/left)“AUDIO−R”: Audio input adapter (right)

NOTICE

Close the cover when the A/V inputadapter is not in use. Inserting any-thing other than an appropriate plugmay cause electrical failure or shortcircuit.

You can enjoy the rear seat entertain-ment system with commercial head-phones.

To use the headphones, connect them tothe jack.

The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”position.

To adjust the volume of the headphones,turn the dial.

Left side dial: Turn it upward to increasethe volume, turn it downward to decreasethe volume.

Right side dial: Turn it downward to in-crease the volume, turn it upward to de-crease the volume.

The maximum volume depends on thetype of headphones.

The recommended headphone impedanceis from 16 Ω to 32 Ω.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details.

—Headphone jacks


244


CAUTION

Adjust the volume when you connectthe headphones to the jack. Loudsounds may have a significant impacton the human body.

NOTICE

To ensure correct audio/video systemoperation:

� Be careful not to spill beveragesover the system.

� Do not put anything other than acassette tape or Compact Disc intothe slot.

� Do not put anything other than aDVD video, DVD audio, video CD,dts−CD and audio CD into the DVDplayer.

� The use of a cellular phone insideor near the vehicle may cause anoise from the speakers of the sys-tem which you are listening to.However, this does not indicate amalfunction.

RADIO RECEPTION

Usually, a problem with radio receptiondoes not mean there is a problem withyour radio—it is just the normal result ofconditions outside the vehicle.

For example, nearby buildings and terraincan interfere with FM reception. Powerlines or telephone wires can interfere withAM signals. And of course, radio signalshave a limited range. The farther you arefrom a station, the weaker its signal willbe. In addition, reception conditionschange constantly as your vehicle moves.

Here are some common reception prob-lems that probably do not indicate a prob-lem with your radio:

FM

Fading and drifting stations—Generally, theeffective range of FM is about 40 km (25miles). Once outside this range, you maynotice fading and drifting, which increasewith the distance from the radio transmit-ter. They are often accompanied by distor-tion.

Multi−path—FM signals are reflective,making it possible for two signals to reachyour antenna at the same time. If thishappens, the signals will cancel each oth-er out, causing a momentary flutter orloss of reception.

Audio/video system operatinghints


245


Static and fluttering—These occur whensignals are blocked by buildings, trees, orother large objects. Increasing the basslevel may reduce static and fluttering.

Station swapping—If the FM signal youare listening to is interrupted or weak-ened, and there is another strong stationnearby on the FM band, your radio maytune in the second station until the origi-nal signal can be picked up again.

AM

Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected bythe upper atmosphere—especially at night.These reflected signals can interfere withthose received directly from the radio sta-tion, causing the radio station to soundalternately strong and weak.

Station interference—When a reflected sig-nal and a signal received directly from aradio station are very nearly the samefrequency, they can interfere with eachother, making it difficult to hear the broad-cast.

Static—AM is easily affected by externalsources of electrical noise, such as hightension power lines, lightening, or electri-cal motors. This results in static.

CARING FOR YOUR CASSETTE PLAYERAND TAPES

For the best performance for your cas-sette player and tapes:

Clean the tape head and other parts regu-larly.

� A dirty tape head or tape path candecrease sound quality and tangle yourcassette tapes. The easiest way toclean them is by using a cleaning tape.(A wet type is recommended.)

Use high−quality cassettes.

� Low−quality cassette tapes can causemany problems, including poor sound,inconsistent playing speed, andconstant auto−reversing. They can alsoget stuck or tangled in the cassetteplayer.

� Do not use a cassette if it has beendamaged or tangled or if its label ispeeling off.

� Do not leave a cassette in the playerif you are not listening to it, especiallyif it is hot outside.

� Store cassettes in their cases and outof direct sunlight.

� Avoid using cassettes with a total play-ing time longer than 100 minutes (50minutes per side). The tape used inthese cassettes is thin and could getstuck or tangled in the cassette player.

CARING FOR YOUR COMPACT DISCPLAYER, DVD PLAYER AND DISCS

� Extremely high temperatures can keepyour compact disc player and DVDplayer from working. On hot days, usethe air conditioning to cool the vehicleinterior before you use the players.

� Bumpy roads or other vibrations maymake your compact disc player andDVD player skip.

� If moisture gets into your compact discplayer and DVD player, the playersmay not play even though they appearto be working. Remove the disc fromthe player and wait until it dries.


246


CAUTION

Compact disc players and DVD play-ers use an invisible laser beam whichcould cause hazardous radiation ex-posure if directed outside the unit. Besure to operate the players correctly.

Compact disc player

� Use only compact discs marked asshown above. The following productsmay not be playable on your compactdisc player.

SACDdts−CDCopy−protected CDCD−R (CD−Recordable)CD−RW (CD−Re−writable)CD−ROM

Audio CDs

DVD videodiscs

DVD audiodiscs

Video CDs


247


DVD player

� Use only discs marked as shownabove. The following products may notbe playable on your DVD player.

SACDCopy−protected CDCD−R (CD−Recordable)CD−RW (CD−Re−writable)CD−ROMDVD−RDVD+RDVD+RWDVD−RWDVD−ROMDVD−RAM

Special shaped discs

Transparent/translucent discs

Low quality discs

Labeled discs


248


NOTICE

Do not use special shaped, transpar-ent/translucent, low quality or labeleddiscs such as those shown in the il-lustrations. The use of such discsmay damage the player or changer, orit may be impossible to eject thedisc.

Correct Wrong

� Handle compact discs carefully, espe-cially when you are inserting them.Hold them on the edge and do notbend them. Avoid getting fingerprintson them, particularly on the shiny side.

� Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, orother disc damage could cause theplayer to skip or to repeat a section ofa track. (To see a pin hole, hold thedisc up to the light.)

� Remove discs from the compact discplayer when you are not listening tothem. Store them in their plastic casesaway from moisture, heat, and directsunlight.

To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with asoft, lint−free cloth that has been damp-ened with water. Wipe in a straight linefrom the center to the edge of the disc(not in circles). Dry it with another soft,lint−free cloth. Do not use a conventionalrecord cleaner or anti−static device.


249


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSAir conditioning systemFront manual air conditioning system

Controls 250. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air flow selector settings 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating tips 253. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front automatic air conditioning systemControls 256. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air flow selector settings 260. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating tips 260. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Side vents 263. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear heater system 264. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air conditioning filter 265. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

For information about the front air conditioning system of a vehicleequipped with Navigation system, please refer to the separate“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

SECTION 1− 9


250


1. Air intake selector

2. “A/C” button

3. Air flow selector

4. Temperature selector

5. Fan speed selector

Front manual air conditioning system——Controls


251


Fan speed selector

Turn the knob to adjust the fan speed—tothe right to increase, to the left to de-crease.

Temperature selector

Turn the knob to adjust the temperature—to the right to warm, to the left to cool.

Turning the knob fully counterclockwisesets the air intake selector to theRECIRCULATE mode automatically forquick cooling. To set to the FRESH mode,press the air intake selector button.

Air flow selector

Turn the knob to select the vents used forair flow.

1. Panel—Air flows from the instrumentpanel vents.

2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floorvents and the instrument panel vents.

3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floorvents.

4. Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainlyfrom the floor vents and windshieldvents.

Turning the air flow selector to thefloor/windshield position turns on thedefogging function with the purpose ofclearing the front view.

This position allows the air intake toselect FRESH automatically. This is toclean up the front view more quickly.

If you want to return the setting toRECIRCULATE mode, press the air in-take selector button once again.

5. Windshield—Air flows mainly from thewindshield vents.

Turning the air flow selector to thewindshield position turns on the defog-ging function with the purpose of clear-ing the front view.

This position allows the air intake toselect FRESH automatically. This is toclean up the front view more quickly.

It is not possible to select theRECIRCULATE mode in the windshieldmode if you press the air intake controlbutton.

For details about air flow selector settings,see “—Air flow selector settings” de-scribed blow.


252


Air intake selector

Press the button to select the air source.

1. Recirculate—Recirculates the air insidethe vehicle.

2. Fresh—Draws outside air into the sys-tem.

When the engine coolant temperature orelectric compressor inverter temperature isextremely high, the RECIRCULATE modewill automatically be selected. In thiscase, it is not possible to select theFRESH mode if you press the air intakecontrol button. It is not a malfunction.When the temperature becomes low, theair intake mode returns to the mode pre-viously used.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield,the air intake mode may change automati-cally to FRESH depending on the condi-tion of the air conditioning system.

“A/C” button

To turn on the air conditioning, press the“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicatorwill come on. To turn the air conditioningoff, press the button again.

If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, thereis a problem in the air conditioning systemand the air conditioning automaticallyshuts off. If this happens, take your ve-hicle to a Toyota dealer for service.


253


� To cool off your Toyota after it hasbeen parked in the hot sun, drive withthe windows open for a few minutes.This vents the hot air, allowing the airconditioning to cool the interior morequickly.

� Make sure the air intake grilles in frontof the windshield are not blocked (byleaves or snow, for example).

� On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield. The windshield couldfog up because of the difference in airtemperature on the inside and outsideof the windshield.

� Keep the area under the front seatsclear to allow air to circulate through-out the vehicle.

� On cold days, set the fan speed tohigh for a minute to help clear theintake ducts of snow or moisture. Thiscan reduce the amount of fogging onthe windows.

� When driving on dusty roads, close allwindows. If dust thrown up by the ve-hicle is still drawn into the vehicle afterclosing the windows, it is recommendedthat the air intake selector be set toFRESH and the fan speed selector toany setting except “OFF”.

—Air flow selector settings —Operating tips


254


� If following another vehicle on a dustyroad, or driving in windy and dustyconditions, it is recommended that theair intake selector be temporarily set toRECIRCULATE, which will close off theoutside passage and prevent outsideair and dust from entering the vehicleinterior.

Heating

For best results, set controls to:

Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”Temperature—Towards WARM

(red zone) Air intake—FRESH (outside air) Air flow—FLOOR Air conditioning—OFF

� For quick heating, select recirculatedair for a few minutes. To keep thewindows from fogging, select fresh af-ter the vehicle interior has beenwarmed.

� Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-fied heating.

� Choose floor/windshield air flow to heatthe vehicle interior while defrosting ordefogging the windshield.

Air conditioning


Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”Temperature—Towards COLD

(blue zone) Air intake—FRESH (outside air) Air flow—PANEL Air conditioning—ON

� For quick cooling, select recirculatedair for a few minutes.

Ventilation


Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”Temperature—Towards COLD

(blue zone)Air intake—FRESH (outside air) Air flow—PANEL Air conditioning—OFF


255


Defogging

The inside of the windshield



(red zone) to heat; COLD (blue zone) tocool

Air intake—FRESH (outside air) Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Turning the air flow selector to the wind-shield or floor/windshield position turns onthe defogging function with the purpose ofclearing the front view.

When turning the air flow selector to wind-shield or floor/windshield position, the airintake selects FRESH automatically. Thisis to clean up the front view more quickly.

When the windshield position is selected,it is not possible to select theRECIRCULATE mode if you press the airintake control button.

� On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield—the difference be-tween the outside and inside tempera-tures could make the fogging worse.

Defrosting

The outside of the windshield



(red zone) Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Turning the air flow selector to the wind-shield or floor/windshield position turns onthe defrosting function with the purpose ofclearing the front view.

When turning the air flow selector to wind-shield or floor/windshield position, the airintake selects FRESH automatically. Thisis to clean up the front view more quickly.

When the windshield position is selected,it is not possible to select theRECIRCULATE mode if you press the airintake control button.

� To heat the vehicle interior while de-frosting the windshield, choosefloor/windshield air flow.


256


1. Air intake selector

2. “MODE” button (air flow selector)


4. “A/C” button

5. “OFF” button

6. Windshield air flow button

7. “AUTO” button

8. Temperature selector

Front automatic air conditioning system——Controls


257


“AUTO” button

For automatic operation of the air condi-tioning, press the “AUTO” button. An indi-cator light will illuminate to show that theautomatic operation mode has been se-lected.

In the automatic operation mode, the airconditioning selects the most suitable fanspeed, air flow, air intake and on−off ofthe air conditioning according to the tem-perature.

When you turn the temperature selectorknob to maximum cooling, “LO” will ap-pear on the display and the air intakemode will be automatically changed to RE-CIRCULATE.

You may use manual controls if you wantto select your own settings.

Fan speed selector


In automatic operation, you do not haveto adjust the fan speed unless you desireanother fan speed mode.

Temperature selector

Turn the knob to adjust the temperature—to the right to warm, to the left to cool.

“OFF” button

Push the button to turn off the air condi-tioning system.

“MODE” button (air flow selector)

Push the “MODE” button to select thevents used for air flow.

In automatic operation, you do not haveto select the air flow unless you desireanother air flow mode.

1. Panel—Air flows from the instrumentpanel vents.

2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floorvents and the instrument panel vents.

3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floorvents.

4. Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainlyfrom the floor vents and windshieldvents.


258


Windshield air flow button

When this button is pressed, air flowsmainly from the windshield vents and theFRESH mode is automatically set. Thissetting clears the front view more quickly.

It is not possible to select theRECIRCULATE mode if you press the airintake control button.

Pressing the button once again returns theair flow mode to the last one used.

Pressing the windshield air flow buttonturns on the defroster−linked air condition-ing. This is to clean up the front viewmore quickly.

When the “A/C” button is not pressed in,pressing another air flow button turns offthe air conditioning.

For details about air flow selector settings,see “—Air flow selector settings” de-scribed below.

Air intake selector

Press the button to select the air source.

1. Recirculate—Recirculates the air insidethe vehicle.

2. Fresh—Draws outside air into the sys-tem.


259


When the engine coolant temperature orelectric compressor inverter temperature isextremely high, the RECIRCULATE modewill automatically be selected. In thiscase, it is not possible to select theFRESH mode if you press the air intakecontrol button. It is not a malfunction.When the temperature becomes low, theair intake mode returns to the mode pre-viously used.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield,the air intake mode may change automati-cally to FRESH depending on the condi-tion of the air conditioning system.

“A/C” button

To turn on the air conditioning, press the“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicatorwill come on. To turn the air conditioningoff, press the button again.

If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, thereis a problem in the air conditioning systemand the air conditioning automaticallyshuts off. If this happens, take your ve-hicle to a Toyota dealer for service.


260


� To cool off your Toyota after it hasbeen parked in the hot sun, drive withthe windows open for a few minutes.This vents the hot air, allowing the airconditioning to cool the interior morequickly.

� Make sure the air intake grilles in frontof the windshield are not blocked (byleaves or snow, for example).

� On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield. The windshield couldfog up because of the difference in airtemperature on the inside and outsideof the windshield.

� Keep the area under the front seatsclear to allow air to circulate through-out the vehicle.

� On cold days, set the fan speed tohigh for a minute to help clear theintake ducts of snow or moisture. Thiscan reduce the amount of fogging onthe windows.

� When driving on dusty roads, close allwindows. If dust thrown up by the ve-hicle is still drawn into the vehicle afterclosing the windows, it is recommendedthat the air intake selector be set toFRESH and the fan speed selector toany setting except “OFF”.

—Air flow selector settings —Operating tips


261


� If following another vehicle on a dustyroad, or driving in windy and dustyconditions, it is recommended that theair intake selector be temporarily set toRECIRCULATE, which will close off theoutside passage and prevent outsideair and dust from entering the vehicleinterior.

Heating


For automatic operation—

Press in the “AUTO” button.Temperature—To the desired

temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air conditioning—OFF

For manual operation—

Fan speed—To the desired fan speedTemperature—Towards WARM

(to the right)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—FLOORAir conditioning—OFF

� For quick heating, select recirculatedair for a few minutes. To keep thewindows from fogging, select fresh af-ter the vehicle interior has beenwarmed.

� Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-fied heating.

� Choose floor/windshield air flow to heatthe vehicle interior while defrosting ordefogging the windshield.

Air conditioning



Press in the “AUTO” button.Temperature—To the desired

temperatureAir intake—FRESH (outside air)Air conditioning—ON


Fan speed—To the desired fan speedTemperature—Towards COLD

(to the left)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—PANELAir conditioning—ON

� For quick cooling, turn the temperatureselector knob fully towards COLD andchange the air intake selector mode toRECIRCULATE.


262


Ventilation



Press in the “AUTO” button.Temperature—Towards COLD

(to the left)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air conditioning—OFF


Fan speed—To the desired fan speedTemperature—Towards COLD

(to the left)Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—PANELAir conditioning—OFF

Defogging and defrosting—

—The inside of the windshield



Temperature—Towards WARM(to the right) to heat;COLD (to the left) tocool

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELD



(to the right) to heat;COLD (to the left) tocool


When pressing the windshield air flow but-ton, the air intake selects FRESH auto-matically. This is to clean up the frontview more quickly.


Pressing the windshield button turns onthe defroster−linked air conditioning. Thisis to clean up the front view more quickly.


� On humid days, do not blow cold airon the windshield—the difference be-tween the outside and inside tempera-tures could make the fogging worse.

—The outside of the windshield



Temperature—Towards WARM(to the right)




(to the right) Air intake—FRESH (outside air)Air flow—WINDSHIELD

When pressing the windshield air flow but-ton, the air intake selects FRESH auto-matically. This is to clean up the frontview more quickly.


263



Pressing the windshield button turns onthe defroster−linked air conditioning. Thisis to clean up the front view more quickly.


� To heat the vehicle interior while de-frosting the windshield, choosefloor/windshield air flow.

If air flow control is not satisfactory, checkthe side vents. The side vents may beopened or closed as shown.

Side vents


264


1. Main switch

Push the switch to turn the rear heatersystem on or off.

Turning the fan speed selector to the “LO”or “HI” position with the rear heater sys-tem on illuminates the main switch indica-tor.



When the rear heater system is off, thefan speed selector will not operate.

3. Rear heater vents

Air flows from the vents when the rearheater system is operating.

CAUTION

Do not place feet near the vents forlong periods as burns may result.

Rear heater system


265


The air conditioning filter informationlabel is placed in the glove box asshown and indicates that a filter hasbeen installed.

The air conditioning filter prevents dustfrom entering the vehicle through the airconditioning vent.

The air conditioning filter is behind theglove box.

The air conditioning filter may clog af-ter long use. The filter may need to bereplaced if the air flow of the air condi-tioning and heater experiences extremereductions in operating efficiency, or ifthe windows begin to fog up easily.

To maintain the air conditioning efficiency,inspect and replace the air conditioningfilter according to the maintenance sched-ule. In dusty areas or areas with heavytraffic flow, such as inner city or desertareas, early replacement may be required.(For scheduled maintenance information,please refer to the “Scheduled Mainte-nance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment”.)

Air conditioning filter——Checking and replacing theair conditioning filter


266


1. Remove the clip with a Phillips−headscrewdriver.

2. Open the glove box and push eachside of the glove box to disconnectthe claws.

3. Pull the filter cover toward you andremove it.

4. Remove the filter case toward you.


267


5. Remove the filter from the filtercase.

6. Inspect the filter on the surface.

If it is dirty, it should be replaced.

When installing the filter and filtercase, keep the arrow pointing up.

INFORMATION

The air filter should be installed prop-erly in position. The use of air condi-tioning with the air filter removedmay cause deteriorated dustproof per-formance and then affect air condi-tioning performance.


268



269


OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS ANDCONTROLSOther equipmentTrip information 270. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clock 274. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compass 274. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ashtrays 279. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power outlets 280. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power outlet 281. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glove box 282. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Garage door opener 283. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary boxes 286. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Container 288. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cup holders 289. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bottle holders 291. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tie−down hooks 291. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Luggage cover 292. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Roof luggage carrier 294. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor mat 296. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

For information about the clock of a vehicle equipped with Naviga-tion system, please refer to the separate “Navigation System Own-er’s Manual”.

SECTION 1− 10


270


The trip information indicates the fol-lowing information.

1. Outside temperature

2. Average fuel consumption

3. Current fuel consumption

4. Driving time

5. Air conditioning system on—The airconditioned temperature is displayed.

Air conditioning system off—The airconditioned temperature is not dis-played.

Every time you push the “INFO” button,the display toggles through this informa-tion.

The displayed values in the trip informa-tion indicate general driving conditions.Accuracy varies with driving habits androad conditions.

You can adjust the air conditioned temper-ature while the trip information is operat-ing. When 5 seconds has been passedafter adjusting the temperature or whenpushing the “INFO” button, the display willbe back to the trip information.

Trip information (type A)


271


1. Outside temperature(“OUTSIDE TEMP”)

The outside temperature display indi-cates the outside air temperature.

The displayed temperature ranges from−30�C (−22�F) up to 50�C (122�F). If thetemperature does not appear or it shows“−−”, take your vehicle to your Toyotadealer.

2. Average fuel consumption (“AVG”)

Average fuel consumption is calculatedand displayed based on total drivingdistance and total fuel consumptionwith the hybrid system turned on.

The calculation is reset by pushing andholding the “INFO” button for about 1 sec-ond when the average fuel consumption isdisplayed.

At this time, the average fuel consumptionon the multi−information display is alsoreset. See “Multi−information display” onpage 152.


The current fuel consumption is calcu-lated and displayed based on distanceand fuel consumption for 2 secondswith the hybrid system turned on.

4. Driving time (“E/T”)

The elapsed time is displayed.

When the hybrid system is turned on,driving time is counted from 0:00. Up to11:59 (11 hours, 59 minutes) can be dis-played. When the driving time exceeds11:59, the counter returns to 0:00.

The calculation is reset when the ignitionswitch is turned off.

1. Push the “INFO” button to displaythe “Information Menu” screen.

Trip information (type B)


272


2. Touch the “Trip Info” switch on thescreen.

Trip information appears on the screen.

When the instrument panel lights areturned on, the brightness of the screenwill be reduced.

You can adjust the brightness of thescreen. To adjust the brightness, see the“Navigation System Owner’s Manual” forthe procedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the screen while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to operatethe screen only when the vehicle isstopped.

Consumption screen

1. Regenerated energy in the past 30minutes

2. Fuel consumption in the past 30 min-utes

3. Average fuel consumption

4. Outside temperature


6. Trip distance

The information listed above is dis-played when you touch the “Consump-tion” switch on the “Energy monitor”screen.


273


The displayed values on the screen indi-cate general driving conditions. Accuracyvaries with driving habits and road condi-tions.

When the ignition switch is on, the lastpreviously used mode displayed just be-fore the ignition switch is off will appear.

If the electrical power source is discon-nected from the navigation system screen,the screen will automatically be set to theinitial mode.

1. Regenerated energy in the past 30minutes

The regenerated energy in the past 30minutes is indicated with symbols.

One symbol indicates 50 Wh. Up to 4symbols will be shown. The energy of 50Wh illuminates a 50 W bulb for an hour.

2. Fuel consumption in the past 30minutes

Fuel consumption in the past 30 min-utes is displayed.

3. Average fuel consumption (“AVERAGE”)

Average fuel consumption is calculatedand displayed based on total drivingdistance and total fuel consumption.

The calculation is reset by touching the“Reset” switch. The trip distance is alsoreset.

At this time, the average fuel consumptionon the multi−information display is alsoreset. See “Multi−information display” onpage 152.

4. Outside temperature(“OUTSIDE TEMP”)

Outside temperature is displayed.

The displayed temperature ranges from−30�C (−22�F) up to 50�C (122�F). If thetemperature does not appear or it shows“−−”, take your vehicle to your Toyotadealer.

The outside temperature is also displayedon the “Energy Monitor” screen.

5. Current fuel consumption (“Current”)

The current fuel consumption is calcu-lated and displayed based on distanceand fuel consumption.

6. Trip distance

The trip distance is displayed.

The calculation is reset by touching the“Reset” switch. The average fuel con-sumption is also reset.

Up to 6499 km or 6499 miles can bedisplayed. When the trip distance exceeds6499 km or 6499 miles, the distance re-turns to 0 km or 0 mile.


274


Energy Monitor screen

Touching the “Energy” switch turns onthe “Energy Monitor” that displays thehybrid system operating condition.

The arrow on the screen indicates themovement of the energy. See “Energymonitor” on page 2 for the representativescreen.

The segment of the battery on the screenindicates the status of the hybrid battery.See “—Hybrid battery status” on page 4for details.

To reset the hour: Push the “H” button.To reset the minutes: Push the “M” button.

The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”position.

If the electrical power source has beendisconnected from the clock, the time dis-play will automatically be set to 1:00 (oneo’clock).

The direction is indicated on the insiderear view mirror.

If the ignition switch was turned off withthe system on, the system will automati-cally turn back on when the ignition switchis turned on.

Push the “ ” switch to turn the compass

system on and off.

Clock Compass


275


The compass indicates the directionthat the vehicle is heading. In theabove case, it shows that the vehicle isheading north.

Displays Directions

NNEE

SES

SWW

NW

NorthNortheast

EastSoutheast

SouthSouthwest

WestNorthwest

The compass may not show the correctdirection in the following conditions:

� The vehicle is stopped immediately af-ter turning.

� The compass does not adjust while thevehicle is stopped.

� The ignition switch is turned off imme-diately after turning.

� The vehicle is on an inclined surface.

� The vehicle is in a place where theearth’s magnetic field is subject to in-terference by artificial magnetic fields(underground parking, under a steeltower, between buildings, roof parking,near a crossing, near a large vehicle,etc.).

� The vehicle is magnetized. (There is amagnet or a metal object on or nearthe inside rear view mirror.)

� The 12 volt battery has been discon-nected.

If your vehicle is out of the set zone,refer to “CALIBRATING THE COMPASS”below to set the zone number.

If the deviation is small, the compassworks to calibrate the direction automati-cally while the vehicle is in motion.

For additional precision or for completecalibrating, see “CALIBRATING THECOMPASS” below.

The compass sensor is on the insiderear view mirror.

NOTICE

Do not put magnets or a metal objecton or near the inside rear view mirrorof the vehicle. Doing this may causemalfunction of the compass sensor.


276


CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviationcalibration)

The direction display on the compassdeviates from the true direction deter-mined by the earth’s magnetic field. Theangle of deviation varies according to thegeographic position of the vehicle.

To adjust this deviation, stop the vehicle,

then push and hold the “ ” switch until

the zone number appears on the display.

Then push the “ ” switch, referring to

the following map to select the number ofthe zone where the vehicle is.


277


Zone number

After calibration, leaving the system forseveral seconds returns it to the compassmode.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the display while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe display only when the vehicle isstopped.

Samoa: 5 Guam: 8 Saipan: 8


278


CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circlingcalibration)

Sometimes the direction display on thecompass may not change after a turn. Torectify this, stop the vehicle and push and

hold the “ ” switch until “C” appears on

the display.

If “C” appears on the display because ofa drastic change in the magnetic field,perform circling calibration.

Drive the vehicle in a circle at 8 km/h (5mph) or less. If there is not enough spaceto drive in a circle, drive around theblock.

After driving 1 to 3 circles in the abovemethod, calibration is completed when thedirection is shown on the display.

If calibration cannot be performed becauseof the magnetized vehicle etc., take yourvehicle to Toyota dealer.

Perform circling calibration just afteryou have purchased your Toyota. Andthen always perform circling calibrationafter the 12 volt battery has been re-moved, replaced or disconnected.

� Do not perform circling calibration ofthe compass in a place where theearth’s magnetic field is subject to in-terference by artificial magnetic fields(underground parking, under a steeltower, between buildings, roof parking,near a crossing, near a large vehicle,etc.).

� During calibration, do not operate elec-tric systems (moonroof, power win-dows, etc.) as they may interfere withthe calibration.


279


CAUTION

� When doing the circling calibration,be sure to secure a wide space,and watch out for people and ve-hicles in the neighborhood. Do notviolate any local traffic rules whileperforming circling calibration.

� Do not adjust the display while thevehicle is moving. Be sure to adjustthe display only when the vehicle isstopped.

Front

Rear

Front ashtray: To use the ashtray, openthe lid.

When finished with your cigarette, thor-oughly extinguish it in the ashtray to pre-vent other cigarette butts from catchingfire. After using the ashtray, close the lidcompletely.

To remove the ashtray, pull the lid andpull it out.

Rear ashtray: To use the ashtray, pullit out.

When finished with your cigarette, thor-oughly extinguish it in the ashtray to pre-vent other cigarette butts from catchingfire. After using the ashtray, close the lidcompletely.

To remove the ashtray, press down on thelock spring plate and pull out.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or sudden stopwhile driving, always completely closethe ashtray after use.

Ashtrays


280


Type A (center cluster)

Type B (container)

Type C (luggage compartment)

The power outlets (12 VDC) are de-signed for power supply for car acces-sories.

The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON”position for the power outlets to be used.

NOTICE

� To prevent the fuse from beingblown, do not use the electricityover the total vehicle capacity of12VDC/120W (front and rear outletstogether).

� To prevent the 12 volt battery frombeing discharged, do not use thepower outlets longer than necessarywhen the hybrid system is off.

� Close the power outlet lids whenthe power outlets are not in use.Inserting a foreign object other thanthe appropriate plug that fits theoutlet, or allowing any liquid intothe outlet may cause electrical fail-ure or short circuits.

Power outlets (12 VDC)


281


This power outlet (115 VAC) is designedfor use as a power supply for electricappliances in the vehicle.

The key must be in the “ON” position forthe power outlet to be used.

The maximum capacity for this power out-let is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt touse an appliance that requires more than115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuitwill activate and cut the power supply.The power supply will restart automaticallywhen you use an appliance that operateswithin the 115 VAC/100W limits.

To use the power outlet, push the mainswitch on the instrument panel.

An indicator light will illuminate to indicatethat the power outlet is ready for use.

Push the main switch once again to turnthe power outlet off. When the power out-let is not in use, make sure that the mainswitch is turned off.

NOTICE

� To prevent the 12 volt battery frombeing discharged, do not use thepower outlet longer than necessarywhen the hybrid system is off.

� Close the power outlet lid when thepower outlet is not in use. Insertinganything other than an appropriateplug that fits the outlet may causeelectrical failure or short circuits.

The power outlet is not designed forthe following electric appliances eventhough their power consumption is un-der 115 VAC/100W. These appliancesmay not operate properly.

Power outlet (115 VAC)


282


� Appliances with high initial peak watt-age: cathode−ray tube type televisions,compressor−driven refrigerators, electricpumps, electric tools, etc.

� Measuring devices which process pre-cise data: medical equipment, measur-ing instruments, etc.

� Other appliances requiring an extremelystable power supply: microcomputer−controlled electric blankets, touch sen-sor lamps, etc.

Certain electrical appliances may causeradio noise.

To use the glove box:

Open by pulling the lever.

Lock by inserting the master key and turn-ing it clockwise.

Unlock by inserting the master key andturning it counterclockwise.

With the instrument panel lights on, theglove box light will come on when theglobe box is open.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or a sudden stop,always keep the glove box doorclosed while driving.

Glove box


283


Indicator light

Buttons

The garage door opener ( �

Universal Transceiver) is manufacturedunder license from HomeLink� and canbe programmed to operate garagedoors, gates, entry doors, door locks,home lighting systems, and securitysystems, etc.

(a) Programming the HomeLink�

The HomeLink� in your vehicle has 3buttons and you can store one programfor each button.

To ensure correct programming into theHomeLink�, install a new battery in thehand−held transmitter prior to program-ming.

The battery side of the hand−held trans-mitter must be pointed away from theHomeLink� during the programming pro-cess.

For Canadian users, follow the procedurein “Programming an entrance gate/pro-gramming all devices in the Canadianmarket”.

1. Decide which of 3 HomeLink� buttonsyou want to program.

HomeLink�

Hand−heldgaragetransmitter

25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)

2. Place your hand−held garage transmit-ter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away fromthe surface of the HomeLink�.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink�

in view while programming.

Garage door opener


284


3. Simultaneously press and hold thehand−held garage transmitter buttonalong with the selected HomeLink� but-ton.

Do not release the buttons until step 4has been completed.

4. When the indicator light on theHomeLink� changes from a slow to arapid flash after 20 seconds, you canrelease both buttons.

5. Test the operation of the HomeLink� bypressing the newly programmed button.If programming a garage door opener,check to see if the garage door opensand closes.

If the garage door does not operate, iden-tify if your garage transmitter is of the“Rolling Code” type. Press and hold theprogrammed HomeLink� button. The ga-rage door has the rolling code feature ifthe indicator light (on the HomeLink�)flashes rapidly and then remains lit after2 seconds. If your garage transmitter isthe “Rolling Code” type, proceed to theheading “Programming a rolling code sys-tem”.

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each re-maining HomeLink� button to programanother device.

Programming a rolling code system

If your device is “Rolling Code”equipped, it is necessary to followsteps 1 through 4 under the heading“Programming the HomeLink�” beforeproceeding with the steps listed below.

1. Locate the “training” button on the ceil-ing mounted garage door opener motor.The exact location and color of thebutton may vary by brand of garagedoor opener. Refer to the owner’sguide supplied by the garage dooropener manufacturer for the location ofthis “training” button.

2. Press the “training” button on the ceil-ing mounted garage door opener motor.

Following this step, you have 30 secondsin which to initiate step 3 below.

3. Press and release the vehicle’s pro-grammed HomeLink� button twice. Thegarage door may open. If the doordoes open, the programming process iscomplete. If the door does not open,press and release the button a thirdtime. This third press and release willcomplete the programming process byopening the garage door.


285


The ceiling mounted garage door openermotor should now recognize theHomeLink� unit and be able activate thegarage door up/down.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each re-maining HomeLink� button to programanother rolling code system.

Programming an entrance gate/program-ming all devices in the Canadian market

1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink� but-tons you want to program.

2. Place your hand−held gate/devicetransmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)away from the surface of theHomeLink�.

Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink�

in view while programming.

3. Press and hold the selectedHomeLink� button.

4. Continuously press and release (cycle)the hand−held gate/device transmitterbutton every two seconds until step 5is complete.

5. When the indicator light on theHomeLink� changes from a slow to arapid flash after 20 seconds, you canrelease both buttons.

6. Test the operation of the HomeLink� bypressing the newly programmed button.Check to see if the gate/device oper-ates correctly.

7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each re-maining HomeLink� button to programanother device.

Programming other devices

To program other devices such as homesecurity systems, home door locks orlighting, contact your authorized Toyotadealer for assistance.

Reprogramming a button

Individual HomeLink� buttons cannot beerased, however, to reprogram a singlebutton, follow the procedure “Programmingthe HomeLink�”.

(b) Operating the HomeLink�

To operate the HomeLink�, press theappropriate HomeLink� button to activatethe programmed device. The HomeLink�

indicator light should come on. TheHomeLink� continues to send the signalfor up to 20 seconds as long as thebutton is pressed.

(c) Erasing the entire HomeLink�

memory (all three programs)

To erase all previously programmed codesat one time, press and hold down the 2outside buttons for 20 seconds until theindicator light flashes.

If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erasethe programs stored in the HomeLink�

memory.

For additional programming assistancewith your HomeLink� UniversalTransceiver call the:

� Toyota Customer Experience Center at1−800−331−4331 (U.S.A.)

� Toyota Canada Customer InteractionCentre at 1−888−869−6828 (Canada)


286


Refer to HomeLink� on the internet at:WWW.HOMELINK.COM

CAUTION

� When programming the HomeLink�

Universal Transceiver, you may beoperating a garage door or otherdevice. Make sure people and ob-jects are out of the way of the ga-rage door or other device to pre-vent potential harm or damage.

� Do not use this HomeLink� Univer-sal Transceiver with any garagedoor opener that lacks the safetystop and reverse feature as re-quired by federal safety standards.(This includes any garage dooropener model manufactured beforeApril 1, 1982.) A garage door open-er which cannot detect an object(signaling the door to stop and re-verse), does not meet current feder-al safety standards. Using a garagedoor opener without these featuresincreases risk of serious injury ordeath.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and with RSS−210 of the ICRules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

WARNING: This transmitter has beentested and complies with FCC and ICrules. Changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the party re-sponsible for compliance could voidthe user’s authority to operate thedevice.

To use the auxiliary boxes, open thelids as shown in the following illustra-tions.

CAUTION

� To reduce the chance of injury incase of an accident or sudden stop,always keep the auxiliary boxclosed while driving.

� Type A—It is designed for holdinga light objects, do not place anyheavy objects in it. Heavy objectsmay cause the holder to open andcontents to fly out resulting in inju-ries.

NOTICE

Type A—During hot weather, the inte-rior of the vehicle becomes very hot.Do not leave anything flammable ordeformable such as a lighter, glasses,etc. inside.

Auxiliary boxes


287


Type A (ceiling)

Type B (instrument panel)

Type C (rear console)

Type D (rear console)

Type E (luggage compartment)


288


Type F (luggage compartment)

This container can be used as an auxil-iary holder. CAUTION

Do not put objects in the containerwhich can shift, roll out or be thrownout in the event of sudden stops oraccidents. Objects which come out ofthe container can create a safety haz-ard due to interference with pedal op-eration or driver distraction.

� Do not store drinks or cans whichcould easily roll out.

Container


289


� Do not store objects which arehigher than the lower edge of thecontainer.

� Do not store objects which are larg-er than the width of the container.

Type A (rear console)

Type B (luggage compartment) Type C (second seat armrest)

Cup holders


290


The cup holders are designed for hold-ing cups or drink−cans securely.

Type A—To use the holder, open the lid.

Type C—To use the holder, pull down thesecond seat armrest and push the buttonon the armrest.

Type A only—

The cup holder can be adjustable to thesize of the cups or drink−cans bychanging the holder position.

CAUTION

� Do not place anything else otherthan cups or drink−cans in the cupholder, as such items may bethrown about in the compartmentand possibly injure people in thevehicle during sudden braking or inan accident.

� Type A and C—To reduce thechance of injury in case of an acci-dent or sudden stop while driving,keep the cup holder closed when itis not in use.


291


The bottle holders are designed to holdbottles securely.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to use the holder forany other purpose for which it wasintended. Inappropriately sized orshaped objects may be thrown aboutin the compartment and possibly in-jure people in the vehicle during asudden braking or an accident.

NOTICE

Do not put a cup or open bottle inthe bottle holder because the con-tents may spill when the door opensor closes.

To secure your luggage, use the tie−downhooks as shown above.


CAUTION

To avoid personal injury, keep the tie−down hooks folded in place on thefloor when not in use.

Vehicles with the third seat—When usingthe tie−down hooks, the third seat mustbe folded down. (See “—Folding downthird seat” on page 61 in Section 1−3.)

Bottle holders Tie−down hooks


292


NOTICE

Do not use the anchor brackets onthe second seat seatback instead ofthe tie−down hooks.

USING LUGGAGE COVER

To use the luggage cover:

1. Pull out the forward luggage coverand hang the hooks to the hookbrackets on the second seat seat-back.

2. Pull out the rear luggage cover andsecure it to the hook brackets.

CAUTION

Do not place anything on the luggagecover. Such items may be thrownabout and possibly injure people inthe vehicle during sudden braking ora collision.

Vehicles with the third seat—When usingthe luggage cover, the third seat must befolded down. (See “—Folding down thirdseat” on page 61 in Section 1−3.)

Luggage cover


293


REMOVING LUGGAGE COVER

To remove the luggage cover, push inthe left end to release the right end,and lift the luggage cover out.

After you remove the luggage cover, stowit under deck board as described below.This will prevent passengers from injury inthe event of a sudden stop or accident.

STOWING LUGGAGE COVER

To stow the luggage cover, do the fol-lowing.

1. Remove the side deck boards andopen the center deck board.


294


2. Push in the left end of the luggagecover and place the luggage cover inthe holder as shown.

CAUTION

Make sure the luggage cover is se-curely stowed.

Cross rails

Roof rails

The roof luggage carrier consists ofroof rails and sliding cross rails.

Upperknob

Side knobs

ADJUSTING THE POSITION OF CROSSRAILS:

1. Turn the upper and side knobs coun-terclockwise to loosen the crossrails.

Roof luggage carrier


295


2. Slide the cross rails to the appropri-ate position for loading the luggagesand turn the side knobs clockwise totighten the cross rails securely.

Vehicles with the electric moonroof—Thereare cross rail stoppers on the roof railswhich help you prevent the cross railsbeing touched with the tilted up moonroof.

NOTICE

Vehicles with the electric moonroofonly—Do not remove the cross railstoppers, or the moonroof may bedamaged when it is tilted.

3. In order to fix the cross rails to theappropriate length, turn the upperknobs clockwise after tightening allof the side knobs.

CAUTION

Make sure the cross rails are fixedsecurely by pushing forward and rear-ward them. Failure to do so maycause an unexpected accident or se-vere injury in the event of emergencybraking or a collision.

Follow the manufacture’s instructions andprecautions when installing the attach-ments or their equivalent.

CAUTION

When you load cargo on the roof lug-gage carrier, observe the following:

� Place the cargo so that its weightis distributed evenly between thefront and rear axles.

� If loading long or wide cargo, neverexceed the vehicle overall length orwidth. (See “Dimensions andweights” on page 410 in Section 8for information on your vehicleoverall length and width.)

� Before driving, make sure the cargois securely fastened on the roofluggage carrier.

� Loading cargo on the roof luggagecarrier will make the center of thevehicle gravity higher. Avoid highspeeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,sudden braking or abrupt maneu-vers, otherwise it may result in lossof control or vehicle rollover due tofailure to operate this vehicle cor-rectly.


296


� If driving for a long distance, onrough roads, or at high speeds,stop the vehicle now and then dur-ing the trip to make sure the cargoremains in its place.

� Do not exceed 75 kg (165 lb.) cargoweight on the roof luggage carrier.

NOTICE

When loading the luggages, be carefulnot to scratch the surface of themoonroof. Use a floor mat of the correct size.

If the vehicle carpet and floor mat have2 holes, then they are designed for usewith locking clips. Attach the floor mat tothe vehicle carpet using the clips. Lockthe clips into the holes in the vehiclecarpet.

CAUTION

Make sure the floor mat is properlyplaced on the vehicle carpet. If thefloor mat slips and interferes with themovement of the pedals during driv-ing, it may cause an accident.

Floor mat


297


INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOURTOYOTAInformation before driving your ToyotaUtility vehicle precautions 298. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Break−in period 299. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel 299. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation in foreign countries 301. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Three−way catalytic converters 302. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine exhaust cautions 303. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Facts about engine oil consumption 303. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Iridium−tipped spark plugs 304. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake system 305. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Brake pad wear limit indicators 306. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric power steering system 306. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Your Toyota’s identification 307. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Theft prevention labels 308. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suspension and chassis 308. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tire information 309. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vehicle load limits 317. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cargo and luggage 318. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of tires 320. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2


298


This vehicle belongs to the utility ve-hicle class, which has higher groundclearance and narrower tread in relationto the height of its center of gravity.Specific design characteristics give it ahigher center of gravity than ordinarypassenger cars. This vehicle design fea-ture causes this type of vehicle to bemore likely to rollover. And, utility ve-hicles have a significantly higher rol-lover rate than other types of vehicles.It is not designed for cornering at thesame speeds as ordinary passengercars any more than low−slung sportscars designed to perform satisfactorilyunder off−road conditions. Therefore,sharp turns at excessive speeds maycause rollover.

CAUTION

Always observe the following precau-tions to minimize the risk of seriouspersonal injury or damage to your ve-hicle:

� In a rollover crash, an unbelted per-son is significantly more likely todie than a person wearing a seatbelt. Therefore, the driver and allpassengers should fasten their seatbelts whenever the vehicle is mov-ing.

� Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-vers, if at all possible. Failure tooperate this vehicle correctly mayresult in loss of control or vehiclerollover causing death or seriousinjury.

� Loading cargo on the roof luggagecarrier will make the center of thevehicle gravity higher. Avoid highspeeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,sudden braking or abrupt maneu-vers, otherwise it may result in lossof control or vehicle rollover due tofailure to operate this vehicle cor-rectly.

Utility vehicle precautions


299


� Always slow down in gusty cross-winds. Because of its profile andhigher center of gravity, your ve-hicle is more sensitive to sidewinds than an ordinary passengercar. Slowing down will allow you tohave better control.

� When off−road driving cannot beavoided, do not drive at excessivespeeds, jump, make sharp turns, orstrike objects, etc. These maneu-vers may result in loss of controlor vehicle rollover causing death orserious injury. You also risk expen-sive damage to your vehicle’s sus-pension and chassis.

� Do not drive horizontally acrosssteep slopes. Driving straight up orstraight down is preferred. Your ve-hicle (or any similar off−road ve-hicle) can tip over sideways muchmore easily than forward or back-ward.

Drive gently and avoid high speeds.

Your vehicle does not need an elaboratebreak−in. But following a few simple tipsfor the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can addto the future economy and long life ofyour vehicle:

� Avoid full throttle acceleration whenstarting and driving.

� Avoid racing the hybrid system.

� Try to avoid hard stops during the first300 km (200 miles).

� Do not tow a trailer during the first 800km (500 miles).

FUEL TYPE

Your new vehicle must use only un-leaded gasoline.

To help prevent gas station mix−ups, yourToyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.The special nozzle on pumps with un-leaded fuel will fit it, but the larger stan-dard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas willnot.

At a minimum, the gasoline you useshould meet the specifications of ASTMD4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5−M93in Canada.

NOTICE

Do not use leaded gasoline. Use ofleaded gasoline will cause the three−way catalytic converter to lose its ef-fectiveness and the emission controlsystem to function improperly. Also,this can increase maintenance costs.

Break−in period Fuel


300


OCTANE RATING

Select octane rating 87 (Research Oc-tane Number 91) or higher.

Use of unleaded gasoline with an octanerating lower than 87 may result in engineknocking. Persistent knocking can lead toengine damage.

If your engine knocks...

If you detect heavy knocking even whenusing the recommended fuel, or if youhear steady knocking while holding asteady speed on level roads, consult yourToyota dealer.

However, occasionally, you may noticelight knocking for a short time while accel-erating or driving up hills. This is normaland there is no need for concern.

GASOLINE CONTAINING DETERGENTADDITIVES

Toyota recommends the use of gasolinethat contains detergent additives toavoid build−up of engine deposits.

However, all gasoline sold in the U.S.contains detergent additives to keep cleanand/or clean intake systems.

QUALITY GASOLINE

Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.,Europe and Japan have developed aspecification for quality fuel namedWorld−Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) thatis expected to be applied world wide.The WWFC consists of four categoriesthat depend on required emission lev-els. In the U.S., category 4 has beenadopted. The WWFC improves air quali-ty by providing for better emissions invehicle fleets, and customer satisfactionthrough better vehicle performance.

CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE

Cleaner burning gasoline, including re-formulated gasoline that contains oxy-genates such as ethanol or MTBE isavailable in many areas.

Toyota recommends the use of cleanerburning gasoline and appropriately blendedreformulated gasoline. These types of gas-oline provide excellent vehicle perfor-mance, reduce vehicle emissions, and im-prove air quality.

OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE

Toyota allows the use of oxygenateblended gasoline where the oxygenatecontent is up to 10% ethanol or 15%MTBE. If you use gasohol in yourToyota, be sure that it has an octanerating no lower than 87.

Toyota does not recommend the use ofgasoline containing methanol.


301


GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT

Some gasoline contain an octane en-hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use ofgasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con-taining MMT is used, your emission con-trol system may be adversely affected.The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the in-strument cluster may come on. If this hap-pens, contact your Toyota dealer for ser-vice.

GASOLINE QUALITY

In a very few cases, you may experiencedriveability problems caused by the partic-ular gasoline that you are using. If youcontinue to have unacceptable driveability,try changing gasoline brands. If this doesnot rectify your problem, then consult yourToyota dealer.

NOTICE

� Do not use gasohol other thanstated above. It will cause fuel sys-tem damage or vehicle performanceproblems.

� If driveability problems occur (poorhot starting, vaporizing, engineknock, etc.), discontinue the use.

� Take care not to spill gasohol dur-ing refueling. Gasohol may causepaint damage.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY

65 L (17.2 gal., 14.3 Imp. gal.)

If you plan to drive your Toyota inanother country...

First, comply with the vehicle registrationlaws.

Second, confirm the availability of the cor-rect fuel (unleaded and minimum octanenumber).

Operation in foreign countries


302


The three−way catalytic converters areemission control devices installed inthe exhaust system.

The purpose is to reduce pollutants in theexhaust gas.

CAUTION

� Keep people and combustible mate-rials away from the exhaust pipewhile the engine is running. Theexhaust gas is very hot.

� Do not idle or park your vehicleover anything that might burn easi-ly such as grass, leaves, paper orrags.

NOTICE

A large amount of unburned gasesflowing into the three−way catalyticconverter may cause it to overheatand create a fire hazard. To preventthis and other damage, observe thefollowing precautions:

� Use only unleaded gasoline.

� Do not drive with an extremely lowfuel level; running out of fuel couldcause the engine to misfire, creat-ing an excessive load on the three−way catalytic converter.

� Do not turn off the ignition whilethe vehicle is moving.

� Keep your engine in good runningorder. Malfunctions in the engineelectrical system, electronic ignitionsystem/distributor ignition systemor fuel systems could cause an ex-tremely high three−way catalyticconverter temperature.

� If the engine becomes difficult tostart or stalls frequently, take yourvehicle in for a check−up as soonas possible. Remember, your Toyotadealer knows your vehicle and itsthree−way catalytic converter sys-tem best.

� To ensure that the three−way cata-lytic converter and the entire emis-sion control system operate proper-ly, your vehicle must receive theperiodic inspections required by theToyota Maintenance Schedule. Forscheduled maintenance information,refer to the “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment”.

� Do not apply a coating agent suchas an anti−rust under−coating to theexhaust pipe.

Three−way catalytic converters


303


CAUTION

� Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust.It contains carbon monoxide, whichis a colorless and odorless gas. Itcan cause unconsciousness or evendeath.

� Make sure the exhaust system hasno holes or loose connections. Thesystem should be checked fromtime to time. If you hit something,or notice a change in the sound ofthe exhaust, have the systemchecked immediately.

� Do not run the hybrid system in agarage or other enclosed areas ex-cept to drive the vehicle in or out.In enclosed areas, exhaust gasescannot escape, making this a partic-ularly dangerous situation.

� Do not remain for a long time in aparked vehicle with the hybrid sys-tem on. If it is unavoidable, howev-er, make sure to park the vehicle inan unclosed area and adjust theheating or cooling system to forceoutside air into the vehicle.

� Keep the back door closed whiledriving. An open or unsealed backdoor may cause exhaust gases tobe drawn into the vehicle.

� To allow proper operation of yourvehicle’s ventilation system, keepthe inlet grilles in front of the wind-shield clear of snow, leaves, or oth-er obstructions.

� If you smell exhaust fumes in thevehicle, open the windows andclose the back door to ensureplenty of fresh air enters the ve-hicle. If you can smell exhaustfumes even though there are noother vehicles in the surroundingarea, have your vehicle checked byyour Toyota dealer. Continued in-halation of exhaust fumes can leadto death by gas poisoning.

FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL

Engine oil has the primary functions oflubricating and cooling the inside of theengine, and plays a major role in main-taining the engine in proper working order.

ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION

It is normal that an engine should con-sume some engine oil during normalengine operation. The causes of oilconsumption in a normal engine are asfollows.

� Oil is used to lubricate pistons, pistonrings and cylinders. A thin film of oilis left on the cylinder wall when a pis-ton moves downwards in the cylinder.High negative pressure generated whenthe vehicle is decelerating sucks someof this oil into the combustion chamber.This oil as well as some part of the oilfilm left on the cylinder wall is burnedby the high temperature combustiongases during the combustion process.

� Oil is also used to lubricate the stemsof the intake valves. Some of this oilis sucked into the combustion chambertogether with the intake air and isburned along with the fuel. High tem-perature exhaust gases also burn theoil used to lubricate the exhaust valvestems.

Engine exhaust cautionsFacts about engine oilconsumption


304


The amount of engine oil consumed de-pends on the viscosity of the oil, thequality of the oil and the conditions thevehicle is driven under.

More oil is consumed by high−speed driv-ing and frequent acceleration and decel-eration.

A new engine consumes more oil, sinceits pistons, piston rings and cylinder wallshave not become conditioned.

Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 Imp. qt./600miles)

When judging the amount of oil con-sumption, note that the oil may becomediluted and make it difficult to judgethe true level accurately.

As an example, if a vehicle is used forrepeated short trips, and consumes a nor-mal amount of oil, the dipstick may notshow any drop in the oil level at all, evenafter 1000 km (600 miles) or more. Thisis because the oil is gradually becomingdiluted with fuel or moisture, making itappear that the oil level has not changed.

The diluting ingredients evaporate outwhen the vehicle is then driven at highspeeds, as on an expressway, making itappear that oil is excessively consumedafter driving at high speeds.

IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVELCHECK

One of the most important points in prop-er vehicle maintenance is to keep the en-gine oil at the optimum level so that oilfunction will not be impaired. Therefore, itis essential that the oil level be checkedregularly. Toyota recommends that the oillevel be checked every time you refuelthe vehicle.

NOTICE

Failure to check the oil level regularlycould lead to serious engine troubledue to insufficient oil.

For detailed information on oil level check,see “Checking the engine oil level” onpage 386 in Section 7−2.

Your engine is fitted with iridium−tippedspark plugs.

NOTICE

Use only iridium−tipped spark plugs.Do not adjust gaps for engine perfor-mance or smooth driveability.

Iridium−tipped spark plugs


305


REGENERATIVE BRAKE

When the brake is applied, the motor gen-erator converts kinetic energy into electricenergy.

The regenerative brake works in the fol-lowing operations.

1. When the accelerator pedal is released,the reduced speed equal to enginebraking in a gasoline−fueled vehicle isobtained in accordance with the runningmode position of the selector lever.

2. When the brake pedal is depressedwith the selector lever in “D” or “B”,the regenerative brake works.

HYDRAULIC BRAKE

This brake system has 3 independent hy-draulic circuits. If any circuit should fail,the other will still work. However, the ped-al will be harder to press, and your stop-ping distance will increase. Also, thebrake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION

Do not drive your vehicle if any hy-draulic circuit has failed. Have yourbrakes fixed immediately.

BRAKE ACTUATOR

The brake actuator uses brake fluid pres-surized by the pump to power−assist thebrakes. If the brake actuator fails duringdriving, the brake system warning lightcomes on and the buzzer sounds continu-ously. In this case, the brakes may notwork properly. If they do not work well,depress the brake pedal firmly. If thebrake system warning light comes on, im-mediately stop your vehicle and contactyour Toyota dealer.

The red and yellow brake system warninglights may stay on for about 60 secondsafter the ignition is turned on. It is normalif the light turns off after a while.

Depressing the brake pedal repeatedlymay turn on the red warning light. It isnormal if the light turns off after a fewseconds.

You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment after the hybrid system isstarted or the brake pedal is depressedrepeatedly. This is a pump pulsatingsound of the brake system, and it is nota malfunction.

In the following conditions, you may heara motor sound in the engine compartment.

� The brake pedal is depressed when thehybrid system is turned off.

� The driver’s door is opened.

� For a few seconds after the hybrid sys-tem is off and about 90 seconds havepassed.

The brake pedal stroke may be shortwhen you turn the ignition on with thebrake pedal depressed.

CAUTION

� Do not pump the brake pedal if thehybrid system is not operating.Each push on the pedal uses upyour reserved brake fluid pressure.

� Even if the power assist is com-pletely lost, the brakes will stillwork. But you will have to push thepedal hard, much harder than nor-mal. And your braking distance willincrease.

Brake system


306


DRUM−IN−DISC TYPE PARKING BRAKESYSTEM

Your vehicle has a drum−in−disc typeparking brake system. This type of brakesystem needs bedding−down of the brakeshoes periodically or whenever the parkingbrake shoes and/or drums are replaced.

Have your Toyota dealer perform the bed-ding−down.

The brake pad wear limit indicators onyour disc brakes give a warning noisewhen the brake pads are worn to wherereplacement is required.

If you hear a squealing or scraping noisewhile driving, have the brake padschecked and replaced by your Toyotadealer as soon as possible. Expensive ro-tor damage can result if the pads are notreplaced when necessary.

Driving conditions where the steeringwheel must be turned frequently maycause an overload to the electric powersteering system. The system will reduceassistance for sometime to prevent thepower steering from overheating. In thiscase, you may feel some resistance whenturning the steering wheel though it is nota malfunction.

CAUTION

If the “P/S” warning light comes on,take your vehicle to the Toyota dealeras soon as possible. In this case, youmay feel the heavy steering wheelmaneuvering. Drive your vehicle whilegripping the steering wheel firmly.

Brake pad wear limitindicators Electric power steering system


307


The vehicle identification number (VIN)is the legal identifier for your vehicle.This number is on the left top of theinstrument panel, and can be seenthrough the windshield from outside.

This is the primary identification numberfor your Toyota. It is used in registeringthe ownership of your vehicle.

The vehicle identification number (VIN) isalso on the Certification Label.

1. Gasoline engine number2. Traction motor number

The gasoline engine and traction motornumbers are stamped as shown.

Your Toyota’s identification——Vehicle identificationnumber

—Gasoline engine andtraction motor numbers


308


Your new vehicle carries theft preven-tion labels which are approximately 47mm (1.85 in.) by 12 mm (0.47 in.).

The purpose of these labels is to reducethe incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitat-ing the tracing and recovery of parts fromstolen vehicles. The label is designed sothat once it is applied to a surface, anyattempt to remove it will result in destroy-ing the integrity of the label. Transferringthese labels intact from one part to anoth-er, will be impossible.

NOTICE

You should not attempt to remove thetheft prevention labels as it may vio-late certain state or federal laws.

CAUTION

Do not modify the suspension/chassiswith lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. Itcan cause dangerous handling charac-teristics, resulting in loss of control.

Theft prevention labels(except for Canada) Suspension and chassis


309


This illustration indicates typical tiresymbols.1. Tire size—For details, see “—Tire

size” on page 311.2. DOT and Tire Identification

Number (TIN)—For details, see“—DOT and Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN)” on page 310.

3. Uniform tire quality gra-ding—For details, see “—Uniformtire quality grading” on page 312.

4. The location of the tread wearindicators—For details, see“Checking and replacing tires” onpage 393.

5. Tire ply composition and mate-rials—Plies mean a layer of rub-ber−coated parallel cords. Cordsmean the strands forming the pliesin the tire.

6. Radial tires or bias−ply tires—Aradial tire has “RADIAL” on thesidewall. A tire not marked with“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.

Tire information——Tire symbols


310


7. “TUBELESS” or “TUBETYPE”—A tubeless tire does nothave a tube inside the tire and airis directly filled in the tire. A tubetype tire has a tube inside the tireand the tube maintains the airpressure.

8. Load limit at maximum cold tireinflation pressure—For details,see “Checking and replacing tires”on page 393.

9. Maximum cold tire inflationpressure—This means the pres-sure to which a tire may be in-flated. For details about recom-mended cold tire inflationpressure, see “Tires” on page 415.

10.Summer tire or all seasontire—An all season tire has “M+S”on the sidewall. The tire notmarked with “M+S” is a summertire. For details, see “Types oftires” on page 320.

This illustration indicates typical DOTand Tire Identification Number (TIN).1. “DOT” symbol2. Tire Identification Number (TIN)3. Tire manufacturer ’s identification

mark4. Tire size code5. Manufacturer ’s optional tire type

code (3 or 4 letters)6. Manufacturing week7. Manufacturing year

The “DOT” symbol certifies that thetire conforms to applicable FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards.

—DOT and Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN)


311


This illustration indicates typical tiresize.1. Section width (in millimeters)2. Aspect ratio (tire height to section

width)3. Tire construction code (R=Radial,

D=Diagonal)4. Wheel diameter (in inches)5. Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)6. Speed symbol (alphabet with one

letter)

1. Section width2. Tire height3. Wheel diameter

1. Bead2. Sidewall3. Shoulder4. Tread5. Belt6. Inner liner7. Reinforcing rubber8. Carcass9. Rim lines10.Bead wires11. Chafer

—Tire size —Name of each section of tire


312


This information has been preparedin accordance with regulations issuedby the National Highway Traffic Safe-ty Administration of the U.S. Depart-ment of Transportation. It providesthe purchasers and/or prospectivepurchasers of Toyota vehicles with in-formation on uniform tire quality grad-ing.Your Toyota dealer will help answerany questions you may have as youread this information.DOT quality grades—All passengervehicle tires must conform to Fed-eral Safety Requirements in addi-tion to these grades. Qualitygrades can be found where appli-cable on the tire sidewall betweentread shoulder and maximum sec-tion width. For example: Treadwear200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear—The treadwear grade isa comparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when tested un-der controlled conditions on a speci-fied government test course. For ex-ample, a tire graded 150 would wearone and a half (1−1/2) times as wellon the government course as a tiregraded 100. The relative performanceof tires depends upon the actualconditions of their use, however, andmay depart significantly from thenorm due to variations in driving hab-its, service practices and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C—The tractiongrades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C, and they representthe tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-ment as measured under controlledconditions on specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor trac-tion performance.Warning: The traction grade assignedto this tire is based on braking(straight ahead) traction tests anddoes not include cornering (turning)traction.

—Uniform tire quality grading


313


Temperature A, B, C—The tempera-ture grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire’s resis-tance to the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heat whentested under controlled conditions ona specified indoor laboratory testwheel. Sustained high temperaturecan cause the material of the tire todegenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead tosudden tire failure. The grade C cor-responds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No.109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of per-formance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.Warning: The temperature grades forthis tire are established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either sep-arately or in combination, can causeheat buildup and possible tire failure.


314


Tire related term Meaning

Accessory weight

the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may bereplaced) of transaxle, power steering, power brakes, power windows,power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are availableas factory−installed equipment (whether installed or not)

Cold tire inflation pressuretire inflation pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3hours or more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mileunder that condition

Curb weightthe weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including themaximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, airconditioning and additional weight optional engine

Intended outboard sidewall

(A) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher ordeeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(B) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particularside that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

Maximum inflation pressure the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and itis shown on the sidewall of the tire

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

the sum of—(a) curb weight;(b) accessory weight;(c) vehicle capacity weight; and(d) production options weight

—Glossary of tire terminology


315



Normal occupant weight 68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the secondcolumn of Table 1 that follows

Occupant distribution distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table1 that follows

Production options weight

the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighingover 2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace,not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, includingheavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and specialtrim

Recommended inflation pressure cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

Rim a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beadsare seated

Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation rim diameter and width

Rim type designation the industry of manufacturer ’s designation for a rim by style or code

Rim width nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle capacity weight(Total load capacity)

the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s desig-nated seating capacity

Vehicle maximum load on the tire the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axleits share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two


316



Vehicle normal load on the tirethe load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axleits share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two

Weather side the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

Table 1—Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity,number of occupants

Vehicle normal load, number ofoccupants

Occupant distribution in a normallyloaded vehicle

2 through 4 2 2 in front

5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat


317


Vehicle load limits include total loadcapacity, seating capacity, towing ca-pacity and cargo capacity. Follow theload limits shown below. Total load ca-pacity and seating capacity are alsodescribed on the tire and loading in-formation label. For location of the tireand loading information label, see“Checking tire inflation pressure” onpage 390.Total load capacity:

Without third seat390 kg (860 lb.)

With third seat526 kg (1159 lb.)

Total load capacity means combinedweight of occupants, cargo and lug-gage. Tongue load is included whentrailer towing.Seating capacity:

Without third seatTotal 5 (Front 2, Rear 3)

With third seatTotal 7 (Front 2, Rear 5)

Seating capacity means the maximumnumber of occupants whose esti-mated average weight is 68 kg (150lb.) per person. Depending on theweight of each person, the seating ca-pacity given may exceed the totalload capacity.

NOTICE

Even if the number of occupants arewithin the seating capacity, do not ex-ceed the total load capacity.

Towing capacity:Without towing package

905 kg (2000 lb.)With towing package

1588 kg (3500 lb.)Towing capacity means the maximumgross trailer weight (trailer weight plusits cargo weight) that your vehicle isable to tow.

Cargo capacityCargo capacity may increase or de-crease depending on the size (weight)and the number of occupants. For de-tails, see “—Capacity and distribu-tion” on page 319.

CAUTION

Do not apply the load more thaneach load limit. That may causenot only damage to the tires, butalso deterioration to the steeringability and braking ability, whichmay cause an accident.

Vehicle load limits


318


When stowing cargo and luggage inthe vehicle, observe the following:� Put cargo and luggage in the lug-

gage compartment when at allpossible. Be sure all items are se-cured in place.

� Be careful to keep the vehicle bal-anced. Locating the weight as farforward as possible helps maintainbalance.

� For better fuel economy, do notcarry unneeded weight.

CAUTION

� To prevent cargo and luggagefrom sliding forward duringbraking, do not stack anythingin the luggage compartmenthigher than the seatbacks.Keep cargo and luggage low,as close to the floor as pos-sible.

� Never allow anyone to ride inthe luggage compartment. It isnot designed for passengers.They should ride in their seatswith their seat belts properlyfastened. Otherwise, they aremuch more likely suffer deathor serious bodily injury, in theevent of sudden braking or acollision.

� Do not place anything on theflattened seat, or it may slideforward during braking.

� Do not place anything on theluggage cover. Such items maybe thrown about and possiblyinjure people in the vehicleduring sudden braking or anaccident. Secure all items in asafe place.

� Do not drive with objects lefton top of the instrument panel.They may interfere with thedriver’s field of view. Or theymay move during sharp vehicleacceleration or turning, and im-pair the driver’s control of thevehicle. In an accident theymay injure the vehicle occu-pants.

� Do not put objects in the con-tainer which can shift, roll outor be thrown out in the eventof sudden stops or accidents.Objects which come out of thecontainer can create a safetyhazard due to interference withpedal operation or driver dis-traction.

Cargo and luggage——Stowage precautions


319


Cargo capacity depends on the to-tal weight of the occupants.(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capac-ity) – (Total weight of occupants)Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit—(1) Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed XXXkg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’splacard.

(2) Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers fromXXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity. For exam-ple, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs. and there will be five150 lb passengers in your ve-hicle, the amount of availablecargo and luggage load capacityis 650 lbs. (1400–750(5x150)=650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo beingloaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in Step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacityof your vehicle.

For details about trailer towing, seepage 330.

Cargocapacity

Total loadcapacity

Example on Your VehicleIn case that 2 people with the com-bined weight of 166 kg (366 lb.) areriding in your vehicle, the availableamount of cargo and luggage load ca-pacity will be as follows:Without third seatTotal load capacity: 390 kg (860 lb.)

390 kg – 166 kg = 224 kg.(860 lb. – 366 lb. = 494 lb.)

With third seatTotal load capacity: 526 kg (1159 lb.)

526 kg – 166 kg = 360 kg.(1159 lb. – 366 lb. = 793 lb.)

—Capacity and distribution


320


From this condition, if 3 more passen-gers with the combined weight of 176kg (388 lb.) get on, the available car-go and luggage load will be reducedas follows:Without third seat

224 kg – 176 kg = 48 kg.(494 lb. – 388 lb. = 106 lb.)

With third seat360 kg – 176 kg = 184 kg.(793 lb. – 388 lb. = 405 lb.)

As shown in the above example, if thenumber of occupants increases, thecargo and luggage load equaling thecombined weight of occupants whogot on later must be reduced. In otherwords, if the increase in the numberof occupants causes the excess ofthe total load capacity (combinedweight of occupants plus cargo andluggage load), you have to reduce thecargo and luggage on your vehicle.For details about total load capacity,see “Vehicle load limits” on page 317.

CAUTION

Even if the total load of occu-pant’s weight and the cargo loadis less than the total load capac-ity, do not apply the load uneven-ly. That may cause not only dam-age to the tire but also deteriora-tion to the steering ability due tounbalance of the vehicle, causingan accident.

Determine what kind of tires yourvehicle is originally equipped with.1. Summer tiresSummer tires are high−speed capabil-ity tires best suited to highway drivingunder dry conditions.Since summer tires do not have thesame traction performance as snowtires, summer tires are inadequate fordriving on snow−covered or icy roads.For driving on snow−covered or icyroads, we recommend using snowtires. If installing snow tires, be sureto replace all four tires.2. All season tiresAll season tires are designed to pro-vide better traction in snow and to beadequate for driving in most winterconditions, as well as for use all yearround.

Types of tires


321


All season tires, however, do not haveadequate traction performancecompared with snow tires in heavy orloose snow. Also, all season tires fallshort in acceleration and handlingperformance compared with summertires in highway driving.

CAUTION

� Do not mix summer and all sea-son tires on your vehicle asthis can cause dangerous han-dling characteristics, resultingin loss of control.

� Do not use tire other than themanufacturer’s designatedtires, and never mix tires orwheels of the sizes differentfrom the originals.


322



323


STARTING AND DRIVINGStarting and drivingBefore starting the hybrid system 324. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to start the hybrid system 324. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tips for driving in various conditions 325. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Off−road driving precautions 326. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Winter driving tips 328. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dinghy towing 329. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Trailer towing 330. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer 335. . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 3


324


1. Check the area around the vehicle be-fore getting in.

2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle,seat cushion angle, seat height, headrestraint height and steering wheelangle.

3. Adjust the inside and outside rear viewmirrors.

4. Lock all side doors and back door.

5. Fasten seat belts.

When you get in the vehicle, checkwhether the “READY” light is on ornot.

CAUTION

Your vehicle does not produce anynoise or vibration when the vehicle isready to be driven with the “READY”indicator light on. Move your footcarefully from the brake pedal to theacceleration pedal when driving.

1. Apply the parking brake firmly.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-sories.

3. Put the selector lever in “P”.

4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it tothe floor until driving off.

As the hybrid system starts only with thetransmission in the “P” position, put theselector lever in “P” whenever starting thesystem.

Before starting the hybrid system, be sureto follow the instructions in “(a) Beforestarting”.

Starting procedure

With your foot off the accelerator pedal,turn the key to “START” briefly and firmly.After a few seconds, the “READY” lightwill come on and a beep will sound. If theambient temperature is low, such as dur-ing winter driving conditions, it may taketime until the “READY” light comes on.

The engine may not start even with the“READY” light on.

Before starting the hybridsystem

How to start the hybridsystem—(a) Before starting (b) Starting the hybrid system


325


You may hear a sound in the enginecompartment when the brake pedal is de-pressed with the hybrid system off. How-ever, this does not indicate any trouble.

When the hybrid system is started orstopped, you may hear a sound comingfrom the hybrid battery under the rearseats. However, this does not indicate anytrouble.

When the hybrid system is started orstopped, or while the vehicle is idling, youmay hear a sound coming from the trans-mission. However, this does not indicateany trouble.

When applying brakes, you may hear asound coming from the regenerativebrakes. However, this does not indicateany trouble.

When the gasoline engine is started orstopped with the hybrid system on, youmay feel a vibration. However, this doesnot indicate any trouble.

If there is a problem somewhere in thehybrid system, “CHECK HYBRID SYSTEM”warning message will appear on the multi−information display. Have your vehiclechecked by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible.

If the hybrid system will not start...

See “If your vehicle will not start” on page338 in Section 4.

CAUTION

Never start the hybrid system fromoutside the vehicle, or an accidentmay occur. Be sure to sit in the driv-er seat, then start the system.

NOTICE

� If any service reminder indicatorlight comes on or warning messageappears on the multi−informationdisplay (see page 144 and page 155for details) or the 12 volt battery isdisconnected, the hybrid systemmay not start. In that case, turn theignition on again. If the “READY”light does not come on, contactyour Toyota dealer.

� When you start the hybrid systemat a lower outside temperature, itmay take longer before the blinking“READY” light changes to constanton.

� Always slow down in gusty crosswinds.This will allow you much better control.

� Drive slowly onto curbs and, if pos-sible, at a right angle. Avoid drivingonto high, sharp−edged objects andother road hazards. Failure to do socan lead to severe tire damage suchas a tire burst.

Drive slowly when passing over bumpsor travelling on a bumpy road. Other-wise, the impact could cause severedamage to the tires and/or wheels.

� When parking on a hill, turn the frontwheels until they touch the curb sothat the vehicle will not roll. Apply theparking brake, and place the transmis-sion in “P”. If necessary, block thewheels.

� Washing your vehicle or driving throughdeep water may get the brakes wet. Tosee whether they are wet, check thatthere is no traffic near you, and thenpress the pedal lightly. If you do notfeel a normal braking force, the brakesare probably wet. To dry them, drivethe vehicle cautiously while lightlypressing the brake pedal with the park-ing brake applied. If they still do notwork safely, pull to the side of the roadand call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

Tips for driving in variousconditions


326


CAUTION

� Before driving off, make sure thatthe parking brake is fully releasedand the parking brake reminderlight is off.

� Do not leave your vehicle unat-tended while the hybrid system ison.

� Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal while driving. It can causedangerous overheating, needlesswear, and poor fuel economy.

� To drive down a long or steep hill,reduce your speed and downshift.Remember, if you ride the brakesexcessively, they may overheat andnot work properly.

� Be careful when accelerating, down-shifting or braking on a slipperysurface. Sudden acceleration or en-gine braking, could cause the ve-hicle to skid or spin.

� Do not drive in excess of the speedlimit. Even if the legal speed limitpermits it, do not drive over 140km/h (85 mph) unless your vehiclehas high−speed capability tires.Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) mayresult in tire failure, loss of controland possible injury. Be sure to con-sult a tire dealer to determinewhether the tires on your vehicleare high−speed capability tires ornot before driving at such speeds.

� Do not continue normal drivingwhen the brakes are wet. If they arewet, your vehicle will require alonger stopping distance, and itmay pull to one side when thebrakes are applied. Also, the park-ing brake will not hold the vehiclesecurely.

Your vehicle is not designed to be driv-en off−road

However, in the event that off−road drivingcannot be avoided, please observe thefollowing precautions to help avoid theareas prohibited to vehicles.

a. Drive your vehicle only in areas whereoff−road vehicles are permitted to trav-el.

b. Respect private property. Get owner’spermission before entering private prop-erty.

c. Do not enter areas that are closed.Honor gates, barriers and signs that re-strict travel.

d. Stay on established roads. When condi-tions are wet, driving techniques shouldbe changed or travel delayed to pre-vent damage to roads.

Off−road driving precautions


327


For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii andPuerto Rico:

To obtain additional information pertainingto driving your vehicle off−road, consultthe following organizations.

� State and Local Parks and RecreationDepartments

� State Motor Vehicle Bureau

� Recreational Vehicle Clubs

� U.S. Forest Service and Bureau ofLand Management

CAUTION

Always observe the following precau-tions to minimize the risk of seriouspersonal injury or damage to your ve-hicle:

� Drive carefully when off the road.Do not take unnecessary risks bydriving in dangerous places.

� Do not grip the steering wheelspokes when driving off−road. Abad bump could jerk the wheel andinjure your hands. Keep both handsand especially your thumbs on theoutside of the rim.

� Always check your brakes for effec-tiveness immediately after driving insand, mud, water or snow.

� After driving through tall grass,mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., checkthat there is no grass, bush, paper,rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering ortrapped on the underbody. Clear offany such matter from the under-body. If the vehicle is used withthese materials trapped or adheringto the underbody, a breakdown orfire could occur.

� In a rollover crash, an unbelted per-son is significantly more likely todie than a person wearing a seatbelt. Therefore, the driver and allpassengers should fasten their seatbelts whenever the vehicle is mo-ving.

� When off−road driving cannot beavoided, do not drive at excessivespeeds, jump, make sharp turns, orstrike objects, etc. These maneu-vers may result in loss of controlor vehicle rollover causing death orserious injury. You also risk expen-sive damage to your vehicle’s sus-pension and chassis.

NOTICE

� If driving through water, such aswhen crossing shallow streams,first check the depth of the waterand the bottom of the river bed forfirmness. Drive slowly and avoiddeep water.


328


� Take all necessary safety measuresto ensure that water damage to thehybrid battery, hybrid system orother components does not occur.

Water entering the engine compart-ment may cause severe damage tothe hybrid system. Water enteringthe interior may cause the hybridbattery stowed under the rear seatsto short circuit.

Water can wash the grease fromwheel bearings, causing rusting andpremature failure, and may also en-ter the transaxle case, reducing thegear oil’s lubricating qualities.

� Sand and mud that has accumulatedin brake drums and around brakediscs may affect braking efficiencyand may damage brake system com-ponents.

� Always perform a maintenance in-spection after each day of off−roaddriving that has taken you throughrough terrain, sand, mud, or water.For scheduled maintenance informa-tion, refer to the “Scheduled Main-tenance Guide” or “Owner’s ManualSupplement”.

Make sure your coolant is properly pro-tected against freezing.

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”or similar high quality ethylene glycolbased non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,and non−borate coolant with long−lifehybrid organic acid technology. (Coolantwith long−life hybrid organic acidtechnology is a combination of lowphosphates and organic acids.)

See “Checking the coolant level” on page388 in Section 7−2 for details of coolanttype selection.

For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and50% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about −35�C(−31�F).

For Canada—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and45% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about −42�C(−44�F).

NOTICE

Do not use plain water alone.

Check the status of the hybrid battery.

See page 4 for the status of the hybridbattery. If the hybrid battery is discharged,the hybrid system will not start up.

Check the condition of the 12 volt bat-tery and cables.

Cold temperatures lower the performanceof the 12 volt battery, so it must be in topshape to provide enough power for winterstarting. Section 7−3 tells you how tovisually inspect the 12 volt battery. YourToyota dealer and most service stationswill be pleased to check the charge level.

Make sure the engine oil viscosity issuitable for the cold weather.

See page 386 in Section 7−2 for recom-mended viscosity. Leaving a heavy sum-mer oil in your vehicle during wintermonths may cause harder starting. If youare not sure about which oil to use, callyour Toyota dealer—they will be pleasedto help.

Keep the door locks from freezing.

Squirt lock de−icer or glycerine into thelocks to keep them from freezing.

Winter driving tips


329


Use a washer fluid containing an anti-freeze solution.

This product is available at your Toyotadealer and most auto parts stores. Followthe manufacturer’s directions for howmuch to mix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or anyother substitute because it may dam-age your vehicle’s paint.

Do not use your parking brake whenthere is a possibility it could freeze.

When parking, put the transmission into“P” and block the rear wheels. Do not usethe parking brake, or snow or water accu-mulated in and around the parking brakemechanism may freeze, making it hard torelease.

Keep ice and snow from accumulatingunder the fenders.

Ice and snow built up under your fenderscan make steering difficult. During badwinter driving, stop and check under thefenders occasionally.

Depending on where you are driving,we recommend you carry some emer-gency equipment.

Some of the things you might put in thevehicle are tire chains, window scraper,bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,jumper cables, etc.

Your vehicle is not designed to bedinghy towed (with four wheels on theground) behind a motorhome.

NOTICE

Do not tow your vehicle with fourwheels on the ground. This maycause serious damage to your vehicle.

Dinghy towing


330


Your vehicle is designed primarily as apassenger−and−load carrying vehicle. Tow-ing a trailer will have an adverse effect onhandling, performance, braking, durabilityand driving economy (fuel consumption,etc.). Your safety and satisfaction dependon the proper use of correct equipmentand cautious driving habits. For yoursafety and the safety of others, you mustnot overload your vehicle or trailer. Toyotawarranties do not apply to damage ormalfunction caused by towing a trailer forcommercial purposes. Ask your localToyota dealer for further details beforetowing.

NOTICE

When towing a trailer, be sure to con-sult your Toyota dealer for further in-formation on additional requirementssuch as a towing kit, etc.

WEIGHT LIMITS

Before towing, make sure the total trail-er weight, gross combination weight,gross vehicle weight, gross axle weightand trailer tongue load are all withinthe limits.

The total trailer weight and tongue loadcan be measured with platform scalesfound at a highway weighing station, build-ing supply company, trucking company,junk yard, etc.

CAUTION

� The total trailer weight (trailerweight plus its cargo load) mustnot exceed the following. Exceedingthis weight is dangerous.

Without towing package905 kg (2000 lb.)

With towing package1588 kg (3500 lb.)

If towing a trailer and cargo weigh-ing over 907 kg (2000 lb.), it isnecessary to use a sway controldevice with sufficient capacity. Thegross combination weight (sum ofyour vehicle weight plus its loadand the total trailer weight) mustnot exceed the following.



� Trailer hitch assemblies have differ-ent weight capacities established bythe hitch manufacturer. Even thoughthe vehicle may be physically capa-ble of towing a higher weight, theoperator must determine the maxi-mum weight rating of the particularhitch assembly and never exceedthe maximum weight rating speci-fied for the trailer hitch. Exceedingthe maximum weight rating set bythe trailer hitch manufacturer cancause an accident resulting in seri-ous personal injuries.

Trailer towing


331


� The gross vehicle weight must notexceed the Gross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR) indicated on theCertification Label. The gross ve-hicle weight is the sum of weightsof the unloaded vehicle, driver, pas-sengers, luggage, hitch and trailertongue load. It also includes theweight of any special equipmentinstalled on your vehicle.

� The load on either the front or rearaxle resulting from distribution ofthe gross vehicle weight on bothaxles must not exceed the GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR) listedon the Certification Label.

Tongue load

Total trailer weight� 100 = 9 to 11%

Total trailer weight Tongue load

� The trailer cargo load should bedistributed so that the tongue loadis 9 to 11% of the total trailerweight, not exceed the following.



Never load the trailer with moreweight in the back than in thefront. About 60% of the trailer loadshould be in the front half of thetrailer and the remaining 40% in therear.

HITCHES

� If you wish to install a trailer hitch, youshould consult with your Toyota dealer.

� Use only a hitch recommended by thehitch manufacturer and the one whichconforms to the total trailer weightrequirement.

� The hitch must be bolted securely tothe vehicle frame and installed accord-ing to the hitch manufacturer’s instruc-tions.

� The hitch ball and king pin should havea light coat of grease.

� Toyota recommends removing the trail-er hitch whenever you are not towinga trailer to reduce the possibility ofadditional damage caused by the hitchif your vehicle is struck from behind.After removing the hitch, seal anymounting holes in the vehicle body toprevent entry of pollutants such as ex-haust fumes, dirt, water, etc.

NOTICE

Do not use axle−mounted hitches asthey can cause damage to the axlehousing, wheel bearings, wheels ortires.


332


BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS

� Toyota recommends trailers withbrakes that conform to any applica-ble federal and state/provincial regu-lations.

� A safety chain must always be usedbetween the towing vehicle and thetrailer. Leave sufficient slack in thechain for turns. The chain shouldcross under the trailer tongue toprevent the tongue from dropping tothe ground in case it becomes dam-aged or separated. For correct safetychain procedures, follow the hitch ortrailer manufacturer’s recommenda-tions.

CAUTION

� If the total trailer weight exceeds453 kg (1000 lb.), trailer brakes arerequired.

� Never tap into your vehicle’s hy-draulic system as it would lower itsbraking effectiveness.

� Never tow a trailer without using asafety chain securely attached toboth the trailer and the vehicle. Ifdamage occurs to the coupling unitor hitch ball, there is danger of thetrailer wandering over into anotherlane.

TIRES

� Ensure that your vehicle’s tires areproperly inflated. See page 390 in Sec-tion 7−2 and page 415 in Section 8 forinstructions.

� The trailer tires should be inflated tothe pressure recommended by the trail-er manufacturer in respect to the totaltrailer weight.

TRAILER LIGHTS

� Your vehicle is equipped with a wireharness stored in the rear end underbody. Some models are fitted with asocket for trailer lights under the rearbumper. Use either of them to connectand operate the trailer lights. However,the trailer lights must comply with fed-eral, state/provincial and local regula-tions. See your local recreational ve-hicle dealer or rental agency for thecorrect type of wiring and relays foryour trailer. Check for correct operationof the turn signals and stop lights eachtime you hitch up. Direct splicing maydamage your vehicle’s electrical systemand cause a malfunction of your lights.


333


BREAK−IN SCHEDULE

� Toyota recommends that you do nottow a trailer with a new vehicle or avehicle with any new power train com-ponent (engine, traction motor, trans-mission, wheel bearings, etc.) for thefirst 800 km (500 miles) of driving.

MAINTENANCE

� If you tow a trailer, your vehicle willrequire more frequent maintenance dueto the additional load. For this informa-tion, please refer to the scheduledmaintenance information in the “Sched-uled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’sManual Supplement”.

� Retighten all fixing bolts of the towingball and bracket after approximately1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.

PRE−TOWING SAFETY CHECK

� Check that your vehicle remains levelwhen a loaded or unloaded trailer ishitched. Do not drive if the vehicle hasan abnormal nose−up or nose−downcondition, and check for impropertongue load, overload, worn suspensionor other possible causes.

� Make sure the trailer cargo is securelyloaded so that it cannot shift.

� Check that your rear view mirrors con-form to any applicable federal, state/provincial or local regulations. If not,install the rear view mirrors requiredfor towing purposes.

TRAILER TOWING TIPS

When towing a trailer, your vehicle willhandle differently than when not tow-ing. The three main causes of vehicle−trailer accidents are driver error, exces-sive speed and improper trailer loading.Keep these in mind when towing:

� Before starting out, check operation ofthe lights and all vehicle−trailer connec-tions. After driving a short distance,stop and recheck the lights and con-nections. Before actually towing a trail-er, practice turning, stopping and back-ing with a trailer in an area away fromtraffic until you learn the feel.

� Backing with a trailer is difficult andrequires practice. Grip the bottom ofthe steering wheel and move your handto the left to move the trailer to theleft. Move your hand to the right tomove the trailer to the right. (This pro-cedure is generally opposite to thatwhen backing without a trailer.) Also,just turn the steering wheel a little ata time, avoiding sharp or prolongedturning. Have someone guide you whenbacking to reduce the risk of an acci-dent.

� Because stopping distance may be in-creased, vehicle−to−vehicle distanceshould be increased when towing atrailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) ofspeed, allow at least one vehicle andtrailer length between you and the ve-hicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking asyou may skid, resulting in jackknifingand loss of control. This is especiallytrue on wet or slippery surfaces.

� Avoid jerky starts or sudden accelera-tion.

� Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns.The trailer could hit your vehicle in atight turn. Slow down before making aturn to avoid the necessity of suddenbraking.


334


� Remember that when making a turn,the trailer wheels will be closer thanthe vehicle wheels to the inside of theturn. Therefore, compensate for this bymaking a larger than normal turningradius with your vehicle.

� Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-versely affect handling of your vehicleand trailer, causing sway. Pay attentionto the rear from time to time to pre-pare yourself for being passed by largetrucks or buses, which may cause yourvehicle and trailer to sway. If swayinghappens, firmly grip the steering wheeland reduce speed immediately butgradually. Never increase speed. Steerstraight ahead. If you make no extremecorrection with the steering or brakes,the vehicle and trailer will stabilize.

� Be careful when passing other ve-hicles. Passing requires considerabledistance. After passing a vehicle, donot forget the length of your trailer andbe sure you have plenty of room be-fore changing lanes.

� Because of the added load of the trail-er, your vehicle’s engine may overheaton hot days (at temperatures over30�C [85�F]) when going up a long orsteep grade with a trailer. If the enginecoolant temperature gauge indicatesoverheating, immediately turn off the airconditioning (if in use), pull off the roadand stop in a safe spot. Refer to “Ifyour vehicle overheats” on page 341 inSection 4.

� Always place wheel blocks under boththe vehicle and trailer wheels whenparking. Apply the parking brake firmly.Put the transmission in “P”. Avoid park-ing on a slope with a trailer, but if itcannot be avoided, do so only afterperforming the following:

1. Apply the brakes and hold.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks un-der both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place,release your brakes slowly until theblocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the parking brake firmly.

5. Shift into “P” and turn off the hybridsystem.

When restarting out after parking on aslope:

1. With the transmission in the “P” posi-tion, start the hybrid system. Be sureto keep the brake pedal depressed.

2. Shift into gear.

3. Release the parking brake and brakepedal and slowly pull or back awayfrom the wheel blocks. Stop and applyyour brakes.

4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.


335


CAUTION

� Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) orthe posted towing speed limit,whichever is lower. Because insta-bility (swaying) of a towing vehicle−trailer combination usually in-creases as the speed increases, ex-ceeding 72 km/h (45 mph) maycause loss of control.

� Slow down and downshift beforedescending steep or long downhillgrades. Do not make sudden down-shifts.

� Avoid holding the brake pedal downtoo long or too frequently. Thiscould cause the brakes to overheatand result in reduced braking effi-ciency.

Improving fuel economy is easy—just takeit easy. It will help make your vehicle lastlonger, too. Here are some specific tipson how to save money on both fuel andrepairs:

� Keep your tires inflated at the cor-rect pressure. Underinflation causestire wear and wastes fuel. See page390 in Section 7−2 for instructions.

� Do not carry unnecessary weight inyour vehicle. Excess weight puts aheavier load on the hybrid system,causing greater fuel consumption.

� Accelerate slowly and smoothly.Avoid jackrabbit starts.

� Avoid continuous changes of speed.Stop−and−go driving wastes electricpower and fuel.

� Avoid unnecessary stopping andbraking. Maintain a steady pace. Tryto time the traffic signals so you onlyneed to stop as little as possible ortake advantage of through streets toavoid traffic lights. Keep a proper dis-tance from other vehicles to avoid sud-den braking. This will also reduce wearon your brakes.

� When parking, be sure to put thetransmission into the “P” position. Inthe “N” position, the gasoline engineoperates but electricity cannot be gen-erated. The hybrid battery will be dis-charged requiring unnecessary enginepower to recharge.

� Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jamswhenever possible.

� Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal. This causes premature wear,overheating and poor fuel economy.

� Maintain a moderate speed on high-ways. The faster you drive, the greaterthe fuel consumption. By reducing yourspeed, you will cut down on fuel con-sumption.

� Keep the front wheels in properalignment. Avoid hitting curbs andslow down on rough roads. Improperalignment not only causes faster tirewear but also puts an extra load onthe hybrid system, which, in turn,wastes fuel.

� Keep the bottom of your vehicle freefrom mud, etc. This not only lessensweight but also helps prevent corro-sion.

How to save fuel and makeyour vehicle last longer


336


� Keep your vehicle tuned−up and intop shape. A dirty air cleaner, improp-er valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oiland grease,brakes not adjusted, etc. alllower engine performance and contrib-ute to poor fuel economy. For longerlife of all parts and lower operatingcosts, keep all maintenance work onschedule, and if you often drive undersevere conditions, see that your vehiclereceives more frequent maintenance.(For scheduled maintenance informa-tion, please refer to the “ScheduledMaintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manu-al Supplement”.)

CAUTION

Never turn off the hybrid system tocoast down hills. Your power steeringand brake booster do not functionwhen the hybrid system is off. Inaddition, the emission control systemoperates properly only when the hy-brid system is on.


337


IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCYIn case of an emergencyIf your vehicle will not start 338. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your hybrid system stalls while driving 341. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle overheats 341. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you have a flat tire 342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle becomes stuck 352. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If your vehicle needs to be towed 353. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you cannot shift transmission selector lever 358. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you lose your keys 358. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . If you lose your wireless remote control transmitter 359. . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 4


338


Before making these checks, make sureyou have sufficient fuel and that you havefollowed the correct starting procedure giv-en in “How to start the hybrid system” onpage 324 in Section 3. If your vehicle isequipped with the engine immobilizer sys-tem, also check whether the other keyswill start the hybrid system. If they work,your key may be broken. Have the keychecked at your Toyota dealer. If none ofyour keys work, there may be a malfunc-tion in the immobilizer system. Call yourToyota dealer. (See “Keys (with engineimmobilizer system)” on page 22 in Sec-tion 1−2.)

If the instrument cluster dims or theinstrument cluster display turns offwith the ignition on...

1. Check that the 12 volt battery terminalsare tight and clean.

2. If the 12 volt battery terminals areO.K., the 12 volt battery is discharged.You may try jump starting. See “(b)Jump starting” on page 338 for furtherinstructions.

NOTICE

Hybrid vehicles cannot be push−started.

If the instrument cluster displays withnormal brightness levels with the igni-tion on...

The hybrid system may be faulty. Contactyour Toyota dealer.

If the 12 volt battery is discharged, thehybrid system can be started by jumpstarting. Depending on the vehicle con-dition, however, the hybrid system maynot start.

To avoid serious injury and damage toyour vehicle which might result from anexplosion of the battery, acid burns,electrical burns, or damaged electroniccomponents, follow instructions careful-ly.

If you are unsure about how to follow thisprocedure, we strongly recommend thatyou seek the help of a competent me-chanic or towing service.

CAUTION

� Batteries contain sulfuric acidwhich is poisonous and corrosive.Wear protective safety glasses whenjump starting, and avoid spillingacid on your skin, clothing, or ve-hicle.

If your vehicle will not start—(a) Simple checks (b) Jump starting


339


� If you should accidentally get acidon yourself or in your eyes, removeany contaminated clothing and flushthe affected area with water im-mediately. Then get immediate medi-cal attention. If possible, continueto apply water with a sponge orcloth while en route to the medicaloffice.

� The gas normally produced by abattery will explode if a flame orspark is brought near. Use onlystandardized jumper cables and donot smoke or light a match whilejump starting.

NOTICE

The battery used for boosting mustbe 12 V. Do not jump start unless youare sure that the booster battery iscorrect.

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE

1. If the booster battery is installed inanother vehicle, make sure the vehiclesare not touching. Turn off all unneces-sary lights and accessories.

When boosting, use the battery ofmatching or higher quality. Any otherbattery may be difficult to jump startwith.

If jump starting is difficult, charge thebattery for several minutes.

2. If required, remove all the vent plugsfrom the booster and discharged batter-ies. Lay a cloth over the open ventson the batteries. (This helps reduce theexplosion hazard, personal injuries andburns.)

3. If the engine in the vehicle with thebooster battery is not running, start itand let it run for a few minutes. Duringjump starting, run the engine at about2000 rpm with the accelerator pedallightly depressed.

Dischargedbattery

Boosterbattery

Positiveterminal(“+” mark)

Jumper cablePositive terminal(“+”mark)

4. Make the cable connections in the or-der a, b, c, d.

a. Connect the clamp of the positive(red) jumper cable to the positive (+)terminal of the discharged 12 volt bat-tery.

b. Connect the clamp at the other endof the positive (red) jumper cable tothe positive (+) terminal of the boosterbattery.


340


Jumper cable

Boosterbattery

Dischargedbattery

Negative terminal(“−”mark)

c. Connect the clamp of the negative(black) jumper cable to the negative (−)terminal of the booster battery.

d. Connect the clamp at the other endof the negative (black) cable to a solid,stationary, unpainted metallic pointaway from the 12 volt battery (such asshown in the illustration). Do not con-nect it to or near any part that maymove when the hybrid system is star-ted.

The recommended connecting pointsare shown in the illustration.

CAUTION

When making the connections, toavoid serious injury, do not lean overthe battery or accidentally let thejumper cables or clamps touch any-thing except the correct battery termi-nals or the ground.

5. Start the hybrid system. Make sure the“READY” light is on.

If the “READY” light will not come onand the hybrid system will not startafter you recharge the battery, performthe following procedure. Turn the hybridsystem off. Open and close the driver’sdoor. Then start the hybrid system.

If the hybrid battery warning lightcomes on in the meter cluster, the hy-brid battery is also discharged. In thiscondition, the hybrid system will notstart. Contact your Toyota dealer.

6. Carefully disconnect the cables in theexact reverse order: the negative cableand then the positive cable.

7. Carefully dispose of the battery covercloths—they may now contain sulfuricacid.

8. If removed, replace all the battery ventplugs.

If the cause of the 12 volt battery dis-charging is not apparent (for example,lights left on), have the battery checkedby your Toyota dealer.


341


If the first start attempt is not success-ful...

Check that the clamp on the jumpercables are tight. Recharge the dischargedbattery with the jumper cables connectedfor several minutes and restart the hybridsystem in the normal way.

If the another attempt is not successful,the battery may be depleted. Have it ch-ecked at your Toyota dealer.

If your hybrid system stalls while driv-ing...

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keepinga straight line. Move cautiously off theroad to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or“LOCK”, and try starting the hybridsystem again.

If the hybrid system will not start, see “Ifyour vehicle will not start”.

CAUTION

When the hybrid system is not oper-ating, the power assist for the brakesand steering will not work, so steer-ing and braking will be much moredifficult than usual.

Any of the following may indicate thatthe hybrid system has overheated:

� The engine coolant temperaturegauge indicates overheating.

� A “WATER TEMP” warning messageappears on the multi−informationdisplay.

� A loss of power is experienced.

� A loud knocking or pinging noise isheard.

If the hybrid system overheats, followthe procedures below:

1. Pull safely off the road, stop the ve-hicle and turn on your emergencyflashers. Put the hybrid transmission in“P” and apply the parking brake. Turnoff the air conditioning if it is beingused.

2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of theradiator or reservoir, stop the hybridsystem. Wait until the steam subsidesbefore opening the hood. If there is nocoolant boiling over or steam, leave theignition turned on and make sure theelectric cooling fan is operating. If it isnot, turn the ignition off.

If your hybrid system stallswhile driving If your vehicle overheats


342


CAUTION

To help avoid personal injury, keepthe hood closed until there is nosteam. Escaping steam or coolant isa sign of very high pressure.

3. Look for obvious coolant leaks from theradiator, hoses, and under the vehicle.However, note that water draining fromthe air conditioning is normal if it hasbeen used.

CAUTION

When the hybrid system is on, keephands and clothing away from themoving fan.

4. If the coolant is leaking, stop the hy-brid system immediately. Call a Toyotadealer for assistance.

5. If there are no obvious leaks, checkthe coolant reservoir. If it is dry, addcoolant to the reservoir while the hy-brid system is on. Fill it about half full.For the coolant type, see “Coolant typeselection” on page 389 in Section 7−2.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to remove the radiatorcap when the hybrid system and ra-diator are hot. Serious injury couldresult from scalding hot fluid andsteam blown out under pressure.

6. After the coolant temperature hascooled to normal, again check the cool-ant level in the reservoir. If necessary,bring it up to half full again. Seriouscoolant loss indicates a leak in thesystem. You should have it checked assoon as possible at your Toyota dealer.

1. Reduce your speed gradually,keeping a straight line. Move cau-tiously off the road to a safe placewell away from the traffic. Avoidstopping on the center divider ofa highway. Park on a level spotwith firm ground.

2. Stop the hybrid system and turnon your emergency flashers.

3. Firmly set the parking brake andput the transmission in “P”.

4. Have everyone get out of the ve-hicle on the side away from traffic.

5. Read the following instructionsthoroughly.

If you have a flat tire—


343


CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observethe following to reduce the possi-bility of death or serious injury:� Follow jacking instructions.� Do not put any part of your

body under the vehicle sup-ported by the jack. Otherwise,personal injury may occur.

� Do not start the hybrid systemwhile your vehicle is supportedby the jack.

� Stop the vehicle on a level firmground, firmly set the parkingbrake and put the transmissionin “P”. Block the wheel diago-nally opposite to the one beingchanged if necessary.

� Make sure to set the jack prop-erly in the jack point. Raisingthe vehicle with jack improper-ly positioned will damage thevehicle or may allow the ve-hicle to fall off the jack andcause personal injury.

� Never get under the vehiclewhen the vehicle is supportedby the jack alone.

� Use the jack only for liftingyour vehicle during wheelchanging.

� Do not raise the vehicle withsomeone in the vehicle.

� When raising the vehicle, donot place any objects on topof or underneath the jack.

� Raise the vehicle only highenough to remove and changethe tire.

NOTICE

Do not continue driving with adeflated tire. Driving even ashort distance can damage atire and wheel beyond repair.


344


Vehicles with third seat

Vehicles without third seat

1. Get the required tools andspare tire.1. Spare tire2. Front towing eyelet∗

3. Jack handle4. Wheel nut wrench5. Adapter socket6. Jack

To prepare yourself for an emergency,you should familiarize yourself withthe use of the jack, each of the toolsand their storage locations.∗: For details, see “—Emergency tow-ing” on page 355 in this Section.

Before removing the jack, unhook thetightening strap.

—Required tools and sparetire


345


To remove the jack, rotate the jackjoint by hand until the jack becomesfree.

To store the jack, rotate the jack jointuntil the jack is firmly secured.After storing the jack, make sure it issecurely held by the tightening strap.This prevents the jack from flying for-ward during a collision or suddenstop.

To detach the spare tire:1. Remove the inside spare tire cov-

er by turning it counterclockwise.


346


2. Remove the cover as shown in theillustration.

3. Put the adapter socket (for remov-ing a spare tire) on the spare tireclamp bolt.

4. Threading the jack handle throughthe adapter socket, turn the jackhandle counterclockwise. Contin-ue until the spare tire is loweredcompletely to the ground.


347


5. Pull out the spare tire and standit up against the bumper.

6. Remove the holding bracket andthe spare tire cover.

2. Block the wheel diagonally op-posite the flat tire to keep thevehicle from rolling when it isjacked up.

When blocking the wheel, place awheel block in front of one of the frontwheels or behind one of the rearwheels.

—Blocking the wheel


348


3. Loosen all the wheel nuts.Always loosen the wheel nuts beforeraising the vehicle.Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwiseto loosen. To get maximum leverage,fit the wrench to the nut so that thehandle is on the right side, as shownabove. Grab the wrench near the endof the handle and pull up on the han-dle. Be careful that the wrench doesnot slip off the nut.Do not remove the nuts yet—just un-screw them about one−half turn.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on thebolts or nuts. The nuts may looseand the wheels may fall off,which could cause a serious ac-cident.

4. Position the jack at the correctjack point as shown.

Make sure the jack is positioned ona level and solid place.

—Loosening wheel nuts —Positioning the jack


349


5. After making sure that no oneis in the vehicle, raise it highenough so that the spare tirecan be installed.

Remember you will need more groundclearance when putting on the sparetire than when removing the flat tire.To raise the vehicle, insert the jackhandle into the jack (it is a loose fit)and turn it clockwise. As the jacktouches the vehicle and begins to lift,double−check that it is properly posi-tioned.

CAUTION

Never get under the vehicle whenthe vehicle is supported by thejack alone.

6. Remove the wheel nuts andchange tires.

Lift the flat tire straight off and put itaside.Remove the wheel ornament from theflat tire and replace it on the sparewheel.Roll the spare wheel into position andalign the holes in the wheel with thebolts. Then lift up the wheel and getat least the top bolt started throughits hole. Wiggle the tire and press itback over the other bolts.

—Raising your vehicle —Changing wheels


350


Before putting on wheels, remove anycorrosion on the mounting surfaceswith a wire brush or such. Installationof wheels without good metal−to−met-al contact at the mounting surface cancause wheel nuts to loosen andeventually cause a wheel to come offwhile driving.

7. Reinstall all the wheel nuts fin-ger tight.

Reinstall the wheel nuts and tightenthem as much as you can by hand.Press back on the tire back and seeif you can tighten them more.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on thebolts or nuts. Doing so may leadto overtightening the nuts anddamaging the bolts. The nutsmay loose and the wheels mayfall off, which could cause a seri-ous accident. If there is oil orgrease on any bolt or nut, cleanit.

—Reinstalling wheel nuts


351


8. Lower the vehicle completelyand tighten the wheel nuts.

Turn the jack handle counterclock-wise to lower the vehicle.Use only the wheel nut wrench andturn it clockwise to tighten the nuts.Do not use other tools or any addition-al leverage other than your hands,such as a hammer, pipe or your foot.Make sure the wrench is securely en-gaged over the nut.

Tighten each nut a little at a time inthe order shown. Repeat the processuntil all the nuts are tight.

CAUTION

� When lowering the vehicle,make sure all portions of yourbody and all other personsaround will not be injured asthe vehicle is lowered to theground.

� Have the wheel nuts tightenedwith torque wrench to 103 N·m(10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf), as soonas possible after changingwheels. Otherwise, the nutsmay loosen and the wheelsmay fall off, which could causea serious accident.

� Do not attach a heavily dam-aged plastic wheel ornament.It may fly off the wheel andcause accidents while the ve-hicle is moving.

9. Check the air pressure of the re-placed tire.

Adjust the air pressure to the specifi-cation designated on page 415 inSection 8. If the pressure is lower,drive slowly to the nearest servicestation and fill to the correct pressure.Do not forget to reinstall the tire infla-tion valve cap as dirt and moisturecould get into the valve core andpossibly cause air leakage. If the capis missing, have a new one put on assoon as possible.10.Restow all the tools, jack and

flat tire securely.As soon after changing wheels aspossible, tighten the wheel nuts to thetorque specified on page 415 in Sec-tion 8 with a torque wrench. Have atechnician repair the flat tire and re-place the spare tire with it.

—Lowering your vehicle —After changing wheels


352


CAUTION

Before driving, make sure all thetools, jack and flat tire are se-curely in place in their storagelocation to reduce the possibilityof personal injury during a colli-sion or sudden braking.

If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,mud, sand, etc., then you may attemptto rock the vehicle free by moving itforward and backward.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to rock the vehiclefree by moving it forward and back-ward if people or objects are any-where near the vehicle. During therocking operation the vehicle maysuddenly move forward or backwardas it becomes unstuck, causing injuryor damage to nearby people or ob-jects.

NOTICE

If you rock your vehicle, observe thefollowing precautions to prevent dam-age to the hybrid transmission andother parts.

� Do not depress the accelerator ped-al while shifting the selector leveror before the transmission is com-pletely shifted to forward or reversegear.

� Avoid spinning the wheels.

� If your vehicle remains stuck afterrocking the vehicle several times,consider other ways such as tow-ing.

If your vehicle becomes stuck


353


(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

—From front

—From rear

(b) Using flat bed truck

Front wheel drive models

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

—From front

—From rear


All wheel drive models

If towing is necessary, we recommendyou to have it done by your Toyotadealer or a commercial tow truck ser-vice. In consultation with them, haveyour vehicle towed using either (a) or(b).

Only when you cannot receive a towingservice from a Toyota dealer or com-mercial tow truck service, tow your ve-hicle carefully in accordance with theinstructions given in “—Emergency tow-ing” on page 355 in this Section.

Proper equipment will help ensure thatyour vehicle is not damaged while beingtowed. Commercial operators are generallyaware of the state/provincial and locallaws pertaining to towing.

Your vehicle can be damaged if it istowed incorrectly. Although most operatorsknow the correct procedure, it is possibleto make a mistake. To avoid damage toyour vehicle, make sure the following pre-cautions are observed. If necessary, showthis page to the tow truck driver.

If your vehicle needs to betowed—


354


CAUTION

If your vehicle needs to be towedwhen in an accident, do it with thefront wheels raised (front wheel drivemodels) or all four wheels raised (allmodels). If the wheels with the trac-tion motor are on the ground whentowing, the motor may continue togenerate electricity. This may causethe electricity leakage. Depending onthe severity of the damage, electricityleakage may cause fire.

TOWING PRECAUTIONS:

Use a safety chain system for all towing,and abide by the state/provincial and locallaws. The wheels and axle on the groundmust be in good condition. If they aredamaged, use a towing dolly.

Front wheel drive models—

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

From front—Release the parking brake.

NOTICE

When lifting wheels, take care to en-sure adequate ground clearance fortowing at the opposite end of theraised vehicle. Otherwise, the bumperand/or underbody of the towed vehiclewill be damaged during towing.

From rear—

Use a towing dolly under the front wheels.

NOTICE

Never tow a vehicle from the rearwith the front wheels on the ground,as this may cause serious damage tothe transmission.


All wheel drive models—

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

Use a towing dolly under the wheels notlifted by the truck.


(c) Towing with sling type truck

All models—

(c) Towing with sling type truck

NOTICE

Do not tow with sling type truck, ei-ther from the front or rear. This maycause body damage.


355


If towing is necessary, we recommendyou to have it done by your Toyotadealer or a commercial tow truck ser-vice.

If towing service is not available in anemergency, your vehicle may be tempo-rarily towed at less than 30 km/h (18mph) by a cable or chain secured toone of the emergency towing eyelets onthe front of the vehicle. Use extremecaution when towing the vehicle.

To install the front towing eyelet, see“—Installing front towing eyelet” on page356 in this Section.

NOTICE

� Only use specified towing eyelet;otherwise your vehicle may be dam-aged.

� Never tow a vehicle from the rearwith four wheels on the ground.This may cause serious damage tothe transmission.

A driver must be in the vehicle to steerit and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done onlyon hard−surfaced roads for a short dis-tance and at low speeds. Also, thewheels, axles, drive train, steering andbrakes must all be in good condition.

CAUTION

Use extreme caution when towing ve-hicles. Avoid sudden starts or erraticdriving maneuvers which would placeexcessive stress on the emergencytowing eyelet and towing cable orchain. The eyelet and towing cable orchain may break and cause seriousinjury or damage.

NOTICE

Use only a cable or chain specificallyintended for use in towing vehicles.Securely fasten the cable or chain tothe towing eyelet provided.

Before towing, release the parking brakeand put the transmission in “N”. The keymust be in “ACC” (hybrid system off) or“ON” (hybrid system on).

CAUTION

When the hybrid system is off, thepower assist for the brakes and steer-ing will not work so steering andbraking will be much more difficultthan usual.

—Emergency towing


356


1. Remove the front towing eyelet coveron the front bumper by pushing theoutside of the cover.

2. Use the front towing eyelet in the lug-gage compartment. Secure it to thehole on the bumper by turning clock-wise.

For the towing eyelet location, see“—Required tools and spare tire” onpage 344 in this Section.

3. Tighten the front towing eyelet securelyby a wheel nut wrench.

CAUTION

When installing the eyelet on the ve-hicle, be sure to tighten the fronteyelet securely. If the eyelet is loose,it may come off when being towedand result in death or serious injury.

—Installing front towing eyelet


357


� Before emergency towing, check thatthe eyelet is not broken or damagedand that the installation bolts are notloose.

� Fasten the towing cable or chain se-curely to the eyelet.

� Do not jerk the eyelet. Apply steadyand even force.

� To avoid damaging the eyelet, do notpull from the side or at a verticalangle. Always pull straight ahead.

CAUTION

If the emergency towing eyelet isused to get out when your vehiclebecomes struck in mud, sand or oth-er condition from which the vehiclecannot be driven out under its ownpower, make sure to observe the pre-cautions mentioned below. Otherwise,excessive stress will be put on theeyelet and the towing cable or chainmay break, causing serious injury ordamage.

� If the towing vehicle can hardlymove, do not forcibly continue thetowing. Contact your Toyota dealeror a commercial tow truck servicefor assistance.

� Tow the vehicle as straight aheadas possible.

� Keep away from the vehicle duringtowing.

The following methods are effective to getout when your vehicle is struck in mud,sand or other condition from which thevehicle cannot be driven out under its ownpower. Use extreme caution when towingvehicles. In addition, keep away from thevehicles and towing cable or chain whentowing.

� Remove the soil and sand in the frontand the back of the tires.

� Place a stone or wood under the tires.

—Emergency towing eyeletprecautions

—Tips for towing a stuckvehicle


358


If you cannot shift the selector leverout of the “P” position to other posi-tions even though the brake pedal isdepressed, use the shift lock overridebutton as follows:

1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK”position. Make sure the parkingbrake is applied.

2. Pry up the cover with a flatheadscrewdriver or equivalent.

3. Start the hybrid system. For yoursafety, keep the brake pedal de-pressed.

4. With pushing down the shift lockoverride button, shift out of the “P”position while depressing the brakepedal.

As the hybrid system starts only with thetransmission in the “P” position, put theselector lever in “P” whenever starting thesystem.

Be sure to have the system checked byyour Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

You can purchase a new key at yourToyota dealer if you can give them thekey number. If your vehicle is equippedwith the engine immobilizer system, thedealer will also need your master key.

Vehicles with engine immobilizer system—Even if you lose only one key, contactyour Toyota dealer to make a new key. Ifyou lose all your master keys, you cannotmake new keys; the whole engine immobi-lizer system must be replaced.

See the suggestion given in “Keys” onpage 22 in Section 1−2.

If your keys are locked in the vehicle andyou cannot get a duplicate, many Toyotadealers can still open the door for you,using their special tools. If you mustbreak a window to get in, we suggestbreaking the smallest side window be-cause it is the least expensive to replace.Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts fromthe glass.

If you cannot shifttransmission selector lever If you lose your keys


359


You can purchase a new wireless re-mote control transmitter at your Toyotadealer.

Have the registered identification numbersof your transmitters deleted from your ve-hicle by your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible to avoid the possibility of theft oran accident. Then, have the identificationnumber of your new transmitter registered.At the same time, you must bring all ofthe remaining transmitters to have themregistered again as well.

You can use the wireless remote controlsystem with the new transmitter. Contactyour Toyota dealer for detailed information.

If you lose your wirelessremote control transmitter


360



361


CORROSION PREVENTION ANDAPPEARANCE CARECorrosion prevention and appearance careProtecting your Toyota from corrosion 362. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Washing and waxing your Toyota 363. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning the interior 365. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 5


362


Toyota, through the diligent research, de-sign and use of the most advancedtechnology available, helps prevent corro-sion and provides you with the finest qual-ity vehicle construction. Now, it is up toyou. Proper care of your Toyota can helpensure long−term corrosion prevention.

The most common causes of corrosionto your vehicle are:

� The accumulation of road salt, dirt andmoisture in hard−to−reach areas underthe vehicle.

� Chipping of paint, or undercoatingcaused by minor accidents or bystones and gravel.

Care is especially important if you livein particular areas or operate your ve-hicle under certain environmental condi-tions:

� Road salt or dust control chemicals willaccelerate corrosion, as will the pres-ence of salt in the air near the sea−coast or in areas of industrial pollution.

� High humidity accelerates corrosion es-pecially when temperatures range justabove the freezing point.

� Wetness or dampness to certain partsof your vehicle for an extended periodof time, may cause corrosion eventhough other parts of the vehicle maybe dry.

� High ambient temperatures can causecorrosion to those components of thevehicle which do not dry quickly due tolack of proper ventilation.

The above signifies the necessity to keepyour vehicle, particularly the underside, asclean as possible and to repair any dam-age to paint or protective coatings assoon as possible.

To help prevent corrosion on yourToyota, follow these guidelines:

Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, ofcourse, necessary to keep your vehicleclean by regular washing, but to preventcorrosion, the following points should beobserved:

� If you drive on salted roads in thewinter or if you live near the ocean,you should hose off the undercarriageat least once a month to minimize cor-rosion.

� Pay particular attention to the vehicle’sunderside and wheel housings as it isdifficult to see all the mud and dirt. Itwill do more harm than good to simplywet the mud and debris without remov-ing. The lower edge of doors, rockerpanels and frame members have drainholes which should not be allowed toclog with dirt as trapped water in theseareas can cause corrosion.

� Wash the underside of the vehicle thor-oughly when winter is over.

See “Washing and waxing your Toyota” onpage 363 for more tips.

Check the condition of your vehicle’spaint and trim. If you find any chips orscratches in the paint, touch them up im-mediately to prevent corrosion from start-ing. If the chips or scratches have gonethrough the bare metal, have a qualifiedbody shop make the repair.

Protecting your Toyota fromcorrosion


363


Check the interior of your vehicle. Wa-ter and dirt can accumulate under thefloor mats and could cause corrosion. Oc-casionally check under the mats to makesure the area is dry. Be particularly care-ful when transporting chemicals, cleans-ers, fertilizers, salt, etc.; these should betransported in proper containers. If a spillor leak should occur, immediately cleanand dry the area.

Use mud shields on your wheels. If youdrive on salted or gravel roads, mudshields help protect your vehicle. Full−sizeshields, which come as near to the groundas possible, are the best. We recommendthat the fittings and the area where theshields are installed be treated to resistcorrosion. Your Toyota dealer will behappy to assist in supplying and installingthe shields if they are recommended foryour area.

Keep your vehicle in a well ventilatedgarage or a roofed place. Do not parkyour vehicle in a damp, poorly venti-lated garage. If you wash your vehicle inthe garage, or if you drive it covered withwater or snow, your garage may be sodamp as to cause corrosion. Even if yourgarage is heated, a wet vehicle can cor-rode if the ventilation is poor.

Your Toyota is a hybrid vehicle. Payparticular attention when washing yourToyota.

NOTICE

Before washing your Toyota, be sureto observe the following in order toavoid the risk of damage to your ve-hicle.

Do not splash water on the electriccomponents in the engine compart-ment. This may cause malfunction ofthe electric components.

Washing your Toyota

Keep your vehicle clean by regularwashing.

The following cases may cause weaknessto the paint or corrosion to the body andparts. Wash your vehicle as soon as pos-sible.

� When driving in a coastal area

� When driving on a road sprinkled withantifreeze

� When exposed to coal tar, tree sap,bird droppings and carcass of an insect

� When driving in areas where there isa lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust orchemical substances

� When the vehicle becomes remarkablydirty with dust and mud

Hand−washing your Toyota

Work in the shade and wait until thevehicle body is not warm to the touch.

CAUTION

� When cleaning under floor or chas-sis, be careful not to injure yourhands.

� Exhaust gases cause the exhaustpipe to become quite hot. Whenwashing the vehicle, be careful notto touch the pipe until it has cooledsufficiently, as touching a hot ex-haust pipe can cause burns.

1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Re-move any mud or road salt from theunderside of the vehicle or the wheelwells.

Washing and waxing yourToyota


364


2. Wash with a mild car−wash soap,mixed according to the manufacturer’sinstructions. Use a soft cotton mitt andkeep it wet by dipping it frequently intothe wash water. Do not rub hard—letthe soap and water remove the dirt.

Fuel filler door: Do not apply water (high−pressure car wash, for example) at ornear the fuel tank inlet with the fuel fillerdoor opened. If the water enters the airvent, you may experience trouble with re-fueling or rough engine idling.

Plastic wheel ornaments: The plasticwheel ornaments are damaged easily byorganic substances. If any organic sub-stances splash an ornament, be sure towash them off with water and check if theornament is damaged.

Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soapor neutral detergent.

Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do notscrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumperfaces are soft.

Exterior lights: Wash carefully. Do not useorganic substances or scrub them with ahard brush. This may damage the sur-faces of the lights.

Road tar: Remove with turpentine orcleaners that are marked safe for paintedsurfaces.

3. Rinse thoroughly—dried soap cancause streaking. In hot weather youmay need to rinse each section rightafter you wash it.

4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicleusing a clean soft cotton towel. Do notrub or press hard—you might scratchthe paint.

NOTICE

� Do not use organic substances(gasoline, kerosene, benzine orstrong solvents), which may be tox-ic or cause damage.

� Do not scrub any part of the ve-hicle with a hard brush, which maycause damage.

Automatic car wash

Your vehicle may be washed in an auto-matic car wash, but remember that thepaint can be scratched by some type ofbrushes, unfiltered washing water, or thewashing process itself. Scratching reducespaint durability and gloss, especially ondarker colors. The manager of the carwash should be able to advise you wheth-er the process is safe for the paint onyour vehicle.

Waxing your Toyota

Polishing and waxing is recommendedto maintain the original beauty of yourToyota’s finish.

Once a month or if the vehicle surfacedoes not repel water well, apply wax.

1. Always wash and dry the vehicle be-fore you begin waxing, even if you areusing a combined cleaner and wax.

2. Use a good quality polish and wax. Ifthe finish has become extremely weath-ered, use a car−cleaning polish, fol-lowed by a separate wax. Carefully fol-low the manufacturer’s instructions andprecautions. Be sure to polish and waxthe chrome trim as well as the paint.


365


Windshield washer nozzles: Make surethat the nozzles do not become blockedwhen waxing. If a nozzle becomesblocked, contact your Toyota dealer tohave the vehicle serviced.

NOTICE

If a nozzle becomes blocked, do nottry to clear it with a pin or otherobject. The nozzle will be damaged.

Exterior lights: Do not apply wax on thesurfaces of the lights. Wax may causedamage to the lenses. If you accidentallyput wax on the light surfaces, wipe orwash it off.

3. Wax the vehicle again when waterdoes not bead but remains on the sur-face in large patches.

CAUTION

� Vehicles with side airbags and cur-tain shield airbags:

Be careful not to splash water orspill liquid on the floor. This mayprevent the side airbag and curtainshield airbag from activating cor-rectly, resulting in serious injury.

� Do not wash the vehicle floor withwater, or allow water to get ontothe floor when cleaning the vehicleinterior or exterior. Water may getinto audio components or otherelectrical components above or un-der the floor carpet (or mat) andcause a malfunction; and it maycause body corrosion.

Vinyl interior

The vinyl upholstery may be easilycleaned with a mild soap or detergentand water.

First vacuum over the upholstery to re-move loose dirt. Then, using a sponge orsoft cloth, apply the soap solution to thevinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a fewminutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirtand wipe off the soap with a clean dampcloth. If all the dirt do not come off, re-peat the procedure. Commercial foaming−type vinyl cleaners are also availablewhich work well. Follow the manufacturer’sinstructions.

NOTICE

Do not use solvent, thinner, gasolineor window cleaner on the interior.

Cleaning the interior


366


Carpets

Use a good foam−type shampoo toclean the carpets.

Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to removeas much dirt as possible. Several types offoam cleaners are available; some are inaerosol cans and others are powders orliquids which you mix with water to pro-duce a foam. To shampoo the carpets,use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.Rub in overlapping circles.

Do not apply water—the best results areobtained by keeping the carpet as dry aspossible. Read the shampoo instructionsand follow them closely.

Seat belts

The seat belts may be cleaned withmild soap and water or with lukewarmwater.

Use a cloth or sponge. As you are clean-ing, check the belts for excessive wear,fraying, or cuts.

NOTICE

� Do not use dye or bleach on thebelts—it may weaken them.

� Do not use the belts until they be-come dry.

Windows

The windows may be cleaned with anyhousehold window cleaner.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rearwindow, be careful not to scratch ordamage the heater wires or connec-tors.

Air conditioning control panel, audiopanel, instrument panel, console panel,and switches

Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.

Soak a clean soft cloth in water or luke-warm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

NOTICE

� Do not use organic substances (sol-vents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.These chemicals can cause discol-oring, staining or peeling of thesurface.

� If you use cleaners or polishingagents, make sure their ingredientsdo not include the substances men-tioned above.

� If you use a liquid car freshener, donot apply the liquid onto the ve-hicle’s interior surfaces. It may con-tain the ingredients mentionedabove. Immediately clean any spillusing the method mentioned above.

Leather interior

The leather upholstery may be cleanedwith neutral detergent for wool.

Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampenedwith 5% solution of neutral detergent forwool. Then thoroughly wipe off all tracesof detergent with a clean damp cloth.

After cleaning or whenever any part of theleather gets wet, dry with a soft cleancloth. Allow the leather to dry in a venti-lated shaded area.


367


NOTICE

� If a stain should fail to come outwith a neutral detergent, apply acleaner that does not contain anorganic solvent.

� Never use organic substances suchas benzine, alcohol or gasoline, oralkaline or acid solutions for clean-ing the leather as these couldcause discoloring.

� Use of a nylon brush or syntheticfiber cloth, etc. may scratch thefine grained surface of the leather.

� Mildew may develop on soiled leath-er upholstery. Be especially carefulto avoid oil spots. Try to keep yourupholstery always clean.

� Long exposure to direct sunlightmay cause the leather surface toharden and shrink. Keep your ve-hicle in a shaded area, especially inthe summer.

� The interior of your vehicle is aptto heat up on hot summer days, soavoid placing on the upholsteryitems made of vinyl or plastic orcontaining wax as these tend tostick to leather when warm.

� Improper cleaning of the leather up-holstery could result in discolor-ation or staining.

If you have any questions about thecleaning of your Toyota, your localToyota dealer will be pleased to answerthem.


368



369


VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CAREVehicle maintenance and careMaintenance requirements 370. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General maintenance 371. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Does your vehicle need repairing? 373. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs 374. . . . . . . . .

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Sched-uled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

SECTION 6


370


Your Toyota vehicle has been designed forfewer maintenance requirements with long-er service intervals to save both your timeand money. However, each regular mainte-nance, as well as day−to−day care, ismore important than ever before to ensuresmooth, trouble−free, safe, and economicaldrivings.

It is the owner’s responsibility to makesure the specified maintenance, includinggeneral maintenance service, is performed.Note that both the new vehicle and emis-sion control system warranties specify thatproper maintenance and care must be per-formed. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment” for complete warranty information.

General maintenance

General maintenance items are those day−to−day care practices that are important toyour vehicle for proper operation. It is theowner’s responsibility to ensure that thegeneral maintenance items are performedregularly.

These checks or inspections can be doneeither by yourself or a qualified technician,or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will bepleased to do them at a nominal cost.

Scheduled maintenance

The scheduled maintenance items listed inthe “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement” are thoserequired to be serviced at regular inter-vals.

For details of your maintenance schedule,read the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

It is recommended that any replacementparts used for maintenance or for therepair of the emission control systembe Toyota supplied.

The owner may elect to use non−Toyotasupplied parts for replacement pur-poses without invalidating the emissioncontrol system warranty. However, useof replacement parts which are not ofequivalent quality may impair the effec-tiveness of the emission control sys-tems.

You may also elect to have mainte-nance, replacement, or repair of theemission control devices and systemperformed by any automotive repair es-tablishment or individual without invali-dating this warranty. See “Owner’s War-ranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’sManual Supplement” for complete war-ranty information.

Where to go for service?

Toyota technicians are well−trained spe-cialists and are kept up to date with thelatest service information through technicalbulletins, service tips, and in−dealershiptraining programs. They learn to work onToyotas before they work on your vehicle,rather than while they are working on it.

You can be confident that your Toyotadealer’s service department performs thebest job to meet the maintenance require-ments on your vehicle—reliably and eco-nomically.

Your copy of the repair order is proof thatall required maintenance has been per-formed for warranty coverage. If any prob-lems should arise with your vehicle whileunder warranty, your Toyota dealer willpromptly take care of it. Again, be sureto keep a copy of the repair order for anyservice performed on your Toyota.

What about do−it−yourself maintenance?

Many of the maintenance items are easyto do yourself if you have a little mechani-cal ability and a few basic automotivetools. Simple instructions for how to per-form them are presented on page 375 inSection 7.

Maintenance requirements


371


If you are a skilled do−it−yourself mechan-ic, the Toyota service manuals are recom-mended. Please be aware that do−it−your-self maintenance can affect your warrantycoverage. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment” for the details.

Listed below are the general maintenanceitems that should be performed as fre-quently as specified. In addition to check-ing the items listed, if you notice anyunusual noise, smell or vibration, youshould investigate the cause or take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer or a quali-fied service shop immediately. It is recom-mended that any problem you notice bebrought to the attention of your dealer orthe qualified service shop for their advice.

CAUTION

Make these checks only with ade-quate ventilation if the hybrid systemis turned on.

IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Items listed below should be checkedfrom time to time, e.g. each time whenrefueling.

Washer fluid

Make sure there is sufficient fluid in thetank. See page 403 in Section 7−3 foradditional information.

Coolant level

Make sure the coolant level is betweenthe “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the see−through reservoir when the hybrid systemis cold. See page 388 in Section 7−2 foradditional information.

Radiator, condenser and hoses

Check that the front of the radiator andcondenser are clean and not blocked withleaves, dirt or insects. See page 389 inSection 7−2 for additional information.

12 volt battery electrolyte level

Your Toyota has a maintenance free bat-tery. You do not have to add distilled wa-ter. For longer life of the battery, however,see page 400 for additional information.

Brake fluid level

Make sure the brake fluid level is correct.See page 390 in Section 7−2 for addition-al information.

Engine oil level

Check the level on the dipstick with thehybrid system turned off and the vehicleparked on a level spot. See page 386 inSection 7−2 for additional information.

General maintenance


372


Exhaust system

If you notice any change in the sound ofthe exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, havethe cause located and corrected immedi-ately. (See “Engine exhaust cautions” onpage 303 in Section 2.)

INSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be checkedregularly, e.g. while performing periodicservices, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Lights

Make sure the headlights, stop lights, taillights, turn signal lights, and other lightsare all working. Check headlight aim.

Service reminder indicators and warningbuzzers

Check that all service reminder indicatorsand warning buzzers function properly.

Steering wheel

Check that it has the specified free play.Be alert for changes in steering condition,such as hard steering or strange noise.

Seats

Check that all seat controls such as seatadjusters, seatback recliner, etc. operatesmoothly and that all latches lock securelyin any position. Check that the head re-straints move up and down smoothly andthat the locks hold securely in any latchedposition. For folding−down rear seatbacks,check that the latches lock securely.

Seat belts

Check that the seat belt system such asbuckles, retractors and anchors operateproperly and smoothly. Make sure the beltwebbing is not cut, frayed, worn or dam-aged.

Accelerator pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation anduneven pedal effort or catching.

Brake pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation andthat the pedal has the proper clearance.Check the brake booster function.

Brakes

In a safe place, check that the brakes donot pull to one side when applied.

Parking brake

Check that the pedal has the proper traveland that, on a safe incline, your vehicleis held securely with only the parkingbrake applied.

Transmission “Park” mechanism

Check the lock release button of the se-lector lever for proper and smooth opera-tion. On a safe incline, check that yourvehicle is held securely with the selectorlever in “P” position and all brakes re-leased.

OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be performedfrom time to time, unless otherwisespecified.

Fluid leaks

Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, wa-ter or other fluid after the vehicle hasbeen parked for a while. If you smell fuelfumes or notice any leak, have the causefound and corrected immediately.

Doors and engine hood

Check that all side doors and back dooroperate smoothly and all latches lock se-curely. Make sure the engine hood sec-ondary latch secures the hood from open-ing when the primary latch is released.


373


Tire inflation pressureCheck the pressure with a gauge ev-ery two weeks, or at least once amonth. See page 390 in Section 7−2for additional information.Tire surface and wheel nutsCheck the tires carefully for cuts,damage or excessive wear. See page393 in Section 7−2 for additional in-formation. When checking the tires,make sure no nuts are missing, andcheck the nuts for looseness. Tightenthem if necessary.Tire rotationRotate the tires according to themaintenance schedule. (For sched-uled maintenance information, pleaserefer to the “Scheduled MaintenanceGuide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-ment”.) See page 395 in Section 7−2for additional information.

Be on the alert for changes in perfor-mance, sounds, and visual tip−offs thatindicate service is needed. Some impor-tant clues are as follows:

� Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging

� Appreciable loss of power

� Strange engine noises

� A leak under the vehicle (however, wa-ter dripping from the air conditioningafter use is normal.)

� Change in exhaust sound (This mayindicate a dangerous carbon monoxideleak. Drive with the windows open andhave the exhaust system checked im-mediately.)

� Flat−looking tire; excessive tire squealwhen cornering; uneven tire wear

� Vehicle pulls to one side when drivingstraight on a level road

� Strange noises related to suspensionmovement

� Loss of brake effectiveness; spongyfeeling brake pedal; pedal almosttouches floor; vehicle pulls to one sidewhen braking

� Engine coolant temperature continuallyhigher than normal

If you notice any of these clues, take yourvehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon aspossible. It probably needs adjustment orrepair.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving with the ve-hicle unchecked. It could result in se-rious vehicle damage and possiblypersonal injury.

Does your vehicle needrepairing?


374


Some states have vehicle emission in-spection programs which include OBD(On−Board Diagnostics) checks.

The OBD system monitors the operationof the emission control system. When theOBD system determines that a problemexists somewhere in the emission controlsystem, the malfunction indicator lampcomes on. In this case, your vehicle maynot pass the I/M test and need to berepaired. Contact your Toyota dealer toservice the vehicle.

Even if the malfunction indicator lampdoes not come on, your vehicle may notpass the I/M test as readiness codeshave not been set in the OBD system.

Readiness codes are automatically setduring ordinary driving. However, when the12 volt battery is disconnected or rundown, the codes are erased. Also, de-pending on your driving habits, the codesmay not be completely set.

Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp hadcome on recently due to temporary mal-function such as a loose fuel tank cap,your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

The malfunction indicator lamp will go offafter taking several driving trips, but theerror code in the OBD system will not becleared unless about 40 trips or more aretaken.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M testeven the malfunction indicator lamp doesnot come on, contact your Toyota dealerto prepare the vehicle for re−testing.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance (I/M) programs


375


DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEIntroductionEngine compartment overview 376. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Removing the engine compartment covers 377. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuse locations 378. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Do−it−yourself service precautions 379. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Positioning the jack 381. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parts and tools 382. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7− 1


376


1. Windshield and rear window washerfluid tank

2. Brake fluid reservoir

3. Engine oil level dipstick

4. Engine coolant reservoir

5. Engine oil filler cap

6. Inverter coolant reservoir

7. Fuse blocks

8. Engine coolant radiator

9. Condenser

10. Inverter coolant radiator

11. Electric cooling fans

12. 12 volt battery

Engine compartment overview


377


High voltage current runs in the partsand cables in the engine compartment.Do not touch high voltage parts, cablesand connectors. For the locations ofhigh voltage parts and cables, see“—High voltage components” on page6 in Section 1−1.

CAUTION

Never touch, remove or disassemblehigh voltage parts and cables. It cancause severe burns or electric shockthat may result in death or seriousinjury.

Front cover

: Clips

Rear cover

: Clip

: Hooks (Hook up gently to remove.)

Removing the enginecompartment covers


378


Removing clip

Installing clip

Before checking the fuse or replacingthe left front light bulbs, etc. in theengine compartment, remove the enginecompartment covers as shown in theillustrations:

1. Push the core of the clips and removethe clips.

2. Remove the cover.

Be careful not to lose the removed plasticclips.

After checking the items, install the en-gine compartment covers and insert theplastic clips in their original positions.

NOTICE

After installing the engine compart-ment covers, make sure the coversare securely in their original posi-tions.

Fuse locations


379


Spare fuses

If you perform maintenance by yourself,be sure to follow the correct proceduregiven in this Section.

You should be aware that improper or in-complete servicing may result in operatingproblems.

Performing do−it−yourself maintenanceduring the warranty period may affect yourwarranty coverage. Read the separateToyota Warranty statement for details andsuggestions.

This Section gives instructions only forthose items that are relatively easy for anowner to perform. As explained in Section6, there are still a number of items thatmust be done by a qualified technicianwith special tools.

For information on tools and parts for do−it−yourself maintenance, see “Parts andtools” on page 382 in this Section.

Utmost care should be taken when work-ing on your vehicle to prevent accidentalinjury. Here are a few precautions thatyou should be especially careful to ob-serve:

Do−it−yourself serviceprecautions


380


CAUTION

� Never touch, remove or disassemblehigh voltage parts and cables.Touching, removing or disassem-bling those parts and cables cancause severe burns or electricshock that may result in death orserious injury. For the locations ofhigh voltage parts and cables, see“—High voltage components” onpage 6 in Section 1−1.

� When the hybrid system is on, keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom the moving fan. (Removingrings, watches, and ties is advis-able.)

� Right after driving, the enginecompartment—the engine, radiator,exhaust manifold and spark plugboots, etc.—will be hot. So be care-ful not to touch them. Oil, fluidsand spark plugs may also be hot.

� If the radiator is hot, do not removethe radiator cap or loosen the drainplugs to prevent burning yourself.

� Do not leave anything that mayburn easily, such as paper or rags,in the engine compartment.

� Do not smoke, cause sparks or al-low open flames around fuel or thebattery. Their fumes are flammable.

� When the hybrid system is operat-ing with the “READY” light on, theengine may suddenly start in somecases. When you inspect the enginecompartment, be sure to turn offthe hybrid system.

� Do not get under your vehicle withjust the body jack supporting it. Al-ways use automotive jack stands orother solid supports.

� Be sure that the ignition is off ifyou work near the electric coolingfans or radiator grille. With theignition on, the electric cooling fanswill automatically start to run if theengine coolant temperature is highand/or the air conditioning is on.

� Use eye protection whenever youwork on or under your vehiclewhere you may be exposed to flyingor falling material, fluid spray, etc.

� Brake fluid can harm your hands oreyes and damage painted surfaces.If fluid gets on your hands or inyour eyes, flush the affected areawith clean water immediately. If youstill feel uncomfortable with yourhands or eyes, go to the doctor.

� Used engine oil contains potentiallyharmful contaminants which maycause skin disorders such as in-flammation or skin cancer, so careshould be taken to avoid prolongedand repeated contact with it. To re-move used engine oil from yourskin, wash thoroughly with soapand water.

� Do not leave used oil within thereach of children.

� Dispose of used oil and filter onlyin a safe and acceptable manner.Do not dispose of used oil and fil-ter in household trash, in sewers oronto the ground. Call your dealer ora service station for informationconcerning recycling or disposal.

� Be extremely cautious when work-ing on the 12 volt battery. It con-tains poisonous and corrosivesulfuric acid.


381


NOTICE

� Remember that the 12 volt batteryand ignition cable carry high cur-rents or voltages. Be careful of ac-cidentally causing a short circuit.

� Add only “Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” or similar high quality eth-ylene glycol based non−silicate,non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−bo-rate coolant with long−life hybridorganic acid technology to fill theradiator. “Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 50% cool-ant and 50% deionized water (forthe U.S.A.) or 55% coolant and 45%deionized water (for Canada).

� If you spill some of the coolant, besure to wash it off with water toprevent it from damaging the partsor paint.

� Do not allow dirt or anything elseto fall through the spark plug holes.

� Use only spark plugs of the speci-fied type. Using other types willcause engine damage, loss of per-formance or radio noise.

� Do not reuse iridium−tipped sparkplugs by cleaning or regapping.

� Do not drive with the air cleanerfilter removed, or excessive enginewear could result. Also backfiringcould cause a fire in the enginecompartment.

� Be careful not to scratch the glasssurface with the wiper frame.

� When closing the engine hood,check to see that you have not for-gotten any tools, rags, etc.

Front

Rear (front wheel drive models)

Positioning the jack


382


Rear (all wheel drive models)

When jacking up your vehicle with thejack, position the jack correctly asshown in the illustrations.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observe thefollowing to reduce the possibility ofdeath or serious injury:

� Follow jacking instructions.

� Do not put any part of your bodyunder the vehicle supported by thejack. Personal injury may occur.

� Do not start the hybrid systemwhile your vehicle is supported bythe jack.

� Stop the vehicle on a level firmground, firmly set the parking brakeand put the hybrid transmission in“P”. Block the wheels on the oppo-site side of the jack up point ifnecessary.

� Make sure to set the jack properlyin the jack point. Raising the ve-hicle with jack improperly posi-tioned will damage the vehicle ormay allow the vehicle to fall off thejack and cause personal injury.

� Never get under the vehicle whenthe vehicle is supported by the jackalone; use vehicle support stands.

� Do not raise the vehicle with some-one in the vehicle.

� When raising the vehicle, do notplace any objects on top of or un-derneath the jack.

NOTICE

Make sure to place the jack correctly,or your vehicle may be damaged.

Here is a list of parts and tools you willneed to perform do−it−yourself mainte-nance. Remember all Toyota parts are de-signed in metric sizes, so your tools mustbe metric.

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Parts (if level is low):

� “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equiva-lent

See page 386 in Section 7−2 for de-tails about engine oil selection.

Tools:

� Rag or paper towel

� Funnel (only for adding oil)

CHECKING THE COOLANT LEVEL


� “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” orsimilar high quality ethylene glycolbased non−silicate, non−amine, non−ni-trite, and non−borate coolant with long−life hybrid organic acid technology.

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is amixture of 50% coolant and 50% deion-ized water (for the U.S.A.) or 55%coolant and 45% deionized water (forCanada).

Parts and tools


383


Tools:

� Funnel (only for adding coolant)

CHECKING BRAKE FLUID


� SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3brake fluid

Tools:

� Rag or paper towel

� Funnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING 12 VOLT BATTERYCONDITION

Tools:

� Warm water

� Baking soda

� Grease

� Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)

CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES

Parts (if replacement is necessary):

� Fuse with same amperage rating asoriginal

ADDING WASHER FLUID

Parts:

� Water

� Washer fluid containing antifreeze(for winter use)

Tools:

� Funnel

REPLACING LIGHT BULBS

Parts:

� Bulb with same number and wattagerating as original (See charts in“Replacing light bulbs” on page 404 inSection 7−3.)

Tools:

� Screwdriver


384



385


DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEEngine and ChassisChecking the engine oil level 386. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the coolant level 388. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking the radiators and condenser 389. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking brake fluid 390. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking tire inflation pressure 390. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing tires 393. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotating tires 395. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installing snow tires and chains 396. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing wheels 397. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aluminum wheel precautions 398. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7− 2


386


Low level Full level

Add oil O.K. Too full

With the hybrid system at operatingtemperature and turned off, check theoil level on the dipstick.

1. To get a correct reading, the vehicleshould be on level ground. After turningoff the hybrid system, wait a few min-utes for the oil to drain back into thebottom of the engine.

2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag underthe end and wipe it clean.

3. Reinsert the dipstick—push it in as faras it will go, or the reading will not becorrect.

4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oillevel while holding a rag under theend.

CAUTION

Be careful not to touch the hot ex-haust manifold.

NOTICE

� Be careful not to drop engine oil onthe vehicle components.

� To avoid drops of the engine oilfalling when you pull out the engineoil dipstick, make sure to hold arag under the dipstick.

If the oil level is below or only slightlyabove the low level, add engine oil ofthe same type as already in the engine.

Remove the oil filler cap and add engineoil in small quantities at a time, checkingthe dipstick. We recommend that you usea funnel when adding oil.

The approximate quantity of oil needed toraise the level between low and full on thedipstick is indicated as follows:

1.5 L (1.6 qt., 1.3 lmp. qt.)

For the engine oil capacity, see “Servicespecifications” on page 412 in Section 8.

When the level reaches within the correctrange, install the filler cap hand−tight.

NOTICE

� Be careful not to spill engine oil onthe vehicle components.

� Avoid overfilling, or the enginecould be damaged.

� Check the oil level on the dipstickonce again after adding the oil.

Checking the engine oil level


387


ENGINE OIL SELECTION

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used inyour Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalentto satisfy the following grade andviscosity.

Oil grade:ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity:SAE 5W−30

Outside temperature

SAE 5W−30 is the best choice for goodfuel economy and good starting in coldweather.

If SAE 5W−30 is not available, SAE10W−30 may be used. However, itshould be replaced with SAE 5W−30 atthe next oil change.

Oil identification mark

The ILSAC (International Lubricant Stan-dardization and Approval Committee) Certi-fication Mark is added to some oil con-tainers to help you select the oil youshould use.


388


To ensure excellent lubrication perfor-mance for your engine, “Toyota GenuineMotor Oil” is available, which has beenspecifically tested and approved for allToyota engines.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-ther details about “Toyota Genuine MotorOil”.

Gasoline engine coolant reservoir

Inverter coolant reservoir

Look at the see−through coolant reser-voir when the hybrid system is cold.The coolant level is satisfactory if it isbetween the “FULL” and “LOW” lineson the reservoir. If the level is low, addcoolant. (For coolant types, see “Cool-ant type selection” described below.)

The coolant level in the reservoir will varywith hybrid system temperature. However,if the level is on or below the “LOW” line,add coolant. Bring the level up to the“FULL” line.

If the coolant level drops within a shorttime after replenishing, there may be aleak in the system. Visually check theradiator, hoses, radiator cap and draincock and water pump.

If you can find no leak, have your Toyotadealer test the cap pressure and checkfor leaks in the cooling system.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do notremove the radiator cap when thecoolant may be hot.

Checking the coolant level


389


Coolant type selection

Use of improper coolants may damageyour cooling system.

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”or similar high quality ethylene glycolbased non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,and non−borate coolant with long−lifehybrid organic acid technology. (Coolantwith long−life hybrid organic acidtechnology is a combination of lowphosphates and organic acids.)

For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and50% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about −35�C(−31�F).

For Canada—“Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and45% deionized water. This coolant pro-vides protection down to about −42�C(−44�F).

NOTICE


Toyota recommends “Toyota Super LongLife Coolant”, which has been tested toensure that it will not cause corrosion norresult in malfunction of your coolantsystem with proper usage. “Toyota SuperLong Life Coolant” is formulated withlong−life hybrid organic acid technologyand has been specifically designed toavoid cooling system malfunction onToyota vehicles.

Please contact your Toyota dealer forfurther details.

If any of the above parts are extremelydirty or you are not sure of their condi-tion, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, be care-ful not to touch the radiator or con-denser when they may be hot afterdriving.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the radiatorsand condenser, do not perform thework by yourself.

Checking the radiators andcondenser


390


To check the fluid level, simply look atthe see−through reservoir. The levelshould be between the “MAX” and“MIN” lines on the reservoir.

It is normal for the brake fluid level to godown slightly as the brake pads wear orwhen the fluid level in the accumulator ishigh.

If the level is low, take your vehicle toa Toyota dealer as soon as possible. Donot drive your vehicle if the red brakesystem warning light is on. Call aToyota dealer for assistance.

If the fluid level goes down soon afteryour vehicle is serviced, it may indicatea serious mechanical problem. Haveyour vehicle checked by a Toyota deal-er.

CAUTION

Brake fluid can harm your hands oreyes. If fluid gets on your hands orin your eyes, flush the affected areawith clean water immediately. If youstill feel uncomfortable with yourhands or eyes, go to the doctor.

NOTICE

If brake fluid is spilled on the vehicle,be sure to wipe it off to prevent dam-age to parts or paint.

Type A

Checking brake fluidChecking tire inflationpressure


391


Type B

Keep your tire inflation pressuresat the proper level.The recommended cold tire inflationpressures, tire sizes and the com-bined weight of occupants and cargo(vehicle capacity weight) are de-scribed on pages 410 and 415. Theyare also on the tire and loading infor-mation label.You should check the tire inflationpressure every two weeks, or at leastonce a month. And do not forget thespare!

The following instructions forchecking tire inflation pressureshould be observed:� The pressure should be

checked only when the tires arecold. If your vehicle has beenparked for at least 3 hours and hasnot been driven for more than 1.5km or 1 mile since, you will getan accurate cold tire inflation pres-sure reading.

� Always use a tire pressuregauge. The appearance of a tirecan be misleading. Besides, tireinflation pressures that are evenjust a few pounds off can degraderide and handling.

� Do not bleed or reduce tireinflation pressure after driving.It is normal for the tire inflationpressure to be higher after driving.

� Never exceed the vehicle capac-ity weight. Passenger and lug-gage weight should be located sothat the vehicle is balanced.


392


Tire pressure gauge

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENTPROCEDURE1. Remove the tire valve cap.2. Press the tip of the tire pressure

gauge to the tire valve.3. Read the pressure using the grad-

uations of the gauge.4. In case the tire inflation pressure

is not within the prescribed range,insert the compressed air from thevalve. In case of applying toomuch air, press the center of thevalve and release the air to adjust.

5. After completing the tire inflationpressure measurement and ad-justment, apply soapy water to thevalve and check for leakage.

6. Install the tire valve cap.If a gauge and air pump are not avail-able, have your vehicle checked byyour Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Be sure to reinstall the tire valvecaps. Without the valve caps, dirtor moisture could get into thevalve core and cause air leakage.If the caps have been lost, havenew ones put on as soon as pos-sible.

Incorrect tire inflation pressure maywaste fuel, reduce the comfort of driv-ing, reduce tire life and make your ve-hicle less safe to drive.If a tire frequently needs refilling,have it checked by your Toyota deal-er.

CAUTION

Keep your tires properly inflated.Otherwise, the following condi-tions may occur and cause an ac-cident resulting in death or seri-ous injuries.Low tire pressure (underinfla-tion)—� Excessive wear� Uneven wear� Poor handling� Possibility of blowouts from an

overheated tire� Poor sealing of the tire bead� Wheel deformation and/or tire

separation� A greater possibility of tire

damage from road hazards


393


High tire pressure (overinfla-tion)—� Poor handling� Excessive wear� Uneven wear� A greater possibility of tire

damage from road hazards

Tread wear indicator

CHECKING YOUR TIRESCheck the tire’s tread for treadwear indicators. If the indicatorsshow, replace the tires. The loca-tion of tread wear indicators isshown by the “TWI” or “Δ” marks,etc., molded on the sidewall ofeach tire.

The tires on your Toyota have built−intread wear indicators to help youknow when the tires need replace-ment. When the tread depth wears to1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indica-tors will appear. If you can see theindicators in two or more adjacentgrooves, the tire should be replaced.The lower the tread, the higher therisk of skidding.Depending on driving conditions, yourtires may wear more rapidly thanthose of conventional vehicles.The effectiveness of snow tires islost if the tread wears down below4 mm (0.16 in.).If you have tire damage such ascuts, splits, cracks deep enough toexpose the fabric, or bulges indi-cating internal damage, the tireshould be replaced.If a tire often goes flat or cannot beproperly repaired due to the size orlocation of a cut or other damage, itshould be replaced. If you are notsure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

Checking and replacing tires


394


If air loss occurs while driving, do notcontinue driving. Driving even a shortdistance can damage a tire beyondrepair.Any tires which are over 6 yearsold must be checked by a qualifiedtechnician even if damage is notobvious.Tires deteriorate with age even if theyhave never or seldom been used.This applies also to the spare tire andtires stored for future use.

REPLACING YOUR TIRESWhen replacing a tire, use a tire ofthe same size and construction,and the same or greater maximumload as the originally installedtires. Also, on all wheel drive mod-els, all the tires must be the samebrand and have the same tread pat-terns.Using any other size or type of tiremay seriously affect handling, ride,speedometer/odometer calibration,ground clearance, and clearance be-tween the body and tires or snowchains.Check that the maximum load of thereplaced tire is greater than 1/2 of theGross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR)of either the front axle or the rearaxle, whichever is greater. As for themaximum load of the tire, see the loadlimit at maximum cold tire inflationpressure mentioned on the sidewallof the tire, and as for the Gross AxleWeight Ratings (GAWR), see the Cer-tification Label.

For details about the side wall of thetire and the Certification Label, seepages 307 and 309.

CAUTION

Observe the following instruc-tions. Otherwise, an accidentmay occur resulting in death orserious injuries.� Do not mix radial, bias belted,

or bias−ply tires on your ve-hicle, as this may cause dan-gerous handling characteris-tics resulting in loss of control.

� Do not use tires other than themanufacturer’s recommendedsize, as this may cause danger-ous handling characteristicsresulting in loss of control.


395


� All wheel drive models:Do not use tires of differentbrands, sizes, construction ortread patterns, as this maycause dangerous handlingcharacteristics resulting inloss of control.

Toyota recommends all four tires,or at least both of the front or reartires be replaced at a time as a set.See “If you have a flat tire” on page342 in Section 4 for tire change proce-dure.When a tire is replaced, the wheelshould always be balanced.An unbalanced wheel may affect ve-hicle handling and tire life. Wheelscan get out of balance with regularuse and should therefore be balancedoccasionally.When replacing a tubeless tire, theair valve should also be replacedwith a new one.

To equalize tire wear and help ex-tend tire life, Toyota recommendsthat you rotate your tires accord-ing to the maintenance schedule.(For scheduled maintenance infor-mation, please refer to the “Sched-uled Maintenance Guide” or “Own-er’s Manual Supplement”.)However, the most appropriate tim-ing for tire rotation may vary ac-cording to your driving habits androad surface conditions.See “If you have a flat tire” on page342 in Section 4 for tire change proce-dure.

When rotating tires, check for unevenwear and damage. Abnormal wear isusually caused by incorrect tire pres-sure, improper wheel alignment, out−of−balance wheels, or severe braking.

Rotating tires


396


WHEN TO USE SNOW TIRES ORCHAINS

Snow tires or chains are recommendedwhen driving on snow or ice.

On wet or dry roads, conventional tiresprovide better traction than snow tires.

SNOW TIRE SELECTION

If you need snow tires, select tires ofthe same size, construction and loadcapacity as the originally installed tires.Also, on all wheel drive models, all thetires must be the same brand and havethe same tread patterns.

Do not use tires other than those men-tioned above. Do not install studded tireswithout first checking local regulations forpossible restrictions.

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions.Otherwise, an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

� Do not use snow tires other thanthe manufacturer’s recommended si-ze, as this may cause dangeroushandling characteristics resulting inloss of control.

� All wheel drive models:Do not use snow tires of differentbrands, sizes, construction or treadpatterns, as this may cause danger-ous handling characteristics result-ing in loss of control.

SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION

Snow tires should be installed on allwheels.

Installing snow tires on the front wheelsonly can lead to an excessive differencein road grip capability between the frontand rear tires, which could cause loss ofvehicle control.

When storing removed tires, you shouldstore them in a cool dry place.

Mark the direction of rotation and be sureto install them in the same direction whenreplacing.

CAUTION

� Do not drive with the snow tiresincorrectly inflated.

� Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph)with any type of snow tires.

Side chain

Cross chain

TIRE CHAIN SELECTION

Use the tire chains of correct size.

Use the following type chains.

mm (in.)A Diameter of side chain 3 (0.12)B Width of side chain 10 (0.39)C Length of side chain 30 (1.18)D Diameter of cross chain 4 (0.16)E Width of cross chain 14 (0.55)F Length of cross chain 25 (0.98)

Regulations regarding the use of tirechains vary according to location ortype of road, so always check thembefore installing chains.

Installing snow tires andchains


397


NOTICE

If the wrong combination of tire andchain is used, the chains could dam-age the vehicle body.

CHAIN INSTALLATION

Install the chains on the front tires astightly as possible. Do not use tirechains on the rear tires. Retightenchains after driving 0.5—1.0 km(1/4—1/2 mile).

When installing chains on your tires, care-fully follow the instructions of the chainmanufacturer.

If wheel covers are used, they will bescratched by the chain band, so removethe covers before putting on the chains.

CAUTION

� Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) orthe chain manufacturer’s recom-mended speed limit, whichever islower.

� Drive carefully avoiding bumps,holes, and sharp turns, which maycause the vehicle to bounce.

� Avoid sharp turns or locked−wheelbraking, as use of chains may ad-versely affect vehicle handling.

� When driving with chains installed,be sure to drive carefully. Slowdown before entering curves toavoid losing control of the vehicle.Otherwise an accident may occur.

WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS

If you have wheel damage such asbending, cracks or heavy corrosion, thewheel should be replaced.

If you fail to replace a damaged wheel,the tire may slip off the wheel or causeloss of handling control.

WHEEL SELECTION

When replacing wheels, care should betaken to ensure that the wheels are re-placed by ones with the same load ca-pacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.

Correct replacement wheels are availableat your Toyota dealer.

A wheel of a different size or type mayadversely affect handling, wheel and bear-ing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odom-eter calibration, stopping ability, headlightaim, bumper height, vehicle ground clear-ance, and tire or snow chain clearance tothe body and chassis.

Replacing wheels


398


Replacement with used wheels is not rec-ommended as they may have been sub-jected to rough treatment or high mileageand could fail without warning. Also, bentwheels which have been straightened mayhave structural damage and thereforeshould not be used. Never use an innertube in a leaking wheel which is designedfor a tubeless tire.

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions.Otherwise, an accident may occur re-sulting in death or serious injuries.

� Do not use wheels other than themanufacturer’s recommended size,as this may cause dangerous han-dling characteristics resulting inloss of control.

� All wheel drive models:Do not use wheels of differentbrands, sizes and types, as thismay cause dangerous handlingcharacteristics resulting in loss ofcontrol.

� When installing aluminum wheels,check that the wheel nuts are tightafter driving your vehicle the first 1600km (1000 miles).

� If you have rotated, repaired, orchanged your tires, check that thewheel nuts are still tight after driving1600 km (1000 miles).

� When using tire chains, be careful notto damage the aluminum wheels.

� Use only Toyota wheel nuts andwrench designed for your aluminumwheels.

� When balancing your wheels, use onlyToyota balance weights or equivalentand a plastic or rubber hammer.

� As with any wheel, periodically checkyour aluminum wheels for damage. Ifdamaged, replace immediately.

Aluminum wheel precautions


399


DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCEElectrical componentsChecking 12 volt battery condition 400. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 volt battery recharging precautions 401. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking and replacing fuses 402. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding washer fluid 403. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing light bulbs 404. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7− 3


400


CAUTION

BATTERY PRECAUTIONS

The battery produces flammable andexplosive hydrogen gas.

� Do not cause a spark from the bat-tery with tools.

� Do not smoke or light a match nearthe battery.

The electrolyte contains poisonousand corrosive sulfuric acid.

� Avoid contact with eyes, skin orclothes.

� Never ingest electrolyte.

� Wear protective safety glasses whenworking near the battery.

� Keep children away from the bat-tery.

EMERGENCY MEASURES

� If electrolyte gets in your eyes,flush your eyes with clean waterimmediately and get immediatemedical attention. If possible, con-tinue to apply water with a spongeor cloth while en route to the medi-cal office.

� If electrolyte gets on your skin,thoroughly wash the contact area. Ifyou feel pain or burning, get medi-cal attention immediately.

� If electrolyte gets on your clothes,there is a possibility of its soakingthrough to your skin, so immediate-ly take off the exposed clothing andfollow the procedure above, if nec-essary.

� If you accidentally swallow electro-lyte, drink a large quantity of wateror milk. Follow with milk of magne-sia, beaten raw egg or vegetableoil. Then go immediately for emer-gency help.

Hold−down clamp

Ground cable

Terminals

Check the battery for corroded or looseterminal connections, cracks, or loosehold−down clamp.

a. If the battery is corroded, wash it offwith a solution of warm water and bak-ing soda. Coat the outside of the termi-nals with grease to prevent further cor-rosion.

b. If the terminal connections are loose,tighten their clamp nuts—but do notovertighten.

c. Tighten the hold−down clamp onlyenough to keep the battery firmly inplace. Overtightening may damage thebattery case.

Checking 12 volt batterycondition——Precautions

—Checking the 12 volt batteryexterior


401


NOTICE

� Be sure the hybrid system and allaccessories are off before perform-ing maintenance.

� When checking the battery, removethe ground cable from the negativeterminal (“−” mark) first and rein-stall it last.

� Be careful not to cause a short cir-cuit with tools.

� Take care no solution gets into thebattery when washing it.

Type A

Green DarkClear or light yellow

Type B

Blue White Red

CHECKING BY INDICATOR

Check the battery condition by the indi-cator color.

Indicator colorCondition

Type A Type B

Green Blue Good

Dark White

Charging necessary.Have batterychecked by yourToyota dealer.

Clear orlight

yellowRed

Have batterychecked by yourToyota dealer.

During recharging, the battery is pro-ducing hydrogen gas.

Therefore, before recharging:

1. If recharging with the battery installedon the vehicle, be sure to disconnectthe ground cable.

2. Be sure the power switch on the re-charger is off when connecting thecharger cables to the battery and whendisconnecting them.

CAUTION

� Always charge the battery in an un-confined area. Do not charge thebattery in a garage or closed roomwhere there is not sufficient ventila-tion.

� Only do a slow charge (5 A orless). Charging at a quicker rate isdangerous. The battery may ex-plode, causing personal injuries.

NOTICE

Never recharge the battery with thehybrid system on. Also, be sure allaccessories are turned off.

—Checking battery condition12 volt battery rechargingprecautions


402


Good Blown

Type A

Good Blown

Type B

Good Blown

Type CIf the headlights or other electricalcomponents do not work, check thefuses. If any of the fuses are blown,they must be replaced.

See “Fuse locations” on page 378 in Sec-tion 7−1 for locations of the fuses.

Turn the ignition switch and inoperativecomponent off. Pull the suspected fusestraight out and check it.

Determine which fuse may be causing theproblem. The lid of the fuse box showsthe name of the circuit for each fuse. Seepage 416 in Section 8 for the functionscontrolled by each circuit.

Checking and replacing fuses


403


Type A fuses can be pulled out by usingthe pull−out tool. The location of the pull−out tool is shown in the illustration.

If you are not sure whether the fuse hasblown, try replacing the suspected fusewith one that you know is good.

If the fuse has blown, push a new fuseinto the clip.

Only install a fuse with the amperage rat-ing designated on the fuse box lid.

If you do not have a spare fuse, in anemergency you can pull out the “CRT” or“CIG” fuse, which may be dispensable fornormal driving, and use it if its amperagerating is the same.

If you cannot use one of the same amper-age, use one that is lower, but as closeto the rating as possible. If the amperageis lower than that specified, the fusemight blow out again but this does notindicate anything wrong. Be sure to getthe correct fuse as soon as possible andreturn the substitute to its original clip.

It is a good idea to purchase a set ofspare fuses and keep them in your ve-hicle for emergencies.

If the new fuse immediately blows out,there is a problem with the electrical sys-tem. Have your Toyota dealer correct it assoon as possible.

CAUTION

Never use a fuse with a higher am-perage rating, or any other object, inplace of a fuse. This may cause ex-tensive damage and possibly a fire.

If the washer does not work or the“LOW WASHER FLUID” warning mes-sage appears on the multi−informationdisplay, the washer tank may be empty.Add washer fluid.

You may use plain water as washer fluid.However, in cold areas where tempera-tures range below the freezing point, usewasher fluid containing antifreeze. Thisproduct is available at your Toyota dealerand most auto parts stores. Follow themanufacturer’s directions for how much tomix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or anyother substitute because it may dam-age your vehicle’s paint.

Adding washer fluid


404


The following illustrations show how togain access to the bulbs. When replacinga bulb, make sure the ignition switch andlight switch are off. Use bulbs with thewattage ratings given in the table.

The stop and tail lights consist of a num-ber of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out,take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer tohave the light replaced.

If two or more LEDs burn out, your ve-hicle may not conform to local laws(SAE).

CAUTION

� To prevent burning yourself, do notreplace the light bulbs while theyare hot.

� Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and require special handling.They can burst or shatter ifscratched or dropped. Hold a bulbonly by its plastic or metal case.Do not touch the glass part of abulb with bare hands.

NOTICE

Only use a bulb of the listed type.

The inside of the lens of exterior lightssuch as headlights may temporarily fog upwhen the lens becomes wet in the rain orin a car wash. This is not a problembecause the fogging is caused by thetemperature difference between the outsideand inside of the lens, just like thewindshield fogs up in the rain. However, ifthere is a large drop of water on theinside of the lens, or if there is waterpooled inside the light, contact yourToyota dealer.

Light bulbs BulbNo.

W Type

Headlights (low) 9006 51 A

Headlights (high) 9005 60 B

Front fog lights 9006 51 A

Front turn signals/parking and frontside marker lights

— 21/5 C

Rear side markerlights

168 5 E

Rear turn signallights

— 21 D

Back−up lights 921 16 E

High mounted stoplight

921 16 E

License platelights

— 5 E

Interior lights — 8 F

Personal lights — 5 E

Vanity lights — 2 F

Door courtesylights

168 5 E

Glove box light 74 1.2 E

Replacing light bulbs—


405


A: HB4 halogen bulbsB: HB3 halogen bulbsC: Single end bulbsD: Wedge base bulbs (amber)E: Wedge base bulbs (clear)F: Double end bulbs

1. Open the hood. Turn the bulb basecounterclockwise to the front of thevehicle as shown.

2. Pull the bulb out of the bulb baseand install a new bulb.

If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

—Headlights


406


3. Insert the bulb base into the mount-ing hole by turning it clockwise.

Aiming is not necessary after replacingthe bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec-essary, contact your Toyota dealer.

If any of the following lights burns out,contact your Toyota dealer.

� Front fog lights

� Front turn signals/parking and frontside marker lights

� Rear side marker lights

NOTICE

Do not try to replace any of the lightbulbs mentioned above by yourself.You may damage the vehicle.

—Front fog, front turn signal/parking and front side marker,and rear side marker lights

—Rear turn signal andback−up lights


407


a: Back−up lightb: Rear turn signal light

—High mounted stoplight


408


Use a Phillips−head screwdriver.

—License plate lights


409


SPECIFICATIONSSpecificationsDimensions and weights 410. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engine 410. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel 411. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traction motor 411. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid battery 411. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service specifications 412. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tires 415. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses 416. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 8


410


Model:3MZ−FE

Type:6 cylinder V type 4 cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke, mm (in.):92.0 � 83.0 (3.62 � 3.27)

Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.):3311 (202.1)

Dimensions and weights

Overall length mm (in.)

Overall width mm (in.)

Overall height∗1 mm (in.)

Wheelbase mm (in.)

Front tread mm (in.)

Rear tread mm (in.)

Vehicle capacity weight (occupants + luggage) kg (lb.)

Front wheel drive models All wheel drive models

4715 (185.6) 4715 (185.6)

1825 (71.9) 1825 (71.9)

1695 (66.7)∗2

1730 (68.1)∗3

1750 (68.9)∗4

2715 (106.9) 2715 (106.9)

1575 (62.0) 1575 (62.0)

1565 (61.6) 1555 (61.2)

390 (860)∗5

526 (1159)∗6390 (860)∗5

526 (1159)∗6

∗1: Unladen vehicle∗2: Without roof rails∗3: With roof rails∗4: With roof luggage carrier∗5: Without third seat∗6: With third seat∗7: Without towing package∗8: With towing package

1690 (66.5)∗2

1725 (67.9)∗3

1745 (68.7)∗4

Towing capacity (trailer weight + cargo weight) kg (lb.)

905 (2000)∗7

1588 (3500)∗8905 (2000)∗7

1588 (3500)∗8

Engine


411


Fuel type:Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87(Research Octane Number 91) or higher

Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., Imp. gal.):65 (17.2, 14.3)

Type:Permanent magnet synchronous motor

Maximum output:Front motor

123 kWRear motor∗

50 kW

Maximum torque:Front motor

333 N·m (33.9 kgf·m, 245 ft·lbf)Rear motor∗

130 N·m (13.2 kgf·m, 95 ft·lbf)∗: All wheel drive models only

Type:Nickel−Metal hydride battery

Voltage:9.6 V/module

Capacity:6.5 Ah (3HR)

Quantity:30 modules

Overall voltage:288 V

Fuel Traction motor Hybrid battery


412


ENGINE

Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.):Intake 0.15—0.25 (0.006—0.010)Exhaust 0.25—0.35 (0.010—0.014)

Spark plug type:DENSO SK20R11NGK IFR6A11

Spark plug gap, mm(in.):1.1 (0.043)

ENGINE LUBRICATION

Oil capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Imp.qt.):

With filter 4.7 (5.0, 4.1)Without filter 4.5 (4.8, 4.0)

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used inyour Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalentto satisfy the following grade andviscosity.

Oil grade:ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended oil viscosity:SAE 5W−30

Outside temperature


COOLING SYSTEM

Total capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):

Gasoline engine coolantWith rear heater 11.6 (12.3, 10.2)Without rear heater

10.3 (10.9, 9.0)

Inverter coolant 3.4 (3.6, 3.0)

Coolant type:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” isused in your Toyota vehicle at factoryfill. In order to avoid technical problems,only use “Toyota Super Long LifeCoolant” or similar high quality ethyleneglycol based non−silicate, non−amine,non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant withlong−life hybrid organic acid technology.(Coolant with long−life hybrid organicacid technology is a combination of lowphosphates and organic acids.)


Please contact your Toyota dealer forfurther details.

Service specifications


413


12 VOLT BATTERY

Open voltage∗ at 20�C (68�F):12.6—12.8V Fully charged12.2—12.4V Half charged11.8—12.0V Discharged

∗: Voltage that is checked 20 minutes af-ter the key is removed with all the lightsturned off

Charging rates:5 A max.

FRONT TRANSAXLE

Fluid capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):Without towing package

3.9 (4.1, 3.4)With towing package

4.2 (4.4, 3.7)

Fluid type:Toyota Genuine ATF WS or equivalent

Change automatic transmission fluid onlyas necessary.

Generally, it is necessary to changeautomatic transmission fluid only if yourvehicle is driven under one of the SpecialOperating Conditions listed in your“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement”. Whenchanging the automatic transmission fluid,use only “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” (ATFJWS3324 or NWS9638) to aid in assuringoptimum transaxle performance.

Notice: Using transmission fluid otherthan “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may ul-timately damage the transaxles of yourvehicle.


REAR TRANSAXLE(all wheel drive models)

Fluid capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):1.8 (1.9, 1.6)

Fluid type:Toyota Genuine ATF WS or equivalent

Change automatic transmission fluid onlyas necessary.

Generally, it is necessary to changeautomatic transmission fluid only if yourvehicle is driven under one of the SpecialOperating Conditions listed in your“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or“Owner’s Manual Supplement”. Whenchanging the automatic transmission fluid,use only “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” (ATFJWS3324 or NWS9638) to aid in assuringoptimum transaxle performance.

Notice: Using transmission fluid otherthan “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may ul-timately damage the transaxles of yourvehicle.



414


BRAKES

Minimum pedal clearance when depressedwith the force of 500 N (51 kgf, 112 lbf)with the hybrid system on, mm (in.):

90 (3.5)

Pedal free play, mm (in.):1—2 (0.04—0.08)

Pad wear limit, mm (in.):1.0 (0.04)

Lining wear limit, mm (in.):1.0 (0.04)

Parking brake adjustment when depressedwith the force of 294 N (30 kgf, 66 lbf):

5—7 clicks

Fluid type:SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

STEERING

Wheel free play:Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)


415


Tire size and cold tire inflation pressure:kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)

Tire sizeTire inflation pressure

Wheel sizeFront Rear Spare

225/65R17 101S 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 17 � 6 1/2 J

When driving under the above load condition at sustained high speeds above 160 km/h (100 mph), in countries wheresuch speeds are permitted by−low, inflate the front and rear tires to the following tire inflation pressure provided thatit does not exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure molded on the tire sidewall.

240 kPa (2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar, 35 psi)Wheel nut torque, N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf):

103 (10.5, 76)NOTE: For a complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pres-

sure” through “Aluminum wheel precautions”, pages 390 through 398, in Section 7−2.

Tires


416


Engine compartment

Engine compartment

Fuses (type A)

1. ETCS 10 A: Hybrid system

2. DC/DC−S 10 A: Hybrid system

3. ABS NO.2 10 A: Electronically con-trolled brake system


5. BATT FAN 15 A: Hybrid system


7. OIL PUMP 10 A: Transmission fluidcooling system

8. ST 7.5 A: Hybrid system

Engine compartment

9. RR HTR 15 A: Rear heater system

10. DRL 7.5 A: Daytime running light sys-tem

11. H−LP L LWR 15 A: Left−hand head-light (low beam)

12. H−LP L UPR 15 A: Left−hand headlight(high beam)

13. H−LP R UPR 15 A: Right−hand head-light (high beam)

14. PWR OUTLET NO.2 20 A: Power out-let (115 VAC)

15. TOWING 20 A: Trailer lights

Fuses


417


Instrument panel

16. HAZ 15 A: Turn signal lights, emergen-cy flashers

17. SECURITY 15 A: Theft deterrent sys-tem

18. AM2 NO.1 30 A: “IGN”, “IG2” and “ST”fuses

19. MPX−B1 7.5 A: Electric power steeringsystem

20. HORN 10 A: Horns

21. RADIO NO.1 25 A: Audio system

22. ECU−B NO.1 7.5 A: Theft deterrentsystem, air conditioning system,gauges and meters, electric moonroof,engine immobilizer system, multiplexcommunication system

23. DOME 10 A: Personal lights, interiorlights, vanity lights, ignition switch light,wireless remote control system, gaugesand meters, navigation system

24. DOOR NO.1 25 A: Power door locksystem

25. A/F 25 A: Air/fuel control system

26. CRT 7.5 A: Rear seat entertainmentsystem, navigation system screen

27. H−LP R LWR 15 A: Right−hand head-light (low beam)

28. INV W/P 15 A: Hybrid system

29. IGCT NO.5 10 A: Hybrid system

30. WATER PUMP 10 A: Air conditioningsystem

31. IGCT NO.4 10 A: Emission controlsystem, transmission control system,air/fuel control system

32. IGCT NO.3 10 A: Hybrid system, fuelpump

33. IGCT NO.2 10 A: Hybrid system

34. IGN 10 A: Meters and gauges, SRSairbag system, hybrid system, electroni-cally controlled brake system, engineimmobilizer system

35. RAD NO.2 7.5 A: Audio system, rearseat entertainment system, navigationsystem, air conditioning system, multi-plex communication system

36. CIG 15 A: Power outlet (12 VDC)

37. P RR DOOR 20 A: Power windows

38. PWR OUTLET1 15 A: Power outlets(12 VDC)

39. FR FOG 20 A: Front fog lights

40. ECU−IG 10 A: Electronically controlledbrake system, transmission control sys-tem, electric power steering system,theft deterrent system

41. WIPER 25 A: Windshield wipers

42. D RR DOOR 20 A: Power windows

43. D FR DOOR 25 A: Power windows,power door lock system, door courtesylight

44. S/ROOF 20 A: Electric moonroof

45. HEATER 10 A: Air conditioning system,rear heater system, rear window defog-ger, hybrid system


418


46. IG1 7.5 A: Hybrid system, power doorlock system, multiplex communicationsystem, airbag on−off indicator lights,turn signal lights, back−up lights, out-side rear view mirror defoggers, autoanti−glare inside rear view mirror, pow-er outlet (115 VAC), seat heaters, navi-gation system

47. RR WIP 15 A: Rear window wiper

48. STOP 20 A: Stop lights, high mountedstoplight, electronically controlled brakesystem, transmission control system,hybrid system

49. OBD 7.5 A: On−board diagnosis sys-tem

50. SEAT HTR 15 A: Seat heaters

51. IG2 15 A: Multiport fuel injection sys-tem/sequential fuel injection system,engine ignition system

52. WASHER 20 A: Windshield washer,rear window washer

53. FUEL OPN 7.5 A: Fuel filler dooropening system

54. FR DEF 20 A: Windshield wiper deicer,rear view mirror defoggers

55. P FR DOOR 20 A: Power windows,door courtesy light

56. TAIL 10 A: Parking lights, tail lights,side marker lights, license plate lights,front fog lights

57. PANEL 7.5 A: Instrument panel lights

Fuses (type B)

58. ABS MTR2 30 A: Electronically con-trolled brake system

59. ABS MTR1 30 A: Electronically con-trolled brake system

60. HEATER 50 A: Air conditioning system,“WATER PUMP” fuse

61. RR HTR 30 A: Rear heater system

62. RR DEF 30 A: Rear window defogger

63. RDI FAN NO.1 40 A: Electric coolingfan

64. RDI FAN NO.2 40 A: Electric coolingfan

65. MAIN 40 A: “H−LP L LWR”, “H−LP LUPR”, “H−LP R LWR”, “H−LP R UPR”and “DRL” fuses

66. IGCT NO.1 50 A: “INV W/P”, “IGCTNO.2”, “IGCT NO.3”, “IGCT NO.4” and“IGCT NO.5” fuses

67. AM1 40 A: “ECU−IG”, “WASHER”,“IG1”, “WIPER”, “RR WIP”, “HEATER(10 A)”, “RAD NO.2” and “CIG” fuses

68. POWER 30 A: Power seat

Fuses (type C)

69. DC/DC 120 A: Hybrid system


419


REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S.OWNERSReporting safety defects for U.S. ownersReporting safety defects for U.S. owners 420. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 9


420


If you believe that your vehicle has a de-fect which could cause a crash or couldcause injury or death, you should immedi-ately inform the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A.,Inc. (Toll−free: 1−800−331−4331).

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, itmay open an investigation, and if it findsthat a safety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall and remedycampaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-come involved in individual problems be-tween you, your dealer, or Toyota MotorSales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may either callthe Auto Safety Hotline toll−free at1−888−327−4236 (or 366−0123 in Wash-ington, DC area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S.Department of Transportation, Washington,DC 20590. You can also obtain other in-formation about motor vehicle safety fromthe Hotline.

Reporting safety defects forU.S. owners



Publication No. OM48685UPart No. 01999-48685Printed in Japan 01−0608−00

HV ( U)

Quick index

� If a service reminder indicator or warning buzzer comes on 144. . . . . . . . . . .

� If a warning message appears 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If your vehicle will not start 338. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If your vehicle overheats 341. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If you have a flat tire 342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If your vehicle needs to be towed 353. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� If a road accident occurs 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� Tips for driving during break−in period 299. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� How to start the hybrid system 324. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

� General maintenance 371. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gas station information

Fuel type:

UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) orhigher

See page 299 for detailed information.

Fuel tank capacity: 65 L (17.2 gal., 14.3 Imp.gal.)

Engine oil: ILSAC multigrade engine oil is recommended.

See page 387 for detailed information.

Tire information: See pages 390 through 398.

Tire inflation pressure: See page 415.

U−5

C



You should know as much about the quality and

importance of proper maintenance of your new

vehicle as the people who built it.

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual

tells you how to maintain your vehicle and

enables you to correctly perform your own

maintenance.The best way to keep your new vehicle in toprunning order is to maintain it properly fromthe moment you drive it off the showroomfloor.The Toyota authorized Repair Manual ispacked with literally everything you need toknow to perform your own maintenance invirtually every area of your new vehicle.

Hybrid vehicles contain high voltage parts and cables that are extremely dangerous and may cause severe injury oreven death if handled improperly. Only technicians who have participated in technical training for the inspectionand servicing of high voltage systems are qualified to do maintenance work on components related to the vehicle’shybrid system. For repair of your hybrid system, visit your Toyota dealer or other qualified technicians.



Where to obtain the

Repair Manual

The repair manual for HIGHLANDER may be pur-

chased from any Toyota dealer or the Material Dis-

tribution Center. To purchase the repair manual,

please contact your Toyota dealer or call the Mate-rial Distribution Center toll−free at

1−800−622−2033.

Maintenance procedures for the engine,

chassis, body, electrical system, and more,

are clearly explained and illustrated.

Periodic maintenance and tune−up

Periodic maintenance and tune−up helps to preventsmall problems from growing into larger ones later on.The repair manual outlines exactly what maintenanceis required and clearly explains how to do the workyourself step−by−step.Areas covered include such things as spark plug re-placement, valve clearance adjustment and engine oiland filter replacement.



WE REALLY CARE ABOUT YOU � PLEASE BUCKLE UP

Toyota has made a special effort to encourage use of seat belts.

Toyota belts are:

� Comfortable

� Easy to use

� Convenient

We encourage you to use your belts every time you drive.

U

foreword - toyota · 2017. 7. 21. · tions. section 1−1 explains the characteristics of the...

Documents